Home

- Syd-Com

1. 395 Charge Rate per 4 396 Flexible Nurnberirig ku ER 397 Time Service Switching 397 Time Service Start Time iocus tede ecu audi lie nde 397 Automatic Trunk Group Access Assignment 397 System Password for 397 System Password for User nennen nennen rennen nennen rennen 398 Manager Password 398 Verified Code 0 2 00 ennt rennen nnns nnne nnne nennen 398 Verified Code Ano ede da cn goa 398 Verified Code Password ssssssssssssssese eene nnne nnne rennen nnns enr nennen en 398 Verified Code COS Number sss seen en nennen rennen tnter nennen en 398 Decimal Point for 398 CUIMONCY ee 399 Main Processor Software 399 Hold Recall B NL 400 Transfer Recall 400 Intercept TIME siisii 400 Hot Line Waiting 400 Automatic Redial Repeat 400 Automatic Redial Int
2. 178 ET NICE IUe PL 178 T1 Line Service ML m 180 TT Life eio otia SO Ee uia EM Lcid 180 Voice Mail PeatUFG68 uiesiissusacu nean nisazR2 ry kRE DAE ExEEU X HD nA IER SESUC SERM EC RAE 182 EASIER EC P 182 Voice Mail DTMF Water up sissies teehee 185 Voice Mail DPT Digital 191 Digital Wireless Extension DWX Features 195 Digital Wireless Extension DWX 195 DWX Ring 196 DWX Directory 198 DWX Feature Buttons sinici iea aE R EA R 199 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 200 Administrative Information Output Features eene 201 SMOR M PD TE 201 Charge I iT Hc 206 Extension Controlling 209 Personal Password 8 eene 209 Personal Programme RE netu SU Rer Ron ER K Ra UR tup RU UN HERR OR 210 Walking EXIBISIOD aas adsense eeu ta dash a adeb arte ipae bancs 211 Timed Reminder e re i e Ere
3. 125 Conference 5 125 oT om T 126 Privacy FG GAS Cs OE 127 Paging Features nxakintiia stu i idbl ax ARU USER SEU URAFIE EDU REGERE 128 Paging ee 128 Optional Device Features 131 Doorpho e eec c EC 131 Bed rcc 132 Trunk Answer From Any Station 133 Background Music 134 Outgoing Message rn 135 Direct Inward System Access 5 137 Feature Guide 1 15 15 1 15 2 16 16 1 16 2 17 17 1 17 2 17 3 17 4 18 18 1 h c b c b c 1 19 1 19 1 1 20 1 20 1 1 21 1 21 1 1 21 2 1 21 3 1 22 1 22 1 1 22 2 1 22 3 1 22 4 1 22 5 1 23 1 23 1 1 23 2 1 24 1 24 1 1 24 2 1 24 3 1 24 4 1 24 5 1 25 1 25 1 1 25 2 1 26 1 26 1 ID Featf6S 2 2 0 2 22 562 12552 naa Susan cen na asa xk o oS aos Rae Sura 144 Caller D Pe 144 Incoming Call Pr 148 MESSAGE POALUNGS e 150 Message rg T ee 150 Absen
4. Priority 1 Priority 2 Location Leading Dial Modification Dial Modification No Digits Trunk Trunk Group Removed Added Group Removed Added Digits No Digits No 01 2 1 0 02 1 0 2 0 03 4 2 0 Explanation Location 01 The hunt sequence by dialling 2XXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 1 gt Sending no to PBX 2 Location 02 The hunt sequence by dialling 3XXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 1 Sending no to PBX 2 The 2nd route trunk group TRG 2 Sending no to PBX 4 Location 03 The hunt sequence by dialling AXXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 2 VE Sending no to PBX 4 b PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code If you dial a 7 952 b 7 953 XXxx C 7 954 7 TIE Line Access Number in the Flexible Numbering Plan j Extn xxxx Extn 1xxx Y PBX 4 PBX Code 954 PBX PBX Code 951 b 2nd 953 TRG 2 9 954 TIE Line Network PBX 3 PBX Code 953 a 952 xxxx b 1st 953 xxxx 2 3 5 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering PBX 2 PBX Code 952 Feature Guide 2XXX 3XXX 3XXX 4XXX Extn t Extn 219 1 26 Networking Features 220 Feature Guide TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX 1 Priority 1 Priority 2 Location
5. A 1 2 1 Call Pickup Group Pickup Group for Extension Group Using the Group Call Pickup feature extensions can answer any calls within a specified group One extension group can belong to several call pickup groups Call Pickup in Section 1 4 1 Answering Features SUMMARY Example Call Pickup Group 1 Call Pickup Group 2 Call Pickup Group 3 rc mc DE 244 Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 Paging Group Paging Group for Extension Group Using the Paging feature extensions can page or answer a page within their groups One extension group or external pager can belong to several paging groups gt 1 13 1 Paging Example Paging Group 1 Paging Group 2 Paging Group 3 Extension Group 2 Extension Group 3 Extn 102 Extn 103 Extn 104 Extn 105 Pager1 Pager 2 Pager 3 ns Ell eccL Le ccc Ss Paging Group 4 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group An incoming call distribution group is a group of extensions which receives incoming calls directed to the group Incoming Call Distribution Group Extension Number Each incoming call distribution group has a floating extension number Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number and name Incoming Call Distribution Group Name One extension can belong to multiple groups I
6. ont Error Cause Display indication Priority 1 001 Calendar IC failure ALARM 001 x000 1 A ON 002 DC power down ALARM 002 x000 1 A ON 003 Cabinet fan alarm ALARM 003 x000 1 B ON 004 Basic shelf heat alarm ALARM 004 x000 1 B ON 005 TSW clock down ALARM 005 x000 1 A ON 006 CPU RAM battery alarm ALARM 006 x000 1 A ON 007 AC power down ALARM 007 x000 2 A ON 008 Option Card failure ALARM 008 xyyO 2 B ON 009 Card disconnect ALARM 009 xyyO 2 A ON 010 Digital trunk AIS reception ALARM 010 0 2 C 011 Digital trunk frame failure 011 0 2 012 Digital trunk RAI reception ALARM 012 0 2 013 Digital trunk out of ALARM 013 0 2 synchronisation 014 Option Card RAM failure ALA 014 xyyO 2 B ON 015 Option Card ROM failure 015 xyyO 2 B ON 016 Modem failure ALA 016 xyye 2 B ON 017 DISA message is lost ALARM 017 xyyO 2 C 018 CS over load Forced OUS ALARM 018 xyyO 2 C 019 Printer is not connected ALARM 019 0000 2 A ON Feature Guide 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics Explanation Conditions Display Indication x Cabinet Number 1 4 yy Slot Number 01 10 e Error Number Depends on the error cause Priority 1 Major Error 2 Minor Error Alarm Light A The System Alarm button light on the PT turns on red B The System Alarm button light on the PT turns on red and the alarm information is displayed automatically C The
7. Extension VPS In AA service mode Operator VM Port 1 3 VM Port 2 T A VM DTMF i Group i Y VM Port X VM Port 3 d Listening to a Recorded Message If the VPS receives a message the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature e g turning on the MESSAGE button light on the corresponding telephone as notification Thereby the VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox When the MESSAGE button light turns on pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without dialling such as a mailbox number It is programmable whether the PBX or the VPS cancels the Message Waiting feature e g turning off the MESSAGE button light When the PBX is selected the Message Waiting feature is cancelled after the extension user has accessed the VPS When the VPS is selected the Message Waiting feature is cancelled after the extension user has listened to messages stored in his mailbox 188 Feature Guide Performance of Pressing the MESSAGE Button 1 21 Voice Mail Features Transmitted Command In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode Switching to VM command Listening message command 6 XH Mailbox No XH Mailbox No Listening message command Example PBX Sent 6 102 Pressing the MESSAGE
8. 2 4044 000 0 00 61 Line 0 62 Call PICKUP 63 Hands free 64 1 5 Making Call 2 lt gt lt 65 1 5 1 Predialling dii e sse 65 1 5 2 Automatic Extension 66 1 5 3 Lime 67 1 5 4 Automatic Callback Busy 68 1 5 5 Executive Busy lt 69 1 56 e ae tne 70 1 5 7 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension SUMMARY 71 Call Waiting TONE sigs sat 72 Off Hook Call Announcement sssssssssseseseeenneeen nennen nnns 73 PR 74 1 5 8 Trunk ACCESS rx ke rer E prre E rosa Sedan eva kae na FUE Kcu aA KE 75 1 5 9 Emergency Callaeidae 77 1 5 10 Account Code Entry
9. E RAE FR vag 212 Remote Extension Control by 213 Audible Tone Features eiii suat iain n nx A a n Rr od iXR RU Ud ER ERR RUDI U EE 214 Dial E EFE 214 Confirmation TONG E 215 Networking 216 TME Line Serice rriei 216 Feature Guide 7 8 1 26 2 Virtual Private Network 235 1 26 3 QSIGNEIWOTK dE o oo ODE 237 1 26 4 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP 2 239 2 System Configuration and Administration Features 241 2 1 System Configuration Hardware 242 2 1 1 Extension Port 444 10001 242 2 2 System Configuration Software cessisset 243 2 2 1 Class of Service GOD urat rax ts Dae usar kd e RR INR RUNE Id Rp 243 222 To ecc MET I HET 244 223 Tenant tar pasce qug de 247 224 Time SBEVIGB a qoe tit RM CIMA mU RE CR UM 250 225 persto FOalliles uius iue ius alent e E E 254 226 Manager Features iei etis xx ose
10. 78 15 11 IERUC A coe 79 1 5 12 Dial Tone 80 Feature Guide 5 6 15213 PAUSE Insertion diete ecce ed peer ptos sedis 81 1 5 14 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host mh ok Dan 1 1 1 1 l io to to to to to to o w c c c c h c c c o c c Lh 2 c ld ld l l c l l c e c 5 HEELS RECS 15 1 7 7 1 7 2 a NNN O oot 14 5 14 6 PBX 82 Special Carrier Access 84 Memory Dialling 85 Memory Dialling 0 85 iens WBie 87 Last Number Redial ete ed cioe e id un ais 88 Speed Dialling Personal System esses eee 89 QUICK DialliNg ed 90 POD LUNG crucem 91 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 92 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring 2 92 Budget Management T m 96 Extension LOCK
11. 404 ARS Removed Digits for Carrier Access 404 ARS Added Number for Carrier Access code 404 Trunk Connection e ER ed RE 405 rere ere eret v ett e rae re eret rr Ee e edt des 405 M seit 405 Trunk Access Number Reference 405 ECOT Dialling Mode 1 eir et hoe n t XE Pra kie ELE nne 405 LCOT Pulse SPEEA ee e eiaa 406 LCOT Du tration e Erbe XE een La haste 406 LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time Outgoing sseseeneeeennnns 406 LCOT CPC Signal Detection 406 ECOT Reverse Circuit correcte ebat 406 Beo Pause TMG c E 406 Feature Guide 9 10 TU Tr 407 LCOT Disconnect Time ssssssssssssseseseeeneee eene nennen nennen nnne enne nennen 407 BRI Automatic nennen nennen nnns 407 BRI DIL DID MSN Selection ssessssssseseseeeeeneeeennen enne nnne nnne 407 BRI Subscriber Numbar 407
12. Feature Guide 301 3 2 PC Programming 302 Parameter Description Value Range ISDN Extension Extension Number Specifies the extension number Extension Number MSN Mode ISDN Specifies the ring mode for MSN number last 1 Ring All Extensions for MSN 1 or 2 digits digit or 2 digits MSN Ring an Extension for MSN ISDN Extension Assigns whether the system sends the call Enable Disable Progress Tone progress tone to the ISDN extension Network Configuration Network Type Specifies the ISDN network type Refer to the network type of Page 294 L1 Mode Selects L1 mode Permanent Call by Call L2 Mode Selects L2 mode Permanent Call by Call Access Mode Selects the access mode P P P MP TEI Mode Specifies the TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier mode Automatic Fix 0 63 Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Network Numbering Plan Not available if Port Type is Extn Trunk Attribute Selects the trunk attribute Public Private VPN Refer to Numbering Plan ID for Outgoing Public Selects the Numbering Plan ID applied to the outgoing Trunk calls via ISDN Unknown ISDN Telephony National Standard Private Private Selects the Numbering Plan ID applied to the outgoing Trunk calls via ISDN Unknown ISDN Telephony National Standard Private
13. Feature Usage FKEY LIST Used to display the selected features of the Flexible CO Buttons PS PROGRAM Used to enter the PS Programming mode in the programming mode EDIT MODE Used to select a mode to edit the Directories except the PBX Extension Dialling Directory or in predialling Conditions e Certain buttons are equipped with a light to show line or feature status Feature Guide 155 1 17 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 17 2 Flexible Buttons Description Flexible buttons are customised by either system or personal programming The following types of flexible buttons are provided on PTs DSS Consoles Add on Key Modules and or DWXs a Flexible CO buttons b Flexible Direct Station Selection DSS buttons C Programmable Feature PF buttons Button Usage Button Usage Single CO S CO Used to access a specified trunk for making or receiving calls Group CO G CO Used to access an idle trunk in a specified trunk group for making calls Incoming calls from trunks in the assigned trunk group arrive at this button Loop CO L CO Used to access an idle trunk for making calls Incoming calls from any trunk arrive at this button Direct Station Selection Used to access an extension with one touch DSS One touch Dialling Used to access a preprogrammed party or feature with one touch Group Directory Number G Used to access a specified incoming call distribution group
14. Presentation CLIP Feature Description Details in Caller ID Caller s information which is sent from an analogue trunk Calling Line Caller s information which is sent from Calling Identification an ISDN line Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Automatic Number Caller s information which is sent from Identification ANI an E1 or T1 Card 1 19 1 E1 Line Service 1 20 1 T1 Line Service 2 Service Features Features Description Details in Calling Line Directs a DIL DID DDI MSN call to a CLI Calling Line Identification CLI destination if the caller s identification Caller Identification Distribution ID CLIP ANI has been assigned to the Caller CLI ID Table Distribution Incoming Call Log Caller s information is automatically recorded 1 15 2 in the call log of the called extension This Incoming Call information is used for confirming the caller Log calling back the caller or storing the number and name in the Personal Speed Dialling 144 Feature Guide 3 Number Name Assignment 3 1 Automatic Caller ID Number Modification This PBX automatically modifies the incoming caller s number according to preprogrammed tables The modified number will be recorded for calling back The PBX supports a specified number of modification tables and each trunk group can select a table for use Each table has ten locations for local int
15. 97 Dial Tone 98 Remote 99 Verified Code Entry T 100 Automatic Route Selection ARS 101 Automatic Route Selection 85 101 Conversation s E nasus s ix x Mu EE Ad SERRE nda dO 107 Hands free T 107 Off Hook Monitor 108 User LII 109 Headset Operation 110 Data Line Securty GE raga 111 44404 0500000 nnnm nennen 112 External Feature Access BM 113 ee MERE REM 114 Parallelled 115 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection 117 LicuidgnnaIcripolqe 118 IBI IUDEX 118 Holding Features E 120 ETIN MICE PEE 120 Call Park S M 122 Call ere T c rm 123 MUSIC On 124 Conference 2
16. Agent Operation No Answer Time Specifies the length of time before Idle Extension Hunting works if no answer None 10 x n 1 15 S Automatic Log out Specifies the number of time before None 1 15 Automatic Log out works if no answer Maximum Number of Specifies the maximum number of active Max 1 32 Agents extensions Log out All Assigns all extensions may log out Enable Disable Feature Guide 353 3 2 PC Programming 354 Parameter Description Value Range Call Forwarding FWD Setting Trunk Call Forwarding Assigns if Trunk calls are forwarded On Off FWD Set Trunk Call Forwarding FWD Number Specifies the destination to forward the trunk call Max 32 digits including and PF Intercom Call Forwarding FWD Set Assigns if intercom calls are forwarded On Off Intercom Call Specifies the destination to forward the Max 32 digits including Forwarding FWD intercom call and PF Number Others VIP Call Assigns the VIP call Enable Disable Supervisor Specifies the extension of the supervisor Extension Number ACD CTI Mode Assigns the ACD CTI mode ACD is Enable Disable Automatic Call Distribution ACD CTI Waiting Specifies the length of waiting time for ACD 1 15 s Time CTI mode ACD is Automatic Call Distribution Mailbox Access ID Specifies the mailbox access ID required to access the m
17. Feature Guide 47 1 2 Receiving Group Features 48 VIP Call Description It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups If an extension belongs to multiple groups and the extension becomes idle queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in priority order Each incoming call distribution group can enable or disable the VIP Call mode When multiple groups enable the VIP Call mode the incoming call distribution group with the lowest numbered group has the highest priority When multiple groups disable the VIP Call mode queuing calls are distributed to extensions uniformly Example In the call centre incoming call distribution groups 1 and 3 enable the VIP Call mode while incoming call distribution groups 2 and 4 disable the VIP Call mode Calls have been distributed by DIL DID DDI CLI The number in the circle is the queuing order Incoming Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Distribution Distribution Distribution Distribution Group 1 6 2 5 Group 3 2 4 for VIP for general 3 for special 2 6 customers customers customers 3rd ist Priority 2nd Priority Priority Distribution order Q 6 5 From Group 1 Group3 Groups 2 and 4 3rd Priority Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features Overflow Feature Descri
18. Incoming Call Queue Monitor Specifies the feature number for Incoming Call Queue Monitor Hot Line programme set cancel Specifies the feature number to programme set cancel Hot Line Absent Message set cancel Specifies the feature number to set cancel Absent Message BGM set cancel Specifies the feature number to set cancel BGM Timed Reminder confirm set cancel Specifies the feature number to confirm set cancel Timed Reminder Extension Lock set cancel Specifies the feature number to set cancel Extension Lock Time Service Switch Specifies the feature number to switch Time Service Remote Extension Lock off Specifies the feature number to turn off the Remote Extension Lock Remote Extension Lock on Specifies the feature number to turn on the Remote Extension Lock Personal Programme Clear Specifies the feature number to clear any features you have set Personal Password set cancel Specifies the feature number to set a Personal Password Dial Information CTI Specifies the feature number for Dial Information CTI 1 4 digits consisting of 0 9 X or Feature Guide 337 3 2 PC Programming 338 System Numbering Plan Other PBX Access Code Parameter Description Value Range Other PBX 1 16 Specifies the access code to reach another Max 3 digits consisting Access co
19. d FWD Call Transfer Intercept Routing to the Trunk Example Telephone Company Forwarded Transferred Trunk Intercepted to 01 23 4567 Trunk TIE Line Network PBX 1 PBX 2 i PBX Code 951 952 1011 PBX Code 952 Outside Party Extn 1011 Extn 1011 01 23 4567 1 Dials 7 952 1011 Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 and extension number 1011 2 The call reaches the destination extension 1011 of PBX 2 through the TIE line and the call is forwarded transferred or intercepted to the outside party 01 23 4567 through the trunk 230 Feature Guide 1 26 Networking Features 3 3 Trunk to TIE to Trunk Access An outside caller can be connected to an outside party through the TIE line by using the DISA feature Example Telephone Company Trunk TIE Line Network PBX 2 PBX Code 952 1 952 9 01 23 4567 TIE Line Interface Outside Caller Outside Party i 01 23 4567 Dials DISA phone e e number 9 01 23 Extn 1011 Extn 1011 4567 Explanation 1 The outside caller dials the DISA phone number of PBX 1 Idle Trunk Access ARS number of PBX 1 9 and telephone number 01 23 4567 2 PBX 1 modifies the call adds 952 and the Idle Trunk Access ARS number of PBX 2 9 and sends the
20. CLI works Is the CLI destination assigned Is the DIL destination of No the time mode assigned Vv Vv The call is routed to the The call is routed to the The call is routed to the CLI destination DIL destination operator Intercept Routing No Destination Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller s identification number is assigned in the Caller ID Table the call will not be routed to the DIL destination but routed to the CLI destination Feature Guide 17 1 1 Incoming Call Features Programming Example of DIL Table The table can be programmed for each trunk Tenant CLI Destination Trunk No s No Day Lunch Break Night Day Lunch Break Night 01 1 Enable Disable Enable Disable 101 100 101 100 02 1 Enable Disable Disable Disable 102 100 102 100 ED The time mode day lunch break night of the programmed tenant is applied to the trunk 2 DIL 1 1 Destination Explanation If a trunk call is received from trunk 01 In Day mode CLI is enabled Route to CLI destination In Lunch mode CLI is disabled Route to DIL destination extension 100 18 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling Inward DDI Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming call
21. Continued from the previous page None Security Trunk Security All Security B Is the dialled number an extension number or floating extension number Is the Walking COS Verified Code Entry feature number dialled for Security Mode Override Goes to What is the dialled number Is the correct password entered lt Reorder tone Goes to Extension No Goes to D feature is set he q Yes No Others Trunk Access No Feature No Extension Telephone No e g FWD Floating the dialled number is sent to the trunk Does the caller press X while hearing reorder tone Call Retry Is the extension idle No DISA Reorder Tone Duration Time A Time out me call is disconnected Yes B The extension receives the call Is the extension busy Call Waiting mode on and is not in DND mode Goes to No Yes What method is assigned The call waits for DISA Intercept Does the caller press X to be received Routing Busy DND while hearing a ringback tone Call Retry The extension Intercept Routing becomes idle Busy Tone Outgoing Message OGM Does the destination answer the call Y No Does the caller press X Goes to Goes to E while hearing b
22. Feature Guide 315 3 2 PC Programming 316 Parameter Description Value Range Wink Signal Time Out Specifies the length of time that the system is to wait for the Wink Signal after seizing the trunk Note It is assignable only when Start Signal Type is set to Wink 64 x n n21 128 ms Start Signal Type Selects the start signal type e Wink The wink signal is transmitted to the telephone company before the incoming calls are received e Immediate No wink signal is transmitted Immediate Wink Sending Caller ID to Assigns whether to send TIE Caller ID Yes No TIE Receiving Caller ID Assigns whether to receive TIE Caller ID Yes No from TIE Ringback Tone Service Assigns the ringback tone service Enable Disable PBX Dial Tone Assigns whether the system sends a dial Enable Disable tone to the extension user who seizes a T1 digital trunk line Answer Waiting Time Selects the length of waiting time to cancel the outgoing Trunk call None 1 2 3 4 min Pause Time Selects the length of Pause Time 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 s Flash Time Specifies the length of Flash Time None 16 x n 1 80 ms Disconnect Time Selects the maximum waiting time after releasing the trunk line before getting it again 0 5 1 5 2 0 4 0 12 0 s Feature Guide Configuration Slot E amp M 3 2 PC Programming Common Parameter De
23. PBX 3 removes digits from and or adds number to the number sent from PBX 2 3011 according to the assignment for each trunk port of PBX 3 The modified number 3011 is an extension number of PBX 3 The call is received at extension 3011 Feature Guide 221 1 26 Networking Features b PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code Example PBX 3 PBX Code 953 PBX 4 PBX Code 954 Extn 1011 le 953 1011 1 953 1011 1011 oS os Extn 1011 PBX 2 PBX Code 952 3 TIE Line and Trunk Connection PBX 2 removes digits from and or adds number to the number sent from PBX 1 953 1011 according to the assignment for each trunk port of PBX 2 If the modified number has the PBX code of PBX 2 952 the call will be received at the corresponding extension of PBX 2 e g 10110f PBX 2 If not PBX 2 checks the modified number in the TIE Line Routing and Modified Table of PBX 2 If the match is found in the table the call will be modified according to the table and send to the corresponding PBX PBX 3 PBX 3 removes digits from and or adds number to the number sent from PBX 2 953 1011 according to the assignment for each trunk port of PBX 3 The modified number 953 1011 has the PBX code of PBX 3 953 The call is received at extension 1011 of PBX 3 To connect the TIE line with the trunk the following patterns are available 1 Trunk to TIE
24. Port Type Refers to the port type Display only Trunk line Extn Trunk Name Specifies the trunk name Max 20 characters Trunk Group Specifies the trunk group 1 64 Line Extension Digital Wireless Extension Line Extension Digital Wireless Extension Setting Parameter Description Value Range Extension Setting Physical Location Slot Refers to the slot position Display only PBX No Slot No Port Refers to the port no Display only Extension Number Specifies the extension number Extension Number Extension Name Specifies the extension name Max 20 characters Reference Port Type Refers to the port type Display only S Hybrid SLT DPT ISDN Wireless IP Telephone Type Refers to the telephone type Display only Telephone code Feature Guide 359 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Basic Extension Group Specifies the extension group PBX1 1 32 Assignment PBX2 33 64 65 96 4 97 128 Refers to the group name Display only 20 characters COS Specifies the COS 1 64 Ring Pattern Specifies the ringing pattern table for 1 8 incoming calls Intercept Extension Intercept Destination Day In Day mode Max 32 digits including Lunch In Lunch mode and PF Break In Break mode Night In Night mode Option 1 Mailbox Access ID Speci
25. 475 gt gt Trunk Group no gt SD gt gt hd 01 64 No Detect END Detect ENTER DISA Continuous Tone Detection 476 gt Trunk Group No gt Q gt LJ 01 64 No Detect END ENTER DISA Cyclic Tone Detection 01 64 No Detect o Detec ENTER Detect ENTER 477 gt lt TrunkGroupNo gt Q gt m END Caller ID Signal Type 490 gt SlotNo 101 110 FSK Visual ENTER Caller ID DTMF ENTER Pay Tone Signal Type 491 gt Seite gt SB gt gt E ENTER 101 110 12 16 KHz 410 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming COS Programming Outgoing Trunk Group Number 500 gt gt Time No gt gt gt 1 Day 2 Lunch 01 64 ENTER 3 Break 4 Night gt gt TrunkGroupNo gt 202 gt gt 01 64 AUTO ANS END Disable Enable ENTER HOLD To the Next Trunk Group No To the Desired Trunk Group No v NEXT CANCEL TRS Barring Level 501 gt gt Time gt COS Level No gt gt gt C73 1 Day 2 Lunch 01 64 427 END ENTER 3 Break 4 Night ei ENTER Trunk Call Duration Limitation 502 gt gt E gt m 01 64 Disable END ENTER ELE ENTER Call Transfer on Trunk Calls SELECT 01 64 Disable ENTER Enable ENTER 503 gt COSNo gt gt LI END Call Forwarding on Tru
26. DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Trunk Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code OI OIDOUDOOIO 0 Intercept Routing After distribution the following features may be required Feature Description Details in Intercept Answer If a called party does not answer a call within Intercept Routing IRNA a preprogrammed period time Intercept Routing time it is redirected to the preprogrammed destination Busy DND party is busy or in DND mode the call is redirected to the preprogrammed destination No If a destination is not assigned the call is Intercept Destination redirected to the operator Routing No Destination 7 Call Blocking Feature Feature Description Details in Collect Call Collect Call Block Rejects collect calls via the specified trunk card Block only for Brazil Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Direct In Line DIL Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming trunk call to a preprogrammed destination Each trunk has a destination for each time mode day lunch break night Method Flowchart A trunk call is received Does the call have its CLI information and is CLI mode enabled for the trunk and the time mode No Yes
27. Physical Location Slot Refers to the slot position Display only PBX No Slot No Port Refers to the port no Display only 1 4 Name Specifies the doorphone name Max 20 characters Doorphone destination Day In Day mode Extension Number Lunch In Lunch mode Night In Night mode Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number 1 8 COS Specifies the COS number 1 64 VPS Trunk Group Specifies the VPS trunk group number 1 64 Number Line External Pager Parameter Description Value Range External Pager 1 8 Floating Number Specifies the floating extension number Extension Number Name Specifies the name Max 20 characters Tenant 1 8 Selects the tenant to which the External IN OUT Pager is assigned Background Music Specifies whether BGM is sent when the 1 8 External Pager is idle Volume Specifies the volume of the external pager 6 3 0 3 dB Feature Guide 369 3 2 PC Programming Line Outgoing Message OGM Parameter Description Value Range Outgoing Message OGM 1 64 Floating Extension Specifies the floating extension number Extension Number Number Name Specifies the name Max 20 characters Tenant 1 8 Assigns the tenant to which you are going IN OUT to assign this outgoing message OGM DISA Built in
28. e Log in Log out Button A flexible button can be customised as the Log in Log out button with the following parameters Light Pattern Parameter Usage Red on Off No parameter Used with a G DN button Specified incoming Used to log in or log out from the Log out Log in call distribution specified incoming call distribution group Status Status group number Feature Guide 51 1 2 Receiving Group Features 52 Feature Guide Light Pattern Parameter Usage Red on Off X All Used to log in or log out from all incoming After Log After Log call distribution groups to which you out in belong Operation Operation If a G DN button is assigned it also shows the log in log out status of the corresponding group The light pattern is the same as the Log in Log out button which includes the group number Wrap up Button A flexible button can be customised as the Wrap up button It shows the current status as follows Light pattern Status Slow red flashing Wrap up Red on Not Ready Off Ready Wrap up mode cancel Automatic Log out A member extension may be logged out automatically if the Unanswered time expires a preprogrammed number of times consecutively The number of consecutive unanswered calls can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group If the extension is a member of more than one incoming call distribution group
29. 126 Feature Guide 1 12 Conference Features 1 12 3 Privacy Release Description By default all conversations which take place on trunk extension lines and doorphone lines are protected by privacy Automatic Privacy Privacy Release allows a PT user to suspend Automatic Privacy for an existing trunk call on the S CO button in order to establish a three party call System programming is required to enable or disable this feature Conditions CO Button A flexible button can be customised as the S CO button e Privacy Release Time Privacy is released for five seconds to allow the conversation to be joined e This feature overrides Data Line Security and Executive Busy Override Deny Feature Guide 127 1 13 Paging Features 1 13 Paging Features 1 13 1 Paging Description An extension user can make a voice announcement to many people simultaneously The message is announced over the built in speakers of PT and or external speakers external pagers which belong to the paging group The paged person can answer the page from a nearby telephone It is possible to page with a call on hold in order to transfer the call Paging Deny It is possible to deny being paged on an extension basis Paging Group Each paging group consists of extension groups and external pagers One extension group or external pager can belong to several paging groups An extension can page the extension members and the external pager
30. 2 2 3 A 3 4 and 4 16 17 Busy Tone 1 and 2 18 19 Reorder Tone 1 and 2 20 21 Ringback Tone 1 and 2 22 Do Not Disturb DND Tone 23 Trunk Warning Tone 24 Hold Alarm 25 Call Waiting Tone 26 27 Conference Tone 1 and 2 28 Hold Tone 29 39 Reserved Start Pattern Selects the start pattern On Off Cyclic Mode Selects the tone cyclic pattern Cyclic Single Sampling Time Selects the length of time of the sampling 32 64 ms Tone Control Selects the tone control mode Common Control Individual Control Frequency Selects the frequency Type 1 400 Hz Type 2 440 Hz 480 Hz Type 3 480 Hz 620 Hz Type 4 620 Hz Type 5 425 Hz Type 6 1000 Hz Type 7 440 Hz 450 Hz Use count Specifies the number of the patterns to use 0 10 Detail count Specifies the number of the Detail 0 255 Feature Guide System Outgoing Message OGM 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Outgoing Message OGM Recording Time and Number Specifies the length time and number of time to record the outgoing message OGM 15 5 x 64 30 s x 32 60s x 16 DISA Security Mode Selects the security mode for DISA calls Trunk All None DISA Destination Busy Mode Selects the treatment of DISA callers when they dial a busy extension Busy Tone Intercept Outgoing Message OGM DISA Destin
31. Headset Set Selects headset mode This program is not intended for DWX On Off Feature Guide 361 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Display Language Specifies the LCD display language 5 languages English Second language is displayed as a factory default Character input mode Selects the character input mode Alphabet Expansion alphabet Greek alphabet Cyrillic alphabet Incoming Call Information Display Selects the incoming call displayed information Caller ID and Name Trunk Name Called Number and Name Automatic LCD Status Assigns whether to change the LCD status Enable Disable Change when making a trunk call Key Click Tone Assigns the use of the key click tone On Off This program is not intended for DWX Automatic Answer Mode Specifies the object of Automatic Answer mode Extn Extn Trunk Key Programming Mode Selects the key programming mode of One touch Dialling in PT programming One touch Dialling Only No Limitation Flash mode during Selects the flash mode during a EFA Terminate Trunk conversation conversation with an outside party Flash Recall Intercom Tone Specifies the Intercom tone 1 48 Ringing Tone Selects the ringing tone type A B C D This program is not intended for DWX Note KX T75xx KX T74xx KX T7451 and APT are not available Option 4 L
32. 240 s 2nd Unattended Conference Recall Continuation Time Specifies the length of continuing time of the second recall of unattended extension None 1 240 s Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Trunk Timer Held Trunk Force Specifies the length of time to disconnect 5 30 min Disconnect Time the held trunk forcedly Intercept Time Specifies the length of waiting time before 1 240 5 activating IRNA Intercept Routing No Answer If an incoming trunk call directed to a single extension is not answered within this time IRNA redirects the call to another preprogrammed destination Trunk First Digit Time Specifies the maximum time allowed 1 15s between the start of an Trunk dial tone and the first digit dialled on an trunk call Trunk Inter digit Time Specifies the maximum time allowed 1 15s between each digit on an trunk call No Answer Disconnect Specifies the length of time to disconnect in 1 15 min Time for ISDN no answer for ISDN incoming calls Incoming Call CCBS MCID Receiving Specifies the duration to recieve CCBS 5 20 s Duration Time MCID Receiving TIE Dial Specifies the maximum time to recieve TIE 3 30 s call TRS Barring Guard Time Specifies the TRS Barring guard time 10 x n nz1 240 s DID DDI Receiving Specifies the DID DDI receive dial inter 0 30 s Dial Inter digit Time digit ti
33. Alarm Information Parameter Description Value Range Error Log Information Assigns whether the error log information is Printing Not Printing Print printed Local Alarm Floating Number Specifies the floating extension number Extension Number Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming 3 2 11 Software Version Parameter Description MPR Main Central Processing software data Display only PBX No Specifies the PBX number Version Specifies the MPR Main Central Processing version LPR 1 11 software data Display only Slot Specifies the slot no Type Specifies the card type Version Specifies the software version Feature Guide 389 3 2 PC Programming 3 2 12 Password Change 390 Parameter Description Value Range System Password Specifies the system password 4 10 digits User Password Specifies the user password 4 10 digits Manager Password Specifies the manager password 4 10 digits Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming 3 3 PT Programming Required Telephone Extension A PT with multiline display e g KX T7636 6 line display is required for the system programming The extension must be in a COS permitted System amp Personal Programming or the extension connected to the smallest port number System programming allows only one extension user to enter at any time Buttons and Funct
34. CLIR Assigns CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction feature COLR Assigns COLR Connected Line Identification Restriction CNIP Assigns Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIP CNOP Assigns Connected Name Identification Presentation CNOP CNIR Assigns Calling Name Identification Restriction CNIR CNOR Assigns Connected Name Identification Restriction CNOR CFB Assigns CFB Call Forwarding Busy CFNR Assigns CFNR Call Forwarding No Reply CFU Assigns CFU Call Forwarding Unconditional CD Assigns CD Call Deflection CT Assigns CT Call Transfer CCBS Assigns Completion of Call to Busy Subscriber CCBS AOC S Assigns AOC S Advice of Charge At Call Setup Time AOC D Assigns AOC D Advice of Charge During Call AOC E Assigns AOC E Advice of Charge At End Of Call MWI Assigns Message Waiting Indication TC Assigns Transit Counter 304 Feature Guide Configuration Slot T1 3 2 PC Programming Common Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no PBX No Slot No Card type is only T1 Line Coding Specifies the T1 PCM line cording B8ZS AMI Frame Sequence Specifies the T1 frame type DA ESF ESF Frame Option Specifies the values of C bit and D bit C A D B C 0 D 0 C 0 D 1 C 1 D 0 C 1 D 1 Sending LIU Option Specifies the shape of the transmitted Mode 1 8 pulse Receiving LIU Option Specifies the level of equal
35. Display only Telephone type Refers to the telephone type Display only PF Button 1 12 Specifies the PF buttons Note This feature can be assigned to one or more PF buttons Not Stored One touch Feature Guide 367 3 2 PC Programming 368 Line DSS Console Line DSS Console Setting Parameter Description Value Range DSS Console 1 8 Cabinet 1 Paired Extension Refers to the paired extension number and name Display only DSS Console Refers to the DSS console type KX T7040 KX T7240 Display only KX T7440 KX T7441 KX T7540 KX T7541 KX T7640 Line DSS Console DSS Key Parameter Description Value Range DSS Console 1 8 Cabinet 1 1 Key n DSS PF button DSS PF Button Specifies the feature on the Not Stored S CO G CO L CO DSS One touch Message FWD DND Both FWD DND External FWD DND Internal Group FWD DND Both Group FWD DND External Group FWD DND Internal Account Conference Voice Mail Transfer Two way Record Two way Transfer LCS LCS Cancel System Alarm G DN Answer Release ISDN Service Access Call Log EmergencyPaging Log in Log out Time Service Terminate EFA Charge Call Park CLIR COLR Hurry up Wrap up Toll Restriction Call Barring ISDN Hold Headset Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Line Doorphone Parameter Description Value Range Doorphone 1 64
36. Group Incoming Call Distribution Group 352 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group 352 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Member 354 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Queuing Time Table 355 Group Paging Group 351 Group Paging Group Assign Extension 351 Group Paging Group Assign External Pager 351 Group Paging Group Assign Outgoing Mes sage OGM 352 Group Paging Group Assign Output 352 Group Paging Group Common 351 Group Pickup Group 351 Group Trunk Group 349 Group Trunk Group Charge Rate 350 Group Trunk Group Local Access Priority 350 Group Trunk Group Main 349 Group VM DPT Group 355 Group VM DPT Group Common 355 Group VM DPT Group Group Information 355 Group VM DPT Group VPS Trunk Group No for Recall 356 Group VM DTMF Group 356 Group VM DTMF Group Common 356 Group VM DTMF Group Group Information 358 430 Index H Handover 195 Hands free Answerback 64 Hands free Operation 107 Headset Operation 110 Hold Recall 120 Hold Recall Time 400 Holding Features 120 Holiday Schedule 333 Host PBX Access Code 409 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 82 Hot Line 91 Hot Line Waiting Time 400 Hunting 43 Hunting Floating Extension Number 418 Hurry up Redirection 47 Idle Extension Hunting 38 355 Idle Extension Hunting Type 418 Idle Line Preference 67 Idle Trunk Access 75 Incoming Call 381 Incoming Call
37. Maintenance SMDR 385 Making Call Features 65 Malicious Call Identification MCID 174 Manager Assignment 412 Manager Features 255 Manager Password 398 Maximum Number of Agents 417 Memory Dialling Features 85 Memory Dialling Features SUMMARY 85 Message Features 150 Message Waiting 150 Metre Pulse Detection for DR2 311 MFC R2 Group 313 MFC R2 Time 312 Modem Floating Extension Number 424 Multiple FWD 59 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 23 Music on Hold 124 Music Source Selection for Call Hold 421 Music Source Selection for Port 2 421 Music Source Selection for Transfer 421 Mute 109 N Network Configuration 294 302 Network Numbering Plan 295 303 Networking Features 216 New Line 423 No Line Preference 62 67 Off Hook Call Announcement 73 Off Hook Monitor 108 One touch Dialling 87 One touch Transfer 119 OPB3 Option Card Deletion 425 OPB3 Option Card Type Reference 425 Operator Assignment 395 Operator Call 254 Operator Features 254 Optional Device Features 131 Outgoing Call Log 88 Outgoing Message OGM 135 137 370 Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension Number 422 Outgoing Message OGM Name 422 Outgoing Trunk Group Number 411 Overflow Destination by Busy 416 Overflow Destination on Time Out 416 Overflow Feature 49 Overflow Time Assignment 416 P Paging 128 Paging Deny 128 Paging DND 60 130 Paging Features 128 Paging Group 128 351
38. No Day h t 08 ch k 123 Enab Disa Enab Disa A 91 4567 le ble le ble 300 Company 123 Enab Disa Disa Disa C 02 2468 3 le ble ble ble 12 100 10 The time mode day lunch break night of the programmed tenant is applied to the MSN Explanation If the MSN 123 4567 is received from BRI port 1 1 Checks the number in the table Matches the number in location 01 2 Checks the time mode In Day mode CLI is enabled Route to CLI destination In Lunch mode CLI is disabled Route to MSN destination extension 100 Conditions To use the MSN service MSN must be assigned for a trunk port as the distribution method BRI DIL DID MSN Selection MSN Modification Itis possible to modify a received MSN to make it shorter which may be convenient when programming the MSN table Modification method removed digit added number can be programmed on a trunk port basis Modification Example Removed digit 6 Modified MSN 876543 21 1021 Added number 10 A Received MSN 87654321 6 digits When using point to multipoint configuration with a BRI do not connect another ISDN terminal device in parallel with the PBX As only two channels can be used at one time with the BRI the other ISDN terminal device may monopolise both channels 24 Feature Guide Calling Line Identifica
39. Programming Example of Ring Tone Pattern Table There are a specified number of programmable tables each of which allows the assignment of ring tone patterns for the following incoming call types For trunk calls including trunk call hold recalls and doorphone calls select ring tone patterns on a trunk group or a doorphone port basis Trunk Call Hold Table aor ries Recall Doorphone Call Sens Alar Call LCS No or m Back Recall TRG2 Porti Port2 1 Double Single Single 2 Single Double Double Each extension can select one of the tables Feature Guide 35 1 1 Incoming Call Features Conditions e bell off setting can be enabled or disabled for PT through system programming If disabled PT users cannot set the bell off 36 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Call Waiting Description Used to inform a busy extension that another incoming call is waiting The busy extension user can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold The following notification method can be assigned for each extension depending on the call waiting and the telephone type a Call Waiting Tone Tone from the handset or built in speaker b OHCA Voice from the built in speaker c Whisper OHCA Voice from the handset d Off No notification Notification Method Call Type DPT Other Telepho
40. Specifies the time to detect no communication status of L2 0 600 s T301 Specifies the maximum waiting time after making a call to the ISDN before receiving the reply to it 0 18000 s T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call Applies to the overlap receiving 0 600 s T303 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the SETUP message to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call Applies to the overlap sending 0 3000 s Feature Guide 297 3 2 PC Programming 298 Parameter Description Value Range ISDN line QSIG Master QSIG Slave T305 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the DISC message to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it 0 3000 s T308 Specifies the maximum waiting time after receiving the Release message to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T309 Specifies the time that the system tries to disconnect the data link before saving the call 0 3000 s T310 Specifies the maximum waiting time after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message before expecting the continuance message 0 3000 s T313 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Connect message before expecting the reply to it 0
41. busy The VPS sends the commands to the PBX like an SLT The following answering services and features are available 1 Voice Mail VM Service Mode When a caller reaches the VPS the VPS greets and guides the caller to leave a voice message for a specified mailbox Example The VPS sends the message to the caller Thank you for calling Panasonic Please enter the mailbox number of the person you wish to leave your message for i The caller dials the mailbox number Then the dialled number is sent to the VPS via the PBX i The VPS sends the personal greeting to the caller You have reached Mike s voice mail am sorry cannot take your call right now Please leave a message and will call you back i The caller leaves a message If the call reroutes to the floating extension number of the VM DTMF Group or the extension in the VM DTMF group by such as the FWD feature when the VPS answers the call the PBX will dial the mailbox number of the corresponding group or extension and any other digits required to the VPS automatically using the caller dialled number Follow on ID In this case the caller can reach a mailbox without knowing the mailbox number Available Features for Follow on ID a FWD to a Mailbox b Intercept Routing to a Mailbox C Call Transfer to a Mailbox d Listening to a Message in a Mailbox Automated Attendant AA Service Mode The VPS greets and guides the caller to the desired exten
42. cancel Both Specifies the feature number to set cancel Group Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND for all incoming calls Group FWD DND set cancel External Specifies the feature number to set cancel Group Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND for incoming Trunk calls Group FWD DND set cancel Internal Specifies the feature number to set cancel Group Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND for incoming intercom calls Call Pickup Deny set cancel Specifies the feature number to set cancel Call Pickup Deny Paging Deny set cancel Specifies the feature number to set cancel Paging Deny Walking Extension Specifies the feature number for Walking Extension Data Line Security set cancel Specifies the feature number to set cancel Data Line Security 1 4 digits consisting of 0 9 X or Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Call Waiting Intercom Calls Specifies the feature number to enable Call Waiting on intercom calls Call Waiting Trunk Calls Specifies the feature number to enable Call Waiting on trunk calls Executive Override Deny set cancel Specifies the feature number to set cancel Executive Override Deny Not Ready Mode Ready Mode Specifies the feature number for Not Ready Mode Ready Mode Log in Log out Specifies the feature number for Log in Log out
43. gt LJ Distribution ERE ENTER Group No 25 01 64 416 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Queuing Hurry up Level Incoming Call 629 er Distribution gt E ENTER ENTER Queuing Time Table Number Incoming Call 630 gt Distribution gt gt Table No gt gt 1 Day 2 Lunch None 01 64 ENTER Group No 3 Break 4 Night 01 64 gt gt A E END ENTER Queuing Time Table 631 gt gt TableNo gt 1 64 01 16 None Disconnect ENTER Overflow Ax5 s seqB Message C gt END ENTER Maximum Number of Agents Incoming Call 632 gt Distribution Number of Agents gt 1 ENTER Group No Ne Nene 32 ENTER 7 01 64 Paging Group for Extension Group 640 gt gt Paging Group gt Group No gt S 2 pp 001 128 No Yes ENTER ipi e E END ENTER Feature Guide 417 3 3 PT Programming Paging Group for External Pager 641 gt gt Paging Group gt Pager No Pager No SP gt gt No Y ENTER 01 32 o es END ENTER Pickup Group for Extension Group 650 gt gt Pickup Group No Extn Group No gt 1 64 1 12 ENTER 00 8 No Yes m END ENTER VM Group Floating Extension Number 660 gt gt g
44. gt a 101 110 01 16 0 5 1 5 END ENTER 5 BRI Automatic Configuration 420 gt Patio gt E ENTER 101 110 01 08 Max 16 digits ENTER BRI DIL DID MSN Selection 421 gt SlotNo PortNo gt mI 101 110 01 08 DIL DDI END ENTER MSN ENTER BRI Subscriber Number 422 gt lt gt SiotNo Port No gt GubseriberNo gt E a iai END ENTER 101 110 01 08 Max 16 digits ENTER BRI Port Type 423 gt SlotNo gt PotNo gt FFP gt gt m 101 110 01 08 Trunk END ENTER Extension ENTER QSIG M GSIG S BRI Layer 1 Active Mode 424 gt Sit No Port No gt FER gt gt 101 110 01 08 Permanent ENTER Call by call ENTER Feature Guide 407 3 3 PT Programming BRI Layer 2 Active Mode 425 gt 9 SlotNo PortNo gt Q gt 101 11 14 ENTER SIM 01 08 BRI Configuration 426 gt Slot No gt PotNo gt O gt gt L7 4 END ENTER 101 110 01 08 P P P MP ENTER BRI TEI Mode 427 gt Sis Patio CTE gt gt m rs END ENTER 101 110 01 08 Fix ENTER BRI Network Type 428 gt Seine gt Parii gt Ceo gt gt ca 101 110 01 08 99 Different byt the country area ENTER BRI Extension Tone 429 gt 9 Slot
45. 0511033 The received number is modified as programmed for each trunk port Removed digits 1 Added number None Received number 1021 Modified number 1021 1021 Remove the first 1 digit The received number is modified as programmed for each trunk port Removed digits 3 Added number 9 Received number 0511033 i Modified number 0511033 9511033 1 Remove the first 3 digits 2 Add 9 1021 Does the modified number have the own PBX code 951 Yes 9511033 Goes to A is the flowchart of Making a TIE Line Call from a Extension Removes the own PBX code 951 1033 Checks the modified number with the flexible numbering plan of the own PBX Others Extension No Does the corresponding extension exist Is the corresponding extension idle Yes Calls the extension Call Waiting Busy tone Intercept Routing Busy DND of the Own PBX Idle Trunk Access ARS No or Trunk Group Access No of Other PBX Goes to A is in the flowchart of Making a TIE Line Call Extension No from an Extension Is the trunk group of the outgoing call from the own PBX enabled against the COS of the trunk group of the incoming call to the own PBX Reorder Sends reorder tone tone or sends the call to the o
46. 349 ur MEMBER 359 325 E EE TEMPS 371 3 2 6 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring 00 377 3 2 7 Automatic Route Selection 378 3 2 8 Private nr nn 380 3 20 Incoming Call 381 3 2 10 385 SoftWare Versio secre 389 3 2 12 Password Change 390 3 3 PT Programmillig as cscccin n udis isla ds a s NEA 391 Bux HII 394 System Speed Dialling Number essen nennen 394 System Speed Dialling Name esessessssseseeee nennen eene nennen 394 Extension Number ct tr rtr t 394 Extensiori zitiert tb uda Desk eue a Deer eue Eee e apad 394 Personal PASSWOI reete ier e tied E ba Haud Rr t Lo eed atin bee Peut OR 395 Operator Assignment inier eR o E da dere eco eai t RE 395 Console and Paired Telephone Assignment sssssssseeeeneeeneeen 395 Feature Guide Absent Message oce 395 Charg Een 395 Charge
47. 352 Paging Group for Extension Group 417 Paging Group for External Pager 418 Parallelled Telephone 115 Parity 423 Password Change 390 Pause Insertion 81 Pay Tone 286 Pay Tone Signal Type 410 PC Programming 256 275 PC Programming Software Installation 275 Personal Password 209 395 Personal Password Lock 99 209 Personal Programme Clear 210 Personal Speed Dialling Display Lock 89 Pickup Group 351 Pickup Group for Extension Group 418 Port 287 292 300 318 321 323 324 Power Failure Restart 269 Power Failure Transfer 268 Predialling 65 Prime Line Preference 62 67 Privacy Release 127 Private Network 380 Private Network Common 380 Private Network TIE Routing Plan Table 380 Programming Instructions 273 Programming Mode Level 413 Programming Structure 392 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 152 Protocol Timer 288 297 PT Programming 258 391 Pulse Dialling 306 309 317 Pulse to Tone Conversion 79 Pulse DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Di alling 284 Q QSIG Network 237 Queuing Call Limit 416 Queuing Feature 46 432 Index Queuing Hurry up Level 417 Queuing Overflow 353 Queuing Time Table 355 417 Queuing Time Table Number 417 Quick Dialling 90 338 Quick Setup 260 R Recall Timer 330 Receiving Group Features 38 Remote Control 53 Remote COS Access 99 Remote Extension Control by User 213 Remote Extension Lock 4 97 Remote Programming Assignment 424 Required Tele
48. 4 digits consisting of operator 0 9 X or amp Idle Trunk Access ARS Specifies the feature number for making an outside call by ARS or Idle Trunk Access Trunk Group Access Specifies the feature number for making an outside call by specifying a Trunk Group 1 48 TIE Line Access Specifies the feature number for making a TIE line call Redial Specifies the feature number for dialling the last dialled number Speed Dialling Specifies the feature number for making a System Personal call using System Personal Speed Dialling number Personal Speed Dialling Programming Specifies the feature number for programming Personal Speed Dialling at each extension Doorphone Call Specifies the feature number for making a call to a doorphone Group Page Specifies the feature number for paging the Paging Group External BGM on off Specifies the feature number for turning External BGM on off Outgoing Message OGM Playback Record Specifies the feature number for Outgoing Message OGM Playback Record Individual Trunk Access Specifies the feature number for Individual Trunk Access Parallel Telephone Mode Specifies the feature number for Parallel Telephone Mode Group Call Pickup Specifies the feature number for creating call pickup groups Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Dir
49. 600 s T316 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Restart message before receiving the reply to it 0 3000 s T318 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Resume message before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T319 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Suspend message before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T322 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Status enquiry message before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T3D3 Specifies the time that the system tries to establish L2 in Permanent mode 0 3000 s T3D9 Specifies the time that the system tries to disconnect L2 in Call by Call mode 0 3000 s Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range ISDN T200 Extension Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the L2 command to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T201 Specifies the maximum waiting time after resending the TEI check demanding to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T203 Specifies the time to detect no communication status of L2 0 600 s T301 Specifies the maximum waiting time after making a call to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it 0 18000 s T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call
50. Assignment on a COS basis for the destination is also required If the telephone company does not support this service do not enable the Collect Call Block mode or normal calls are also disconnected telephone company Available Destination When the trunk card type is the E1 Card Type 1 or Type 2 depends on the service of the The destinations which can receive collect calls are as follows COS programming determines to enable or disable accepting collect calls disable Collect Call Block mode Destination eae Required COS Assignment Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN O Extension T1 OPX COS for each extension Digital Wireless Extension DWX Incoming Call Distribution Group e e a gall DWX Ring Group x VM Group DTMF DPT x External Pager TAFAS x DISA x Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance No COS assignment required Idle Trunk Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access Phone no 30 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Receiving Destination Collect Calls Required COS Assignment Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code COS for each trunk group of O the destination Conditions General e availability of this feature is depending on the service of the telephone company e COS assignment of the first target destination not the answered
51. DN for making or receiving calls Message Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party who left the message waiting indication FWD DND External Used to perform the FWD or DND feature for the extension Internal Both The feature is applied to trunk calls intercom calls or both Group FWD Both External Usedto perform the FWD feature for a specified incoming call Internal distribution group The feature is applied to trunk calls intercom calls or both Account Code Entry Used to enter an account code Account Conference Used to establish a multiparty conversation Terminate Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up External Feature Access Used to send a flash recall signal to the telephone company EFA or host PBX to access their features Charge Reference Used to check the total call charge for your own extension Call Park Used to park or retrieve a call in a PBX parking area Call Log Used to show the incoming call information 156 Feature Guide 1 17 Proprietary Telephone PT Features Button Usage Log in Log out Used to switch between the log in and log out mode Hurry up Used to redirect the longest waiting call in the queue of an incoming call distribution group to the overflow destination Wrap up Used to switch the Wrap up Not Ready and Ready modes Time Service Used to swi
52. Description An extension user can notify another extension user that he wishes to talk to the user The notified extension user can return the call or listen to the messages left in his mailbox of the VPS When a message is left on a PT the MESSAGE button on it lights or the Message Ringer Lamp on it turns on red Pressing the lit MESSAGE button while on hook shows the caller s information as shown below Example 105 Tom Smith Extension and name of who left the message MESSAGE buttons CL Own extension CL Incoming call distribution group CL Other extension E N N For example this button is useful when the secretary checks the message for the boss Boss amp Secretary Feature Conditions Feature Guide MESSAGE Button A flexible button can be customised as the Message button for the extension other extensions or an incoming call distribution group Distinctive Dial Tone for Message Waiting If the Distinctive Dial mode is enabled dial tone 4 will be sent to an extension when a message has been left on the extension 1 25 1 Dial Tone SLT with a Message Waiting Lamp The lamp activates in the same way as the MESSAGE button on a PT if an MSLC Card is connected to the PBX The Message Waiting Lamp light pattern can be selected from the twelve patterns System programming for each extension port is required to use this feature It is possible to set Mess
53. Extn 1011 Extn 1011 MSN 123 4567 Forward Destination for Trunk Calls 01 23 4567 Feature Guide 167 1 18 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features Conditions e The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company e feature requires the MSN service e COS programming determines the extensions that are able to use this feature 168 Feature Guide 1 18 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P Description An extension user can forward the incoming ISDN call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature when the call is received through an ISDN line The network directly forwards the call to the destination which the extension user has set on the PBX as the forward destination for trunk calls the network is instructed by the PBX This feature is available only when the call is received through an ISDN port which supports this feature Call Forwarding Unconditional CFU Call Forwarding Busy CFB and Call Forwarding No Reply CFNR are applied to this feature This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 207 Diversion supplementary service Example lt FWD gt lt Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P gt CF Request to 01 23 4567 E 2 Outside Caller
54. FWD Call Pickup If a call is forwarded or another extension picks up the call the information is logged in the call logs of both the original destination and the answering destination Call Log for Incoming Call Distribution Group Calls If a call for an incoming call distribution group is not answered the information is logged in the call log for the incoming call distribution group If it is answered the information is logged in the call log for the answering extension Incoming Call Log Display Lock An extension user can lock the incoming call log display to prevent other users from referring to the call information at his extension In this case the Outgoing Call Log display and the Personal Speed Dialling number display is also locked A personal password is required to use this feature Storing the Call Log Information in Personal Speed Dialling When storing the number and name into Personal Speed Dialling from the call log 1 15 Caller ID Features information the Idle Trunk Access number is automatically attached to the telephone number Incoming Call Log Memory The total memory for the Incoming Call Log is determined in the PBX The maximum number that can be logged is also determined for each extension and incoming call distribution group If the memory becomes full the new call record overwrites the oldest one Feature Guide 149 1 16 Message Features 1 16 Message Features 1 16 1 Message Waiting 150
55. Signal Type e Caller ID Name Reference is only available for calls from the public network Feature Guide 147 1 15 Caller ID Features 1 15 2 Incoming Call Log 148 Description When an incoming public trunk call with the caller s information e g Caller ID is directed to ane This xtension the information is automatically recorded in the call log of the called extension information is shown on the telephone display and is used for confirming the caller calling back or storing the number and name in the Personal Speed Dialling Example John White Caller s name 20 digits max 123456789 Caller s number 16 digits max 12 Dec 10 00AM MON Date and time of a call received New No Answer Answering Status B Call Log buttons EU ST Own extension CL Incoming call distribution group CL Other extension N N For example this button is useful when the secretary checks the unanswered calls for the boss Boss amp Secretary Feature Conditions Feature Guide Call Log Button A flexible button can be customised as the Call Log button for the extension other extensions or an incoming call distribution group The button light shows the current status as follows Light pattern Status Red on There is unchecked information Off All information has been checked If the answering destination is not the original extension e g
56. Specifies the name Max 20 characters CLI Ring Routing Day In Day mode Lunch In Lunch mode Break In Break mode Night In Night mode Enable Disable MSN Destination Day In Day mode Extension Number Lunch In Lunch mode Break In Break mode Night In Night mode Tenant Number for Specifies the tenant number for incoming 1 8 MSN MSN calls VPS Trunk Group Specifies the trunk group number for the 1 48 Number VPS Incoming Call Option Parameter Description Value Range Intercept Busy Assigns Intercept on Busy Disable Busy Tone Enable Intercept Do Not Disturb DND Assigns Intercept on Do Not Disturb DND Disable Busy Tone Enable Intercept Illegal Dial Assigns Intercept on invalid number Disable Reorder Tone Enable Feature Guide 3 2 10 Maintenance Maintenance SMDR 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Type Specifies the type of SMDR printout Type A Type B Type C Port Specifies the port used for SMDR None RS 232C 1 RS 232C 2 RS 232C 3 RS 232C 4 USB 1 USB 2 USB 3 USB 4 Page Length Specifies the number of lines per page 4 99 Used to match the SMDR output to the paper being used in the printer Skip Perforation Specifies the number of lines to be skipped 0 95 at the end of every page Outgoing Call Printing Assigns whe
57. UCD is received Priority Hunting An idle extension is searched in the specified order Ring All extensions in the incoming call distribution group ring simultaneously 2 Queuing Feature Queuing Feature in Section 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY If a preprogrammed numbers of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy a preprogrammed number of additional calls can wait in a queue While calls are waiting in the queue an outgoing message OGM or Music on Hold can Feature Guide 41 1 2 Receiving Group Features 42 be sent to the waiting callers 3 VIP Call Call in Section 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups so that an incoming call can be received from the groups in priority order 4 Overflow Feature gt Overflow Feature in Section 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY A call is redirected to a preprogrammed destination when it cannot be answered or queued Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group It is also possible to send busy tone Busy on Busy or disconnect the line 5 Incoming Call Distribution Group Controlling Feature Feature Description Details in Log in Log out Member extensions can join the group to Log in Log handle calls log in or leave the group out for a b
58. calls to that group Group FWD The FWD feature can be assigned on an incoming call distribution group basis 1 2 Receiving Group Features Group Call Distribution Description The Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions using the distribution method until a preprogrammed number of extensions agents gt Maximum Number of Agents are available to accept a call When incoming calls exceed the number the calls enter a queue gt Queuing Feature in Section 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY 1 Distribution Method There are three distribution methods which can be assigned to each incoming call distribution group Incoming Call Distribution Group Type Distribution Description Method Uniform Call Calls go to a different extension uniformly each time a call is Distribution received Extensions are hunted in a circular way in the UCD preprogrammed order for the group starting at the extension after the extension which received the last call Extn Extn Extn Extn Received Starts searching from the last call extn B Skips extn A Priority Hunting An idle extension is searched for using the preprogrammed order for the group 1st Priority 2nd Priority 3rd Extn Extn Extn Extn A B D
59. flexible button can be customised as a One touch Dialling button e Full One touch Dialling There is no need to go off hook before pressing the One touch Dialling button Feature Guide 87 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 88 Last Number Redial Description Every extension automatically saves the last external telephone number dialled to allow the same number to be dialled again Automatic Redial If Last Number Redial is performed in hands free mode and the called party is busy redialling will be automatically repeated a preprogrammed number of times gt Automatic Redial Repeat Times at preprogrammed intervals gt Automatic Redial Interval The redial call no answer ring duration is programmable This feature is only available for PT users with the SP PHONE button Outgoing Call Log The last ten dialled numbers are automatically stored at each extension A display PT user can redial easily any of the stored numbers Conditions memorised telephone number is replaced by a new one e dialling operation is done or an incoming call is answered during Automatic Redial Automatic Redial is cancelled e Automatic Redial is not available for some countries areas when using an analogue trunk Interrupt Redial When the called party or the seized trunk is busy it is possible to press the REDIAL button continuously until the called party or the trunk becomes idle There is no need to go off hook
60. the unanswered number is counted across all corresponding incoming call distribution groups It is possible to return to the log in mode manually Log in Log out Monitor The supervisor extension can monitor and control the log in log out status of the incoming call distribution group members Supervisory Feature in Section 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY Log in Log out Information on SMDR Log in Log out information can be printed out on SMDR 1 23 1 SMDR Supervisory Feature Description 1 2 Receiving Group Features An extension preprogrammed as a supervisor Supervisor extension can monitor and control the each member s status within the incoming call distribution group using a 6 line display PT Feature Description Incoming Call Queue Monitor The supervisor extension can monitor the status of an incoming call distribution group with the display Log in Log out Monitor and Remote Monitor The supervisor extension can monitor the log in log out status of the incoming call distribution group members through the Control corresponding DSS button light Remote Control The supervisor extension can change the status of the members by pressing the corresponding DSS button Example Incoming Call Queue Monitor Display 31 Jan 08 13AM FRI Date and time 250 Sales Section Floating extension number name of incoming call distribution group W
61. trunk group is reserved After answering the callback ringing the extension should dial the telephone number e extension can set only one feature at a time e Multiple extension users can set this feature to one trunk simultaneously However a maximum of four extension users can set this feature to one extension e The priority of the callback is the setting order 68 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 5 Executive Busy Override Description Allows an extension user to interrupt an existing call to establish a three party conference call Executive Busy Override Deny It is possible for extension users to prevent their calls from being intercepted by another extension user Conditions e COS programming determines extension users who can use the Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override and set the Executive Busy Override Deny mode Executive Busy Override Deny e This feature does not work if the busy extension has set Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security e This feature is not available for a trunk to trunk call via DISA Feature Guide 69 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 6 70 Intercom Call Description An extension user can call another extension user Conditions Feature Guide Extension Number Name Assignment Extension numbers Extension Number and names Extension Name are assigned to all extensions The assigned number and a name are show
62. 03 Seq 04 Overflow queues 01 is sent Music on Hold OGM 03 is sent 9 Redirects to gt destination is sent for 30 the overflow answers Thank you for sonas We are sorry to calling Panasonic f keep you holding i The department you The department are calling is busy is still busy We Please hold the line are transferring We will answer your you to the call shortly operator The call is connected to the member extension as soon as he answers the queued call If the call is transferred to the incoming call distribution group and is handled by the Queuing Time Table Transfer Recall will not occur even if the Transfer Recall time expires Manual Queue Redirection It is possible to redirect the longest waiting call in a queue to the overflow destination by pressing the Hurry up button When the call is already ringing on any extension the call is not redirected This feature is also known as Hurry up Transfer Hurry up Button A flexible button can be customised as the Hurry up button The number of calls queuing before Manual Queue Redirection may be performed is programmable gt Queuing Hurry up Level The button shows the current status as follows Light Pattern Calls in the Waiting Queue Off No queued call Red on One up to the assigned number for Hurry up Rapid red flashing Over the assigned number for Hurry up
63. 1 English Select the language used on each PT Language 12 2 This is only available when multiple languages are 3 loaded 4 5 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 5 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering Description To dial another extension user or to access PBX features the access numbers extension numbers or feature numbers are required There are three types of numbering plans 1 Flexible Numbering available while a dial tone is heard 2 Flexible Numbering available while busy DND or ringback tone is heard 3 Fixed Numbering available while dialling or talking 1 Flexible Numbering available while a dial tone is heard Extension numbers and feature numbers which are available while a dial tone is heard can be customised for easy use gt Flexible Numbering The numbers must not conflict It is also possible to use default Pattern 1 or Pattern 2 shown in the following table a Extension numbers Location numbers 1 through 32 Up to five digit number including the extension numbering scheme up to three digits number consisting of through 9 additional digits up to two digits default two digits Example If the number 3 as a 1st extension numbering scheme and the 2 as an additional digit have been programmed the extension number 300 through 399 are available b Feature numbers Location numbers 33 through 250 Up to four digit number consisting of t
64. 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY When a destination cannot be found the calling extension will hear the DND tone while the calling outside party will hear busy tone Conditions Feature Guide DND for Trunk Calls Intercom Calls The DND feature can be set for trunk calls for intercom calls or for both of them by the extension user DSS button in DND Mode The DSS button light will turn red if the assigned extension has set DND DND Override An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to override DND in their COS DND Override Paging DND It is programmable whether the PBX pages extensions in DND mode through system programming Intercept Routing Busy DND If a call arrives at the extension in mode the call can be redirected to the preprogrammed destination by the Intercept Routing Busy DND feature Idle Extension Hunting While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group any extension which has DND set will be skipped The call will go to the next extension in the group not the Intercept Routing Busy DND destination If 1 the trunk call via the LCOT or T1 L CO G CO Card arrives at the extension in DND mode and 2 the Intercept Routing Busy DND destination is not available and 3 there is no available extension in the idle extension hunting group then the original extension in DND mode will ring Calls from a doorphone arrive at
65. 2000 or XP Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Minimum requirements for installing TDA100 200 PC programming software only CPU Pentium 133 MHz RAM 64 MB HDD 20 MB Recommendation of the ISDN cards for the remote maintenance FRITZ Card PCMCIA AVM FRITZ Card PCI AVM FRITZ Card classic AVM ELSA MicroLink ISDN USB ELSA Xircome CreditCard ISDN Adapter Intele Trademarks Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Intel Xircom CreditCard and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in United States and other countries AVM and FRITZ are either trademarks or trademarks of AVM Computersysteme Vertriebs GmbH amp Co KG in the United States and or other countries ELSA and MicroLink are either registered trademarks or trademarks of ELSA AG in the United States and or other countries All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners Feature Guide 275 3 2 PC Programming 276 Installation Procedure 1 2 3 Start Windows After exiting all Windows programmes on your computer insert the KX TDA100 200 CD ROM included into the CD ROM drive The KX TDA100 200 CD ROM will auto run Click Install PC Programming Software on the initial screen Click Next Welcome to TD612PC Setup This program will install TD61
66. 27 Europe Australia 28 37 38 Luxembourg 39 Hong Kong M law 40 Hong Kong A law 41 Taiwan M law 42 Singapore 43 Spain 2nd carrier 44 Slovakia 45 Euro France 46 50 51 USA National 1 52 USA National 2 53 USA National 3 54 USA AT amp T 5ESS 55 USA Northern Telecom 56 USA AT amp T Custom L1 Mode Selects 1 mode Permanent Call by Call L2 Mode Selects L2 mode Permanent Call by Call Access Mode Selects the access mode P P P MP TEI Mode Selects the TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier mode Automatic Fix 0 63 294 Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Network Numbering Plan Not available if Port Type is Extn Trunk Attribute Selects the trunk attribute Public Private VPN Refer to Numbering Plan ID for Outgoing Public Selects the Numbering Plan ID applied to outgoing Trunk calls via ISDN Public Switched Telephone Network Unknown ISDN Telephony National Standard Private Private Selects the Numbering Plan ID applied to outgoing Trunk calls via ISDN Private Network Unknown ISDN Telephony National Standard Private Type of Number for Outgoing Public Selects the Type of Number applied to the outgoing Trunk calls via ISDN Public Switched Telephone Network Unknown International Nationa
67. 3 2 PC Programming 314 Parameter Description Value Range Group B Code Assignment Idle 1 Specifies the idle code 1 Used in the normal circumstances to inform the telephone company that the destination is idle Undefined 1 15 Idle 2 Specifies the idle code 2 Used as an alternative for example an international call to inform the telephone company that TIE destination is idle Undefined 1 15 Idle 3 Specifies the idle code 3 This code is used in the special sequence for example when the current call is completed to inform the telephone company that the destination is idle Undefined 1 15 Busy Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the destination is busy Undefined 1 15 Unallocated Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that there is no extension specified Undefined 1 15 Congestion Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the network is congested Undefined 1 15 Out of Service Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the destination is in out of service Undefined 1 15 No Billing Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the call is not billed Undefined 1 15 Collect Call Block Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the collect call has been rejected Undefined
68. 901 gt gt Sho gt Gare gt gt S END ENTER 101 111 101 111 ENTER To the Next Slot No To the Desired Slot No 9 OPB3 Option Card Type Reference 902 gt gt Siti gt Carano gt pion tad pe gt E ENTER 101 111 1 3 Reference only END Reference only OPB3 Option Card Deletion 903 gt gt Slot No gt Card No Delete gt END ENTER 101 111 ENTER Feature Guide 425 3 3 PT Programming 426 Feature Guide Index Section 4 Index 427 Index A Absent Message 151 395 Account Code Entry 78 Account Code Mode 412 Administrative Information Output Features 201 Advice of Charge AOC 166 Agent Operation 353 Alternate Calling Ring Voice 70 Alternate Receiving Calling Mode Ring Voice Override 64 Alternate Receiving Ring Voice 70 ANI Automatic Number Identification Service 312 Answering Features 61 Answering Features SUMMARY 61 ARS Added Number for Carrier Access code 404 ARS Carrier Name 403 ARS Exception Code 379 ARS Exception Number 403 ARS Itemised Code 363 ARS Leading Digits 378 403 ARS Mode 402 ARS Outgoing Trunk Group for Carrier Access 404 ARS Removed Digits for Carrier Access code 404 ARS Routing Plan Number 403 ARS Routing Plan Table 1 16 Assignment 403 ARS Routing Plan Time Table 403 ARS Carrier 379 ARS Exception Code 379 ARS Leading Digit 378 ARS Routing Plan P
69. A 00 00 23 59 Time B Setting Assigns whether the plan is used a second Enable Disable time each day Time B Specifies Time B 00 00 23 59 Time C Setting Assigns whether the plan is used a third Enable Disable time each day Time C Specifies Time C 00 00 23 59 Time D Setting Assigns whether the plan is used a fourth Enable Disable time each day Time D Specifies Time D 00 00 23 59 Feature Guide ARS Routing Plan Priority 3 2 PC Programming ARS Carrier Parameter Description Value Range Routing Plan 1 16 Time Table Sun Sat Time A Priority 1 6 Specifies the carrier priority 1 6 None 1 10 Time B Priority 1 6 Specifies the carrier priority 1 6 1 10 Priority 1 6 Specifies the carrier priority 1 6 1 10 Time D Priority 1 6 Specifies the carrier priority 1 6 1 10 Parameter Description Value Range Carrier 1 10 Name Specifies the carrier name Max 20 characters Digits to delete Assign the number of digits to delete from the beginning of the user dialled number 0 15 Carrier Access Code Assign the code to access its carrier Max 32 digits Outgoing Trunk Group Assigns the trunk groups which access or Enable Disables 1 64 are connected to this carrier Authorisation Code Tenant 1 8 Specifies the authorisation cod
70. Access 2 TIE to Trunk Access 3 Trunk to TIE to Trunk Access 3 1 Trunk to TIE Access It is possible to assign an extension of other PBX as the destination of incoming trunk calls to the own PBX 222 Feature Guide 1 26 Networking Features a Incoming Trunk Call Destination Assignment Example Telephone Company re Trunk n Line Network PBX 2 seen Interface m r 2 x mri eee ies Extn 2011 Dials 123 4567 Extn 1011 DID No 123 4567 Outside Caller E Ai d Explanation An outside caller dials the DID number 123 4567 The call is sent to extension 2011 of PBX 2 through the TIE line according to the assignment of the DID call destination DID Destination of PBX 1 b FWD Call Transfer Intercept Routing to the TIE Line Example Telephone Company PI Trunk TE Line Network PBX 2 TIE Line Interface 4A Forwarded Transferred Intercepted to 2011 Outside Caller jit yet Extn 1011 Extn 2011 Dials 123 4567 DID No 123 4567 Feature Guide 223 1 26 Networking Features Explanation An outside caller dials the DID number 123 4567 The call reaches the destination extension 1011 of PBX 1 and the call is forwarded transferred or intercepted to extension 2011 of PBX 2 through the TIE line 3 2 TIE to Trunk Access The PBX sends TIE line calls to the trunks o
71. Automated Attendant Destination Dial 0 9 Dial 0 9 Specifies the extension numbers to each Extension Number DISA AA number DISA Message Selects the DISA outgoing message None 1 64 OGM 370 Feature Guide 3 2 5 Feature Feature Speed Dialling amp Caller ID 3 2 PC Programming Table Parameter Description Value Range System Speed Dialling amp Caller ID Caller ID Specifies Caller ID of the originating party Max 32 digits Name Specifies the name of the originating party Max 20 characters Destination Specifies CLI destination Extension Number Caller ID Modification Table Parameter Description Value Range Caller ID modification table 1 4 Table for Local Area 1 10 Area Code Specifies the area code Max 6 digits Additional Dial Specifies the added number Max 4 digits 0 9 and Digits to delete Specifies the deleted digits 0 9 Table for Long Distance Additional Dial Specifies the added number Max 4 digits 0 9 and Digits to delete Specifies the deleted digits 0 9 Feature Emergency Dialling Parameter Description Value Range Emergency Dialling Number 1 10 Dial Specifies the number Max 32 digits including and Feature Guide 371 3 2 PC Programming 372 Feature Verified Code Parameter Descripti
72. Call Waiting G DN300 Answering the Call No Reply Redirection UCD or Priority Hunting Method If a call received at a member extension is not answered within a preprogrammed time period No Answer time the call will be redirected to the next member extension If there is no idle group member the call queues at target extension until a group member becomes available FWD DND Extension System programming for each incoming call distribution group is required to skip or ring the extension which has FWD or DND feature set If it rings the FWD DND settings are ignored Group Call Waiting feature cannot be used with the VIP Call feature gt VIP Call in Section 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY and or Wrap up feature gt Log in Log out in Section 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY Because to use the VIP Call feature and or Wrap up feature Call Waiting mode on each extension should be off Feature Guide 45 1 2 Receiving Group Features 46 Queuing Feature Description When a preprogrammed number of extensions gt Maximum Number of Agents in an incoming call distribution group are busy additional incoming calls can wait in a queue The number of calls which can be in the waiting queue is programmable gt Queuing Call Limit While calls are waiting in the queue the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table which can be assigned for each time mode d
73. Exception Code gt gt E 2 6 001 100 Max 16 digits END ENTER ENTER Special Carrier Access Code 303 gt lt gt gt Carrier Access Code gt gt 1 2 Max 16 digit END ENTER Emergency Dialling Number 304 gt gt Location No gt Emergency o gt gt EI igi END ENTER 01 10 Max 32 digits ENTER ARS Mode cp 320 gt gt gt e E OFF Idle END ENTER Trunk All Access ENTER 402 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming ARS Leading Digits 321 gt gt gt Leading Digit No gt gt 0001 1000 32 digits END ENTER ENTER ARS Routing Plan Number 322 gt gt Location No gt ARS Plan No gt lt gt 1 1 1 1 END ENTER ARS Exception Number 325 gt gt scena Epione gt gt Ga END ENTER 001 200 Max 16 digits ENTER ARS Routing Plan Time Table 330 gt gt PlanNo WeekNo ARS TimeNo 01 16 0 Sun 1 Mon 2 Tue 1 TimeA 2 TimeB ENTER 3 Wed 4 Thu 5 Fri 6 Sat 3 TimeC 4 TimeD gt gt e m 23 0 END 0 23 0 59 E ARS Routing Plan Table 1 16 Assignment 331 346 gt gt gt gt Priority gt 1 6 1 Sun 2 Mon 3 Tue 1 TimeA 2 TimeB ENTER 4 Wed 5 Thu 6 Fri 7 Sat 3 TimeC 4 TimeD gt gt Clearer Accesscode gt gt Ga 1 10 ENTER ARS Carrier
74. Exclusive Hold green or using the line for an Unattended Conference flashing Rapid green Incoming Incoming call flashing call Privacy Release Incoming Other This extension call for extensions is logged out another are using of the incoming extension alltrunks call distribution Another in the trunk group Red on extension group is using the line Another extension has the line on Exclusive Hold Slow red Another flashing extension is holding the line Rapid red Incoming call to the incoming call flashing distribution group in Ring distribution method 1 17 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 3 Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button Corresponding Extension Status Button Light Pattern DSS Off Idle Red on Busy DND for trunk calls Rapid red flashing Incoming call 4 Flashing Light Patterns 1 second Slow Flashing Moderate Flashing Rapid Flashing Conditions sey e incoming call shows on the buttons in the following priority G DN S CO G CO sL CO sINTERCOM Feature Guide 159 1 17 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 17 4 Display Information Description A display PT shows the user the following information while making or receiving calls if they are available Disp
75. Extension Lock TRS Specifies the TRS Barring level for 1 7 Barring Level extension lock TRS Barring Level for Specifies the TRS Barring level by using 1 7 Speed Dialling System Speed Dialling Trunk Setting Trunk Call Duration Specifies whether to restrict the Trunk calls Enable Disable Time by the duration Call Transfer on Trunk Assigns Call Transfer on Trunk Calls Enable Disable Calls Call Forwarding on Assigns Call Forwarding on Trunk Calls Enable Disable Trunk Calls Account Code Mode ___ Specifies the feature number for entering Option Forced account codes which may be forced or optional depending on COS programming CFU Assigns the ability to perform CFU Call Enable Disable Forwarding Unconditional feature Receiving Collect Call Assigns whether to enable or disable Enable Disable receiving the collect calls via the trunk line Outgoing Call Printed Assigns the type of outgoing calls which will Enable Disable out SMDR be printed out by SMDR Feature Guide 339 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Operation Executive Busy Assigns to override the executive busy Enable Disable Override status Do Not Disturb DND Assigns to override the Do Not Disturb Enable Disable Override DND status OHCA Assigns to operate OHCA Enable Disable Door Open Assigns to operate Door Open Enable Disable Call
76. Extensions which cannot be paged are SLTs Ringing or busy PTs PTs in Paging Deny mode PTs in Paging DND mode These extensions cannot be paged but can answer the page e External Pager Priority External pagers can be used with the following priorities 5 Paging BGM Feature Guide 129 1 13 Paging Features e Volume Control Paging volume from the PTs and the external pagers can be changed through PC programming e Paging DND When DND is set for incoming calls it is programmable whether your extension receives paging through system programming 130 Feature Guide 1 14 Optional Device Features 1 14 Optional Device Features 1 14 1 Doorphone Call Description Calls from doorphones reach the preprogrammed destination and he can talk to the visitor Any extension user can call a doorphone Conditions Hardware Requirement An optional Doorphone the OPB Card and DPH Card Each doorphone port must be assigned to one tenant The Time Table day lunch break night of the tenant is applied Call Destination The incoming doorphone call destination s can be assigned for each time mode day lunch break night for each doorphone port gt Doorphone Call Destination Destinations can be selected gt 1 1 2 Internal Call Features SUMMARY COS programming determines the doorphone ports that are able to make an outgoing trunk call Ring Duration If an incoming call is not answe
77. Features SUMMARY the FWD feature to the extension does NOT work Conditions General Feature Guide FWD for Trunk Calls Intercom Calls The FWD feature can be set for trunk calls for intercom calls or for both of them by the extension user FWD from Incoming Call Distribution Group Group FWD COS programming determines the incoming call distribution groups that can use this feature FWD to Trunk COS programming determines the extensions or incoming call distribution groups that can forward calls externally Call Forwarding on Trunk Calls The original extension s TRS Barring and ARS still apply to the forwarded call Trunk Call Duration If a call between an extension user and an outside party or between two outside parties is established the call duration can be restricted by a system timer Extension to Trunk Call Duration Time and Trunk to Trunk Call Duration Time If the timer expires the line will be disconnected 1 9 8 Trunk Call Limitation 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Multiple FWD Calls can be forwarded up to four times The following forwarding features are counted as Multiple FWD a FWD b Idle Extension Hunting Overflow c Intercept Routing d Incoming Call Distribution Group Overflow Incomingy ge call Qe MA uem HMM Rte L destination Boss amp Secretary feature It is possible to call the original extension from t
78. First Dial Time DID TIE Specifies the Pause Time between seizing the DID TIE channel and sending the dialled digits 32 x n n 1 255 ms Answer Detection Time Specifies the duration time that the system will accept as an answer signal 32 x n n21 255 ms Seizure ACK Waiting Time Specifies the Seizure ACK waiting time for DR2 Digital System R2 signals ACK is an ASCII or EBCDIC code character indicating a positive acknowledgement that a message has been received correctly 0 5 x n 1 20 s Sending LIU Option Selects the shape of transmitted pulse Mode 1 8 Receiving LIU Option Selects the level of equalisation applied to Automatic 6 12 18 24 incoming calls dB RAI Signal Detection Mode Selects the mode to detect the RAI signal Type 1 Type 2 DTMF Tone DTMF Inter digit Pause Specifies the DTMF Inter digit Pause Time 64 16 x n 0 15 ms Pulse Dialling Pulse 96 Break Selects the break for pulse digits 60 67 Pulse Type Selects the pulse dialling digit pattern Normal Sweden New Zealand Pulse Inter digit Pause Selects the Pulse Inter digit Pause Time 630 830 1030 ms Tone Feed Back Assigns whether to turn on or off tone feedback Yes No Maximum Break Width Specifies the maximum Break Width 72 8x n nz0 11 ms Minimum Make Width Specifies the minimum Make Width 8x n nz1 5
79. Identification Presentation CLIP The PBX can send a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when an extension user makes a call The called party can see the number on his telephone display before answering the call Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP The PBX sends a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when the extension user answers an incoming call The caller can see the number of the answering party on his telephone display when the call is answered These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 092 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP supplementary service ETS 300 097 Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP supplementary service CLIP Example 1 Dials 2 12345678 87654321 is displayed PBX gt Caller Called party CLIP COLP No 12345678 CLIP COLP No 87654321 COLP Example 1 Dials ore Called party 111222333 E T CLIP COLP No 111222333 Answering party J CLIP COLP No 111222444 3 111222444 is displayed 2 Answers the call 172 Feature Guide 1 18 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features CLIP COLP Number The telephone numbers sent to the network for CLIP COLP feature can be assigned as follows e CLIP COLP number for each ISDN port subscriber s number BRI Su
80. Incoming Call Indication 0 34 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 242 4 0 111 ia k nnne nenas 35 0 37 1 2 Receiving Group Features LL A Ea EXE EAR ERA 38 1 21 Idle Extension HUNING m 38 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY 40 Group Call DIStHOULION ees 43 46 VIP Call cits RE M 48 Overflow Feature ccs dete Pe itte ein beads dnd ct 49 6 1 Supervisory FealtUte ii orte t eror ie nha e te Tr EU ve e edv eres 53 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 55 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features SUMMARY 55 Call Forwarding nennen nnne tnn 57 Do Not Disturb DND US BER 60 1 4 Answering PFOealtUlGs ias iuun nk ein risa RE EE4xE3 ARA EE ERURILUTAXEAOUE EE YXRA RAS OXEERDUDUDIN AI AXE ERE 61 1 4 1 Answering
81. Lock If the wrong password is entered incorrectly three times the line will be disconnected If the incorrect password is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively the password against the verified code will be locked Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it In this case the password will be unlocked and cleared Budget Management for Verified Calls A limit of the call charge can be assigned on each verified code Example of Verified Codes and Their Programming Location Verified User COS Budget No Code Name ove No aes Management i Password for ARS 0001 1111 Tom Smith 1234 1 2323 5000Yen 0002 2222 John White 9876543210 3 4545 3000Yen gt Verified Code Number gt Verified Code Name gt Verified Code Password gt Verified Code COS Number 1 8 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 1 8 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 1 8 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Description ARS automatically selects the carrier available at the time an outgoing trunk call is made according to preprogrammed settings The dialled number will be checked and modified to connect the appropriate carrier Feature Guide 101 1 8 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features Carrier Selection Procedure Flowchart The numbers in the flowchart correspond to the Programming Procedures on the following pages A trunk c
82. Monitor Assigns to operate Call Monitor Enable Disable Call Pickup by DSS Assigns to operate Call Pickup by pushing Enable Disable the DSS button Setting Time Mode Assigns to switch the time mode Enable Disable Executive Busy Assigns to deny Executive Busy Override Enable Disable Override Deny Group FWD Selects whether Group FWD may be used Enable Group Enable All Disable Condition Remote Operation Assigns to deny Remote Operation from Enable Disable Deny other extension DISA Destination Assigns the extension to receive DISA Enable Disable calls Wireless XDP Parallel Assigns which extensions may set Wireless Enable Disable Mode XDP Parallel Mode Programming Programming Mode Selects the programming mode level Disable Level Personal Programming Enable All Manager Assignment Assigns to permit Manager operation Enable Disable Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming System Class of Service Trunk Group Parameter Description Value Range Class of Service 1 64 Day Time 1 64 Outgoing Setting Assigns a trunk group for outgoing calls Double click to enable Lunch Time 1 64 Outgoing Setting Assigns a trunk group for outgoing calls Double click to enable Break Time 1 64 Outgoing Setting Assigns a trunk group for outgoing calls Double click to enable Night Time 1 64 Outgoing Setting Assigns a trunk grou
83. N dB N 0 15 DTMF Receiving Specifies the threshold of DTMF detection 42 0 41 0 40 0 11 0 dB N 42 0dB N 0 31 MFC R2 Transmitting Specifies the output power of the MFC R2 signals transmitted from the DSP 0 1 2 3 31 dB N dB 0 31 MFC R2 Receiving Specifies the threshold of MFC R2 signal detection 38 0 37 0 36 0 23 0 dB N 38 0 dB 0 15 Frame Error Detection Error Detection Assigns whether the system detects frame Yes No synchronisation problems Note Yes setting enables the Error Rate programming Error Rate Specifies the number of frame errors per No limit second which the system requires to trigger a remote alarm 16 errors per second 32 errors per second 112 errors per second 16 x N N20 7 Feature Guide 311 3 2 PC Programming 312 Common E1 MFC R2 Setting 1 Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no ANI Automatic Number Identification Service PBX No Slot No Card type is only E1 MFC R2 Disappearance signal from the telephone company Mode Used to control the ANI service When None utilising the ANI service one of three Incoming call only presentation methods incoming Trunk Outgoing call only calls only outgoing Trunk calls only both Both Incoming and can be selected Outgoing calls ANI Max digits Specifies
84. Name 350 gt gt CanierTabieNe gt gt gt C3 01 10 20 character ENTER All Not stored ENTER Feature Guide 403 3 3 PT Programming ARS Outgoing Trunk Group for Carrier Access 351 gt gt gt Carrier Table No gt Trunk Group gt CB Q gt ia iai i END ENTER 01 10 16 digits lt ENTER ARS Removed Digits for Carrier Access code 352 gt Carrier Table No gt gt Q END 01 10 0 15 ENTER e 0 ENTER ARS Added Number for Carrier Access code 353 gt gt Carrier Table gt gt QOL END 01 10 32 digits ENTER ENTER 404 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Trunk Programming Trunk Connection 400 gt gt SlotNo gt PortNo gt SS gt gt in a 101 110 01 64 AUTO ANS Td Connect ENTER HOLD Connect To the Next Port No To the Desired Port No v NEXT CANCEL Note To confirm the Trunk connection and programming using a PT dial X 3 7 Trunk Access number 3 digits You will hear a dial tone if it is available and connected Trunk Name 401 gt gt Slot No gt Port No gt Name gt gt ENTER 101 110 01 64 20 characters ENTER END Trunk Group 402 gt Q gt Slot Port gt Trunk Group No gt gt gt ENTER 101 110 01 64 01 64 END 01 ENTER Trunk Access Number Reference 409 gt Slate F
85. Outside Party Outside Party Outside Caller 01 23 4567 01 23 4567 Dials 01 45 6789 Y 3 Dials 01 45 6789 Extn 1011 Extn 1011 DDI No 01 45 6789 DDI No 01 45 6789 Forward Destination Forward Destination for Trunk Calls 01 23 4567 for Trunk Calls 01 23 4567 Conditions e availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company e This feature can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN port of the PBX e This feature is available when the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the forwarded call Feature Guide 169 1 18 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features Call Hold HOLD by ISDN Description An ISDN call can be put on hold using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature This can be a part of a Call Transfer CT by ISDN This feature allows an ISDN call to be held and a call to be made to another outside party using only one communication channel of ISDN A PT user can easily use this feature by pressing the ISDN Hold button This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 141 Call Hold HOLD supplementary service Conditions e ISDN Hold Button A flexible button can be customised as the ISDN Hold button e The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company e TRS Barring fea
86. Parameter Description Value Range Echo Canceller Control Assigns Echo Canceller control for Enable Disable for Conference conference Echo Canceller Control Assigns Echo Canceller control for SLT Enable Disable for SLT to Digital Line digital line Echo Canceller Control Assigns Echo Canceller control for APT to Enable Disable for APT to Digital Line digital line Echo Canceller Control Assigns Echo Canceller control for DPT to Enable Disable for DPT to Digital Line digital line Echo Canceller Control Assigns Echo Canceller control for trunk to Enable Disable Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming 3 2 3 Group Group Group Trunk Group Main Parameter Description Value Range Trunk Group 1 64 Group Name Specifies the trunk group name Max 20 characters Common Class of Service Specifies COS 1 64 Line Hunting Order Specifies the hunting sequence of idle lines High to Low on a trunk group basis Low to High Rotation Automatic Disconnect Assigns whether to disconnect the line Enable Disable after Dialling automatically with no answer DISA Tone Detection Silence Assigns whether to disconnect the trunk Enable Disable line when the system detects no signal during a trunk to trunk line call by DISA or AGC Automatic Grain Control Continuous Assigns whether to disconnect the trunk Enable Disable line when the system detects a conti
87. Reorder tone will be sent to the caller for a preprogrammed time period When the timer expires the call will be disconnected Retrying the call is possible by pressing X during the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time Call Deny Extensions can deny DISA calls on a COS basis Verified Code Password Lock Personal Password Lock If the wrong password is entered incorrectly three times the line will be disconnected If the incorrect password is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively the password against the verified code or the extension will be locked Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it In this case the password will be unlocked and will be cleared 1 14 Optional Device Features e Each outgoing message OGM call have a name through system programming gt Outgoing Message OGM Name for programming reference Feature Guide 143 1 15 Caller ID Features 1 15 Caller ID Features 1 15 1 Caller ID Description The PBX receives caller s information such the callers name and telephone number on trunks assigned to receive Caller ID A display PT user can see the information The PBX can modify the received number according to preprogrammed tables so that he can call back or memorise it For example if the area code is sent and it is not required to call store the area code in the table so that the area code is deleted automatically 1 Feature Caller ID includes the following features
88. SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Digital Wireless Extension DWX Incoming Call Distribution Group DWX Ring Group VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Trunk Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code OP mpm Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code Conditions e Intercept Routing Busy DND on off Each Intercept Routing Busy and Intercept Routing DND can be enabled or disabled through system programming If disabled one of the following is activated depending on the trunk card type which a call arrives through a LCOT or T1 L CO G CO Card The call will be sent back to the original destination b Other Trunk Cards Busy tone will be sent to the caller Ifthe intercept destination cannot receive the call a Intercept Routing No answer Intercept timer will restart at the original destination until the call is answered b Intercept Routing Busy DND The call will be sent back to the original destination when the call arrives through the LCOT or T1 L CO G CO Card When the call arrives through other trunk cards the caller will hear busy tone Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Intercept Routing No Destination Description Provides automatic redirection of an incoming trunk call which does not have a destination a
89. Service Switching Mode can switch mode by dialling the feature number or pressing the Time Service button Even while in the Automatic Switching mode day lunch break night mode can be changed manually 2 Time Table Each tenant has a Time Table used for the Automatic Switching mode The Start and or End time of each mode can be set for each day of the week The Time Table numbers correspond to the tenant numbers respectively 250 Feature Guide 3 2 2 System Configuration Software Time Table Example Time Table No Tenant No Time Schedule MON Day start 08 00 11 00 08 00 08 00 Lunch start 12 00 NONE 16 00 12 00 Lunch end Day restart 13 00 NONE NONE NONE Break start NONE NONE NONE NONE Break end Day restart NONE NONE NONE NONE Night start 16 00 20 00 12 00 NONE TUE Day start 08 00 11 00 08 00 08 00 Lunch start 12 05 NONE 13 00 13 00 Lunch end Day restart 13 00 NONE NONE NONE Break start NONE NONE NONE NONE Break end Day restart Night start 16 31 20 00 17 00 v Time Service Image of Monday and Tuesday Time Table No l00 00 08 00 11 00 12 0013 00 16 00 20 00 24 00 08 00 1 Night Day Lunch Day Night Day 2 Night Day Night 3 Night Day Night Lunch Day 4 Night Day Lunch Day Features Using Time Service The following features can be
90. Status at Specifies the status of the hotel room at Not Ready Ready Check out check out Charge Title Contents 1 Specifies the contents 1 Max 12 characters Contents 2 Specifies the contents 2 Contents 3 Specifies the contents 3 Printout Header Header 1 Print Assigns printing or not printing Printing Not Printing Data Specifies the sentence in the print out data Max 80 characters Header 2 Print Assigns printing or not printing Printing Not Printing Data Specifies the sentence in the print out data Max 80 characters Header 3 Print Assigns printing or not printing Printing Not Printing Data Specifies the sentence in the print out data Max 80 characters Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Printout Footer Footer 1 Print Assigns printing or not printing Printing Not Printing Data Specifies the sentence in the print out data Max 80 characters Footer 2 Print Assigns printing or not printing Printing Not Printing Data Specifies the sentence in the print out data 80 characters Footer 3 Print Assigns printing or not printing Printing Not Printing Data Specifies the sentence in the print out data Max 80 characters Printout Location Header Line Specifies the header
91. Width 8 x n 1 5 ms Feature Guide 317 3 2 PC Programming 318 Parameter Description Value Range Flash Flash Detection Assigns the detection of a flash signal Enable Disable Minimum Break Width Specifies the minimum BREAK width 24 8x n n 0 60 ms Flash Width Specifies the duration time that the system requires to recognise as a switchhook flash 24 8x n n 0 188 ms Line Signal Setting E amp M P Pulse Length Seizure Selects the length of the Seizure pulse 150 600 ms Answer Selects the length of the Answer pulse 150 600 ms Clear Selects the length of the Clear pulse 150 600 ms E amp Seizure ACK Selects whether the system waits for the E Yes No amp M P Seizure ACK signal Wink Signal Width Specifies the duration time of the Wink 128 160 192 224 256 signal 288 ms Caller ID Caller ID Start Code Selects the start code of Caller ID None X A B C D Caller ID Information Selects the Caller ID information end code None A B C D End Code Caller ID End Code Selects the code of ending Caller ID None X A B C D Port Parameter Description Value Range Slot Refers to the slot no Display only PBX No Slot No E amp M designates the number Port Refers to the port no Display only 1 8 Connection Refers to the status of port connection INS OUS Displ
92. account code is entered more than once the code entered last is printed out in the SMDR Even in Forced mode emergency numbers can be dialled out without an account code PT users can also enter an account code for incoming trunk calls during a conversation Verified Code Entry To identify who made a trunk call for accounting and billing purpose a verified code is used This code can be used at any extension 1 7 6 Verified Code Entry 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 11 Dial Type Selection Description The dialling mode rotary or tone can be selected for each analogue trunk through system programming gt LCOT Dialling Mode regardless of originating extension under contract with the telephone company There are the following modes Mode Description DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency The dialling signal from an extension is converted to tone dialling DTMF signals are transmitted to the trunk Pulse Dial Rotary The dialling signal from an extension is converted to rotary dialling Rotary pulses are transmitted to the trunk Conditions e Pulse to Tone Conversion It is possible for an extension user to temporarily convert the Pulse mode to DTMF mode so that the user can access special services such as computer accessed long distance calling or voice mail services Conversion type can be selected This feature works only on trunks set to Pulse mode DTMF mode cannot be changed to Pulse
93. after an alarm tone is selected the line will not be disconnected properly when multiple callers who used the same extension number or the same verified code to make a trunk call are ina conversation Pay Tone Service tis possible to select whether the PBX starts counting the call charge from when the PBX detects the answer signal from the telephone company e possible to enable the PBX sends the flash recall signal to the telephone company after a conversation in on hook status to receive the call charge information 208 Feature Guide 1 24 Extension Controlling Features 1 24 Extension Controlling Features 1 24 1 Personal Password Description Each extension user can have his own password through system programming gt Personal Password or personal programming Personal Password to set features or access his own telephone remotely The following features cannot be used without the password Conditions a Live Call Screening LCS b Incoming and Outgoing Call Log Display Lock Personal Speed Dialling Display Lock Walking Extension d Remote Extension Control and Remote COS Access e Remote Extension Control and Remote COS Access using DISA Personal Password Lock If the wrong password is entered incorrectly three times the line will be disconnected If the incorrect password is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively the password against the extension will be locked Only an
94. alarm information will only be recorded on SMDR and error log System Alarm Button A flexible button can be customised as the System Alarm button If a manager extension uses a PC Console or PC Phone the alarm information will be displayed on the PC If a manager extension uses a PC Console or PC Phone the alarm information will be sent to the preprogrammed party via the PC Console or PC Phone The PC Console and PC Phone use e mail to send the information The alarm information will be recorded on the SMDR Feature Guide 271 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 272 Feature Guide Section 3 Programming Instructions Feature Guide 273 3 1 Introduction 3 1 274 Introduction These Programming Instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX The PBX has a default setting You can change the default to meet your requirements System Programming controls the system features described in this Feature Guide It allows the PBX to be customised to the requirements Only one person can programme at a time Another person trying to enter programming mode will be rejected Ways to Programme There are two programming methods e Personal Computer programming PC programming is described in Section 3 2 PC Programming e PT Proprietary Telephone programming PT programming is described in Section 3 3 PT Programming The extension user can programme by enteri
95. and at the end of the number to be concealed It is programmable whether the concealed part will appear on the display and SMDR TRANSFER T Stores a transfer command by pressing the Transfer TRANSFER button at the beginning of the number used only for a one touch dialling Example Storing T 305 Transferring a call to extension 305 Available only when in the system personal programming mode Example When storing the number 9 123 456 7890 and concealing all of numbers Enter INTERCOM gt 9 gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 INTERCOM Notes e tis possible to store a Memory Dialling feature number in the beginning of the Memory Dialling numbers e It is possible to store several feature numbers in one Memory Dialling location Conditions e Trunk Access by Memory Dialling A specific Trunk Access number can be stored with the telephone number in Memory Dialling However if Memory Dialling is done after selecting a trunk the stored Trunk Access number is ignored and the telephone number is sent using the selected trunk 86 Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features One touch Dialling Description A PT user can access a person or feature by one touch This is activated by storing the number e g extension number telephone number or feature number in a One touch Dialling button Conditions e
96. and receives a call OPX through the PBX An extension number can be given to the OPX and extension data such as COS is also applied When incoming calls reach the OPX the ringing pattern is the same as the pattern for an SLT installed directly into the PBX Example Telephone Company P SLT T1 LCO 1 Extn 103 a Extn 101 Extn 102 5 Automatic Receives the caller s number from the T1 line Number When the ANI number is received it can be treated the Identification same as a Caller ID number 1 15 1 Caller ID ANI Conditions e Hardware Requirement an optional T1 Card e lfaTilineisusedasatrunk the channel type depends on the contract with the telephone company e For the TIE E amp M channel type it is programmable whether the PBX sends a dial tone to extensions when a trunk is seized on a trunk basis Feature Guide 181 1 21 Voice Mail Features 1 21 Voice Mail Features 1 21 1 Voice Mail VM Group Description A VPS can be connected to extension ports on the PBX The extension ports make a group called a VM group This group has a floating extension number The VM group can be the destination for transferred calls and incoming calls When receiving a call the VPS can greet the caller offering them the option to leave a message or dial a number to reach the desired party The VPS can record the message for each extension and leave notification on the corresponding ext
97. button Extn 102 AA Service Listening message command mailbox number Switching to VM command VPS In AA service mode Mailbox for Extn 102 If the VPS transfers the call using the AA service the PBX will inform the VPS of the status of the called destination with the preprogrammed DTMF status signal so that the VPS can confirm the status of the extension without listening to the system tones e g ringback tone Assign the DTMF status signal to suit the VPS settings The DTMF Status Signal and Condition Status Condition Default Command RBT ringback tone The PBX is ringing the corresponding extension 1 to Voice Mail busy tone VPS and all ports of the VPS are busy BT busy tone The called extension is busy 2 ROT reorder tone The dialled number is invalid 3 DND DND tone The called extension has set DND 4 Answer The called extension has answered the 5 call FWD VM RBT The called extension has set FWD to 6 FWD to Voice Mail VPS and the PBX is calling another port ringback tone of the VPS FWD VM BT FWD The called extension has set FWD to 7 Feature Guide 189 1 21 Voice Mail Features 190 Status Condition Default Command FWD EXT RBT The PBX is calling an extension other 8 FWD to extension than the one dialled FWD or Idle ringback tone Extension Hunting may be assigned b
98. call to PBX 2 which has PBX code 952 through the TIE line trunk group TRG 2 according to the ARS programming of PBX 1 3 PBX 2 sends the call to the outside party 01 23 4567 Feature Guide 231 1 26 Networking Features 4 TIE Line Routing Flowchart Making a TIE Line Call from an Extension A TIE line call is made as follows PBX Code Method 7 abc xxxx Extension No Method dexx Is the dialled number identified as a TIE line access no or an other PBX extension no in the flexible numbering plan of the own PBX Not treated as a TIE line call Yes TIE line access no 7 Other PBX extension no de Are the leading digits abc or de found in the TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of the own PBX No Reorder tone Selects the corresponding trunk group and the dialled number is modified if a removed digits and or added number is assigned Is the trunk group available Reorder tone Is there an idle trunk Busy tone in the trunk group y Yes Routes to other PBX or trunk 232 Feature Guide 1 26 Networking Features Receiving a Call through a TIE Line lt Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code gt A call is received through a TIE line as follows 1021 PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code A call is received through a TIE line as follows
99. code indicating busy tone Reorder Tone Specifies the code indicating reorder tone Do Not Disturb DND Specifies the code used for Do Not Disturb DND tone Answer Specifies the extension answer code Confirm Specifies the message waiting lamp control Disconnect Specifies the disconnection code Call Forwarding FWD to VM Ringback Tone Specifies the FWD to VM Ringback Tone code sent to the VM port when the extension dialled is forwarded to VM and the VM port is available to accept the call Call Forwarding FWD to VM Busy Tone Specifies the FWD to VM Busy Tone code sent to the VM port when the extension dialled is forwarded to VM and no other VM ports are available to accept the call Call Forwarding FWD to Extension Ringback Tone Specifies the FWD to Extension Ringback Tone code sent to the VM port when the extension dialled is forwarded to another no voice mail extension Max 4 digits including 0 9 and Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Voice Mail VM DTMF Command Recording Message Specifies the Recording Message command This command is transmitted to a VM port when a call is forwarded intercepted or rerouted to the VM port Listening Message Specifies the Listening Message command This command is transmitted to a VM port when the message receiver presses the Message butto
100. connected Command Specifies the operating card command INS OUS Trunk Dialling Mode Selects the trunk dialling mode DTMF Pulse Gain Adjustment Selects the gain level applied to the trunk 1 12 CPC Detection Outgoing Specifies the length of time to detect None 6 5 8 896 ms outgoing CPC signal Incoming Specifies the length of time to detect None 6 5 8 896 ms incoming CPC signal DTMF Duration Selects the duration of the DTMF signals 80 160 ms sent to the line Pulse Speed Selects the pulse speed Low High Reverse Detection Selects when to detect polarity reversal Disable Outgoing Both Incoming and Outgoing Caller ID Detection Assigns whether to detect the Caller ID Enable Disable Pay Tone Detection Assigns whether to detect the pay tone Enable Disable Dial Tone Detection Assigns whether to detect the dial tone Enable Disable Pause Time Selects the length of Pause Time 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 s Flash Time Specifies the length of Flash Time None 16 x n nz1 80 ms Disconnect Time Selects the maximum length of waiting time after releasing the trunk line before getting it again 0 5 1 5 2 0 4 0 12 0 s Feature Guide 287 3 2 PC Programming Configuration Slot BRI Common Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no PBX No Slot No Card type is only BRI BRI ISDN Time Specifies the length of time for the ISDN Ple
101. described in the User Manual is noted for your reference Abbreviations There are many abbreviations used in this manual e g PT which stands for proprietary telephone Please refer to Section 5 Index in this manual for the meaning of each abbreviation 2 Feature Guide About the other manuals Along with this Feature Guide the following manuals are available to help you install and use this PBX Installation Manual Provides instructions for installing the hardware and maintenance of the PBX User Manual Provides operating instructions for end users using PTs SLTs or DSS Consoles Note There are some optional service cards PTs and features which are not available in some areas Please consult your authorised Panasonic dealer for more information Feature Guide 3 Feature Highlights 4 Automatic Route Selection ARS Automatically selects the carrier available at the time an outgoing trunk call is made Budget Management Limits the telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget Call Charge Fee Reference Allows a user to see call charges and to print out them Remote Extension Lock Allows a manager extension to lock an extension so that inappropriate trunk calls cannot be made Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Ringing occurs over the external paging device the call can be answered from any extension station Caller ID Allows a user to see the name or telephone number of a caller on the t
102. destination If the received number matches several DID DDI numbers in the table the DID DDI number of the lowest numbered location has priority Example If a call is received in Lunch mode Received Destination Explanation Number 123 4567 Extn 100 The PBX finds the match in location 0001 in the table after receiving 7 So the call is routed to extension 100 123 456 Extn 101 The Inter digit time expired after receiving 6 The PBX finds the match in location 0003 in the table So the call is routed to extension 101 Feature Guide 21 1 1 Incoming Call Features Conditions e To use the DID or DDI service DID or DDI must be assigned for a trunk port as the distribution method BRI DIL DID MSN Selection For BRI only e DID DDI Number Modification It is possible to modify a received DID DDI number which be convenient when programming the DID DDI table Modification method removed digit added number can be programmed on a trunk port basis Modification Example Removed digit 6 Modified DID DDI number 876543 21 1021 Added number 10 Received DID DDI number 87654321 1 Remove the 2 Add 10 first 6 digits 22 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming ISDN BRI Basic Rate Interface line call with an MSN to a preprogrammed de
103. eae Sue Eo e When the DWX ring group is called using the floating extension number the group becomes busy to other callers using the floating extension number However the individual group members may be called directly using their extension number Feature Guide 197 1 22 Digital Wireless Extension DWX Features 1 22 3 DWX Directory Description A DWX user can store numbers and or names in the directory A stored number is dialled by selecting a name or number in the directory The DWX user will use the following directories for easy operation depending on the DWX type Type Description DWX Dialling Directory Makes a call by selecting from a private directory of names and telephone numbers PBX System Speed Makes a call by selecting from a common directory of names Dialling Directory System Speed Dialling Name and numbers System Speed Dialling Number PBX Extension Makes a call by selecting from a common directory of extension Dialling Directory names Extension Name Shortcut Directory Accesses a feature by selecting from a private directory of feature names and numbers 198 Feature Guide 1 22 Digital Wireless Extension DWX Features 1 22 4 DWX Feature Buttons Description A DWX user can use PBX feature using a combination of buttons button a specified number X or and or display operation The flexible buttons and the display are customised thro
104. extension will be effective LCOT DID E1 Flash Signal Start time and the duration are programmable Feature Guide 31 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 2 Internal Call Features SUMMARY Description The following incoming calls reach their destination Feature Description Details in Intercom Call A call from one extension to another 1 5 6 Intercom Call Doorphone Call When a call from a doorphone reaches its destination 1 14 1 the recipient can talk to the visitor Doorphone Call Available Destination The destinations of doorphone calls can be assigned for each time mode day lunch break night on a doorphone port basis Doorphone Call Destination Calling from Destination Extension Doorphone Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX O O Digital Wireless Extension DWX Incoming Call Distribution Group DWX Ring Group VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Trunk Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code AS HOO Oe Oe oO O O O 0O xX O 0 0 0 0 0 32 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Internal Call Block Description Internal calls can be restricted on a COS basis Each COS of the caller can enable
105. extension assigned as the manager can unlock it In this case the password will be cleared Remote Personal Password Clear If an extension user forgets his password a manager can clear the password Then the extension user can assign a new password Personal Password Display It is possible to select whether to show the personal password on the display through system programming By default it is shown as dots Feature Guide 209 1 24 Extension Controlling Features 1 24 2 Personal Programme Clear Description Extension users can cancel all the following features set on their own telephone at once Features After Setting Absent Message Off Automatic Callback Busy Cleared BGM Off FWD DND Off Call Pickup Deny Allow Call Waiting Disable Data Line Security Off Executive Busy Override Deny Allow Log in Log out Log in Message Waiting All messages left by other extensions will be cleared Paging Deny Allow Parallelled Telephone Paired SLT will ring Hot Line Off Timed Reminder Cleared Note The features with can be programmed not to be cancelled by this feature This feature is also known as Station Programme Clear Conditions e Extension Lock and the personal password will not be cleared by this feature Feature Guide 1 24 Extension Controlling Features 1 24 3 Walking Extension Description It is possible to use any extension
106. his mailbox without dialling his mailbox number Direct Mailbox Access It is possible to disable this feature by COS programming on the VPS VPS Trunk Service amp Automatic Time Mode Notification for Incoming Call Multiple tenants can share a single VPS each tenant does not require a dedicated VPS port If the destination of the incoming trunk call is a VM DPT group the PBX sends the VPS trunk group number message number and time mode day lunch break night of the tenant assigned for the call to the VPS Therefore the VPS can send the assigned message company greeting to the caller Corresponding VPS trunk group number and Feature Guide 191 1 21 Voice Mail Features tenant number are determined by the setting of the incoming trunk call as follows a DIL TIE the setting of each trunk port b DID DDI the setting of each location number for DID DDI c MSN the setting of each MSN Example For DID Calls Each location number can have its VPS trunk group number message number and tenant number DID Programming Example DID Destination Location pip No DID Name VPS Trunk Tenant No Day Lunch Break Night Group No 0001 123 4567 105 100 105 100 John white _ 1 1 0002 123 2468 102 100 102 100 Smith 2 3 Trunk Group No Company Greeting No Incoming Call Service Custom Service 11 Custom Service 29 Custom Service 3
107. made There are five Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 respectively Complete every table by storing numbers that are to be prohibited These numbers are defined as denied codes Exception Code Tables These tables are used to override a programmed denied code A call denied by the applicable Denied Code Tables is checked against the applicable Exception Code Tables and if a match is found the call is made There are five Exception Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 respectively Complete every table by storing numbers that are exceptions to the denied codes These numbers are defined as exception codes TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling If the call is made using System Speed Dialling the call can override the TRS Barring Each COS is programmed to have a TRS Barring level for System Speed Dialling gt TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling Once this feature is set it permits all extension users to make System Speed Dialling calls with the level for System Speed Dialling Any extension which sets Extension Lock can also make a call using System Speed Dialling 92 Feature Guide 1 7 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features TRS Barring Level TRS Barring level is determined by the applicable levels of Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables Denied Code Tables Exception Code Tables Level 1 Not Programmable Not Programmable Level 2 Table for Level 2 Tab
108. mailbox number of the intercepted extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the desired extension The extension user should use the Voice Mail VM Transfer button when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS When the extension user presses this button and enters the desired extension number the PBX will transfer the call to the VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension number with the required command after the VPS answers the call Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number Listening to a Recorded Message Direct Mailbox Access If the VPS receives a message the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature e g turning on the MESSAGE button light on the corresponding telephone as notification Thereby the VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox When the MESSAGE button light turns on pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without dialling such as a mailbox When the extension user dials an extension number of the VM DPT extension port or the floating extension number of the VM DPT group from his extension he can listen to the messages stored in
109. message 1 14 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Queuing Feature If assigned in the Queuing Time Table of the Queuing incoming call distribution group Queuing Time Feature Table any caller who is waiting in a queue will hear a message Timed Reminder When answering the Timed Reminder alarm the 1 24 4 user will hear a message Timed Reminder Conditions e Hardware Requirement The OPB Card and MSG Card Number of Messages and the Recording Time The number of messages and Recording time can be selected from the following patterns The total recording time in the PBX is 16 minutes 64 messages x 15 seconds 32 messages x 30 seconds 16 messages x 60 seconds Note If the Recording time pattern is changed any prerecorded messages will be cleared All necessary messages must be recorded again e floating extension number can be assigned to each outgoing message OGM Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension Number e MSG Card allows four messages to play simultaneously The MSG Card expansion does not increase the total recording time or the number of messages It increases the number of messages that can be played simultaneously Example Up to 4 messages can be Up to 8 messages can be played simultaneously to played simultaneously to callers callers N PBX Y PBX MSG MSG MSG Card Card Card To
110. message command Mailbox Recording message command Mailbox No Default 6 H H Mailbox No AA Switching to AA command 8 Switching to AA command 8 None DTMF commands are not sent Work with default of the VPS Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a trunk call is intercepted from an extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called extension without knowing the mailbox number Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence Selection If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS the intercepted trunk calls will be redirected to the VPS Itis also possible to send the AA command even in the VM service mode when calls are intercepted so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox This can be performed by selecting AA through system programming 1 21 Voice Mail Features Transmitted Command Parameter In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode Answer by Switching to VM command Recording message command Mailbox Recording message command H Mailbox No 6 H H Mailbox No AA Switching to AA command 8 Switching to AA command 8 None Default DTMF commands are not sent Work with default of the VPS Example of a amp b Trunk Call PBX Sent 6 102 mailbox number Switch
111. mode e tis possible to select a pulse rate for the trunk port which has been set to Pulse mode LCOT Pulse Speed There are two pulse rates Low 10 pps and High 20 pps e tis possible to assign the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to the trunk port which has been set to DTMF mode LCOT DTMF Duration Feature Guide 79 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 12 Dial Tone Detection Description A dialled number is sent to the trunk after detecting the dial tone If the preprogrammed Detection time expires the trunk will be disconnected Conditions e This feature is enabled or disabled for each trunk 80 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 13 Pause Insertion Description A preprogrammed Pause time gt LCOT Pause Time will be inserted manually or automatically Manual Insertion Pressing the PAUSE button Automatic Pause Insertion A pause will be automatically inserted between the user dialled codes below and the following digits a Host PBX Access code b Special Carrier Access code Second Dial Tone Waiting code Conditions e Pause time is programmable for each trunk group e Pause can be stored in Memory Dialling e Pressing the PAUSE button while dialling a number inserts a pause for a preprogrammed time e When a preprogrammed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk pauses are inserted a preprogrammed number of times after the code Feat
112. only for DPT Extension Number Specifies the extension number Extension Number Extension Name Specifies the extension name Max 20 characters XDP Assignment Assigns the XDP mode On Off Feature Guide 321 3 2 PC Programming 322 Parameter Description Value Range DPT Attribute Type Specifies the DPT port attribute Normal D XDP DSS VM DPT PC Console Cabinet Specifies the cabinet number required only 1 4 when DPT port attribute is DSS or PC Console Location No Specifies the location number required only 1 8 when DPT port attribute is DSS or PC Console DSS Console pair Specifies the DSS Console pair extension Extension Number extension VM Group No Specifies VM group no required when DPT 1 8 port attribute is VM DPT VM Port No Specifies the VM port no required when 1 16 DPT port attribute is VM DPT Note It can not be split between cards SLT MW Mode Specifies the SLT MWL Message Waiting Disable MW Lamp Lamp feature Internal Caller ID Assigns the internal Caller ID Enable Disable DPT T74 T75 T76 Selects the DPT gain level 1 8 Level Feature Guide Configuration Slot CSINF 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Master CS Port Specifies the Master CS port location CS port location Radio System ID Specifies the radio system ID Master CS ID
113. password is required to use this feature This feature is also known as Remote COS Access Conditions The following items are applied COS programming Budget Management temised Billing code for ARS Extension number recorded on the SMDR Remote COS Access through DISA This feature is also available through the DISA Personal Password Lock If the wrong password is entered incorrectly three times the line will be disconnected If the incorrect password is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively the password against the extension will be locked Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it In this case the password will be unlocked and cleared This feature is also known as Station Password Lock Feature Guide 99 1 7 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 7 6 Verified Code Entry 100 Description An extension user can make a trunk call with a verified code from his own or any other extension to change the TRS Barring level or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes A verified code password is required to use this feature Conditions Feature Guide The following items are applied COS programming Budget Management temised Billing code for ARS The X verified code recorded on the SMDR instead of the extension number Verified Code Entry through DISA This feature is also available through the DISA Verified Code Password
114. personal computer PC There are two programming methods 1 On site Programming System programming diagnosis can be performed locally by connecting a PC to the PBX directly 2 Remote Programming System programming diagnosis and data upload can be performed from a remote location 1 On site Programming Method Description Using the Serial The PBX has a Serial Interface RS 232C port which can be Interface RS 232C used for either system administration or SMDR port Using the USB port The PC is connected to the PBX or a DPT using a USB port Using the LAN A CTI LINK Card must be installed interface Using a modem Any trunk card and a RMT Card must be installed Assign the through an SLT port floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance Modem Floating Extension Number and dial this number from the PC to connect to the PBX Using an ISDN TA A BRI or PRI Card must be installed Assign the floating interface 64 kbps extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance ISDN through an ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number and dial this number Extension Line from the PC to connect to the PBX The RMT Card is not required for this method 256 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 2 Remote Programming Method Description Using a modem RMT Card must be installed The floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance must be assigned Modem Floating E
115. port basis BRI Extension Tone For BRI only Network Type Each ISDN port can be set to the requirements of each country area gt BRI Network Type For BRI only L1 Active Mode and L2 Data Link Mode The active mode of Layer 1 L1 BRI Layer 1 Active Mode For BRI only and the data link mode of Layer 2 L2 BRI Layer 2 Active Mode For BRI only can be selected individually Permanent or Call by Call on an ISDN port basis TEI Assignment Mode The Terminal Endpoint Identifier TEI assignment mode can be selected on an ISDN port basis BRI TEI Mode For BRI only Bearer Mode The bearer mode can be assigned on an ISDN port basis Automatic ISDN Configuration ISDN BRI port configuration can be set automatically BRI Automatic Configuration The following items will be set by making and receiving a call using the subscriber number assigned for each ISDN BRI port 8 L1 Active Mode b L2 Data Link Mode C Access Mode Point to Point Point to Multipoint d TEI Assignment Mode Fix 00 63 Automatic 1 18 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Description ISDN provides some supplementary services by key protocol and they may require a service access code to be dialled This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 122 Generic keypad protocol for the support of supplementary
116. premises PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the customer s employees from gaining access to the network and to these codes KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA Feature Guide The Dialled Number on the SMDR It is possible to choose to print either the user dialled number or the modified number on the SMDR through system programming ARS Data Download Upload It is possible to download or upload the following ARS data to the PBX using PC programming ARS Leading Digit Table ARS Routing Plan Table This is useful when a carrier has changed the call charge and the updated data can be used for multiple customers A TRS Barring check is done before ARS is applied 1 9 Conversation Features 1 9 Conversation Features 1 9 1 Hands free Operation Description A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset Pressing specific buttons e g REDIAL automatically activate hands free mode Conditions e PTs with the MONITOR Button PTs with the MONITOR button can only dial in hands free mode and cannot be used for hands free conversations Feature Guide 107 1 9 Conversation Features 1 9 2 Off Hook Monitor Description A PT user can let others listen to the user s conversation through the built in speaker during a conversation using the handset Conditions e Capable Telephone Display PTs all KX T760
117. start line 0 99 Column Specifies the header start column 0 99 Data Line Specifies the data start line 0 99 Column Specifies the data start column 0 99 Footer Line Specifies the footer start line 0 99 Column Specifies the footer start column 0 99 Timed Reminder Message Day In Day mode None 1 64 Lunch In Lunch mode Break In Break mode Night In Night mode VPS and COS Check Assigns to change VPS and COS check in Enable Disable in Status status when checking in Feature Guide 375 3 2 PC Programming 376 Feature Tenant Parameter Description Value Range Tenant 1 8 System Speed Dialling Boundary From Specifies the start number 000 999 To Specifies the last number The last number must be larger than the start number Verified Code Boundary From Specifies the start number 000 999 To Specifies the last number The last number must be larger than the start number Call Hold Music Specifies the Music Source port to be used System BGM 1 8 for Music on Hold for the tenant Beep Tenant Operator Specifies the tenant operator extension Extension Number ARS Specifies the ARS mode Off Local Access All Access System Feature ISDN En bloc Dialling Leading Digit Parameter Description Value Range ISDN En bloc Dialling Leading Digit table 1 50 Leading Digit Specifies the leading digits recognis
118. telephone company through the host PBX e The dialled number including the Host PBX Access code can be recorded the SMDR when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX e Torecord on the SMDR only long distance calls not local calls originated via the specific trunk group assign the long distance call code as a Host PBX Access code to the trunk group Feature Guide 83 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 15 Special Carrier Access Code Description If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies a Special Carrier Access code assigned through system programming gt Special Carrier Access Code is required every time when a trunk call is made A preprogrammed Pause time gt LCOT Pause Time will be automatically inserted between the user dialled Special Carrier Access code and the following digits 1 5 13 Pause Insertion Conditions e TRS Barring TRS Barring checks only the dialled telephone number excluding the Special Carrier Access code e If this PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX A special Carrier Access code and a Host PBX Access code should be assigned separately these codes cannot be assigned together as one code 84 Feature Guide 1 6 1 1 6 Memory Dialling Features Description 1 6 Memory Dialling Features Memory Dialling Features SUMMARY An extension user can store frequently dialled numbers in the PBX extension data and or the PBX system data A st
119. the assigned press a L CO button trunk groups Trunk Group Selects an idle trunk from the Dial the Trunk Group Access number assigned trunk group Or press a G CO button Individual Selects the desired trunk directly Dial the Individual Trunk Access number Or press the S CO button Conditions COS programming determines the trunk groups available for making calls gt Outgoing Trunk Group Number An Individual Trunk Access Number can be assigned on a trunk port basis Trunk Access Number Reference Button Assignment A flexible button can be customised as a G CO L CO or S CO button as follows Type Assignable parameter No parameter All assigned trunk groups 204 20 through system programming are applied Group CO G CO A trunk group is assigned Single CO S CO A specified trunk is assigned It is possible to assign trunks in the following ways The same trunk to the S CO button and to a G CO button The same trunk group to more than one G CO button More than one L CO button Dialling the Trunk Access number selects a CO button according to the priority S CO G CO gt Direct Trunk Access By pressing an idle CO button it automatically switches on the hands free operation mode and allows a user to use On hook Dialling The user need not press the SP PHONE button MONITOR button or lift the handset Group Hunting Order for Idle Tr
120. the duration of the doorphone call 10 xn 1 15 s Doorphone Call Time Specifies the maximum time of the doorphone call 10 x n nz1 30 s Door Open Duration Time Specifies the door opening duration 1 15s Others SLT Suspend Time Specifies the length of waiting time before sending the internal Caller ID after receiving it 10 x n nz1 15 s Feature Guide 331 3 2 PC Programming 332 System Time Service System Time Service System Parameter Description Value Range Table 1 8 Switch Mode Specifies the Day Night switching mode Manual Automatic Week Day amp Start ient NOME Setting Assigns if Day mode is used Enable Disable Day Start Specifies the start time for Day 00 00 23 59 Lunch Start Setting Assigns if Lunch mode is used Enable Disable Lunch Start Specifies the start time for Lunch 00 00 23 59 Setting Assigns if Lunch time ends Enable Disable Lunch End Specifies the end time for Lunch 00 00 23 59 Night Start Setting Sets the Night start time Enable Disable Night Start Specifies the start time for Night 00 00 23 59 Break 1 Start Setting Assigns if Break 1 is used Enable Disable Break 1 Start Specifies the start time for Break 1 00 00 23 59 Setting Assigns if Break 1 ends Enable Disable Break 1 End Specifies the
121. the maximum digits of the ANI 1 16 number the system can receive MFC R2 Time Forward Specifies the maximum waiting time for the 1 30 s MFC R2 Forward signal from the telephone company Backward Specifies the maximum waiting time for the 1 30 s MFC R2 Backward signal from the telephone company Disappearance Specifies the maximum waiting time for the 1 30 s Group I Code Assignment ANI Start Specifies the code which indicates the start of the ANI number Undefined 1 15 ANI Complete 1 4 Specifies the code which indicates the end of the ANI number Undefined 1 15 ANI Complete 1 is 1 15 ANI Reject Specifies the code used to reject the ANI 1 15 number End of Digit Specifies the confirmation of the end of the Undefined 1 15 ANI number End of Digit Sending Specifies the duration time to send the end Undefined 1 15 Timer of the ANI number Group ll Code Assignment Group Il Code Specifies the destination of each Group Ill 1 15 Outgoing Call Code transmitted to the telephone company Group ll Code Specifies the destination of incoming Trunk Undefined Subscriber Incoming Call 1 15 calls for each Group Il Code respectively Operator Collect Call Group ll ANI Specifies the Group Il ANI code 1 15 Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming digit of the ANI number Parameter Descript
122. the sub telephone whether it rings for incoming calls is programmable Ring on Mode Both telephones ring except when the PT is in Hands free Answerback mode or Voice Calling mode Ring off Mode Only the PT rings However the SLT can answer the call e telephone is in the following situation the call will be transferred to the other telephone by going off hook DPT SLT and APT DPT SLT DWX only During a conversation except during Consultation Hold Conference and Two way Recording While hearing a ringback tone after dialling an extension or telephone number Consultation Hold Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer Conference or Call Splitting APT SLT e f one telephone goes off hook while the other telephone is on a call a three party call is established If one user goes on hook the other user continues the call e extension user cannot originate a call from the SLT if the APT is playing BGM receiving a paging announcement over the built in speaker DPT SLT e A DPT and an SLT must be connected to one super hybrid port of the Card e eXtra Device Port XDP Parallel mode is enabled each telephone can act as completely different extensions with their own extension number gt 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration e When in the parallel mode mode of the super hybrid port should be off through system p
123. to access the second level of Soft button features MODE Used to shift the display to access various features DSS Console Button Usage ANSWER 4 Used to answer an incoming call or place the current call on 6a hold and answer another call with one touch RELEASE Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation or to complete a Call Transfer Flexible CO Trunk Used to make or receive a trunk call or can be reassigned to a different trunk or to another feature button Flexible DSS Direct Station Selection Used to access an extension with one touch Every button is programmed to correspond to an extension DSS buttons can also be reassigned to other features PF Programmable Feature Used to access a preprogrammed feature with one touch no default Feature Guide 153 1 17 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 154 DWX Button Usage INTERCOM INT Used to make or receive intercom calls TALK Used to make or receive calls Used to end calls or exit the Directory or Function modes cancel Also used to switch the power ON OFF by pressing for POWER about 5 seconds Used to clear incorrect digits while entering numbers in CLEAR CN predialling or to return to the display to the previous step or TRANSFER CLR group And used to transfer a call to another party Used for System Speed Dialling and
124. to the extension user ISDN Centrex Assigns whether the system sends an ISDN Enable Disable Flash signal to the ISDN while pressing the FLASH or EFA button CCBS Completion Assigns whether the system accepts an ISDN Enable Disable of Calls to Busy Flash signal Subscriber BRI Data Link P Selects the data link mode on ISDN port basis 1 link 2 link MP Mode ISDN Extension Extension Number Specifies the extension number Extension Number ISDN TE Power Assigns whether the system supplies an power to TE Terminal Equipment Enable Disable MSN Mode ISDN MSN 1 or 2 digits Selects the ring mode for MSN number last 1 digit or 2 digits Ring All Extensions for MSN Ring an Extension for MSN ISDN Extension Progress Tone Assigns whether the system sends the call progress tone to the ISDN extension Enable Disable Feature Guide 293 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Network Configuration Network Type Selects ISDN network type NTT INS NET Europe Germany Europe UK 1 Australia New Zealand Europe Netherlands Swiss 7 Swiss Net 3 Czech North America 10 Spain 11 Europe Italy 12 Mexico 13 South Africa 14 France 15 Greece 16 Portugal 17 Austria 18 Sweden 19 Finland 20 Norway 21 Denmark 22 Belgium 23 Bulgaria 24 Rumania 25 Russia 26 Europe UK
125. touch Feature Setting Buttons Pressing these buttons while on hook changes the feature settings The new mode will be displayed for a preprogrammed time period Conditions e Flexible DSS button lights of the 7040 and KX T7240 shows only Off or Red On If the button is customised as a button which shows other light patterns the other light patterns also show only as Red On Feature Guide 157 1 17 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 17 3 LED Indication 158 Description The light LED Light Emitted Diode of the Message Ringer Lamp and following buttons Line Status Buttons and Corresponding Extension Status Button show line conditions with a variety of light patterns Line Status Buttons S CO G CO L CO INTERCOM G DN Corresponding Extension Status Button DSS 1 Light Pattern of the Message Ringer Lamp Incoming call from a trunk Red flashing Incoming call from another extension Green flashing Message s present no incoming call Red on No Message s present no incoming call Off 2 Light Pattern of the Line Status Buttons Feature Guide Line Status i Incoming Call Button ntercom Distribution Trunk Status Line Status Group Line Light Status Pattern S CO G CO L CCO INTERCOM G DN Off Idle Green on This extension is using the line Slow green This extension is holding the line flashing Moderate This extension is holding the line using
126. user hears the dial tone determined by the Line Preference Outgoing setting Conditions Feature Guide FLASH RECALL Button Mode One of the following modes can be selected for each extension a Disconnect mode b Terminate mode C External Feature Access EFA mode 1 9 7 External Feature Access EFA Terminate Button A flexible button can be customised as the Terminate button Disconnect Time Only for Disconnect Mode The amount of time between successive accesses to the same trunk is programmable for each trunk group LCOT Disconnect Time This feature outputs an SMDR call record restarts the call timer inserts the automatic pause and checks the TRS Barring level again If the ARS mode is on the Terminate mode will be always effective even though the Disconnect mode has been set 1 9 Conversation Features 1 9 7 External Feature Access EFA Description An extension user can have access to the features of a host PBX or the telephone company such as Transfer Hold Call Waiting etc A flash recall signal is sent to the host PBX or the telephone company This is only available on trunk calls including Host PBX Access Conditions e Flash Recall Time The Flash Recall time can be assigned for each trunk group LCOT Flash Time EFA Button A flexible button can be customised as the EFA button e Pressing the FLASH RECALL button which is set to EFA mode 1 9 6 Flash Recall Terminate o
127. with a DID DDI number to a preprogrammed destination Each DID DDI number has a destination for each time mode day lunch break night DID and DDI are programmed the same way The difference between DID and DDI is as follows Feature Description Hardware P Requirement Direct Inward Dialling 010 number is received using a DID line E1 or T1 Card DID Direct Dialling Inward DDI number is received using an ISDN BRI or PRI Card DDI line Point to point must be selected for the ISDN configuration BRI Configuration Feature Guide 19 1 1 Incoming Call Features Method Flowchart A trunk call is received Is the DID DDI number found in the DID DDI table The call is routed to the operator Intercept Routing No Destination Does the call have its CLI information and is CLI mode enabled for the time mode No Yes CLI works Yes Is the CLI destination assigned Is the DID DDI destination for the time mode assigned v The call is routed to the The call is routed to the The call is routed to the CLI destination DID DDI destination operator Intercept Routing No Destination No Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller s identification number is assigned in the Caller ID Table the call will not be routed to the DID DDI destinatio
128. x n n21 128 ms Start Signal Type Selects the start signal type e Wink The wink signal is transmitted to the telephone company before the incoming calls are received Immediate No wink signal is transmitted Immediate Wink Sending Caller ID to Assigns whether to send TIE Caller ID to Yes No TIE the other PBX Receiving Caller ID Assigns whether to receive TIE Caller ID Yes No from TIE from the other end Ringback Tone Service Assigns if the ringback tone is sent Enable Disable Note It is not available when Channel Type is L CO or G CO PBX Dial Tone Assigns whether the system sends dial Enable Disable tone to extension users who seize a T1 digital trunk line Pause Time Selects the length of the Pause Time 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 s Flash Time Specifies the length of the Flash Time None 16 x n 1 80 ms Disconnect Time Selects the maximum waiting time after releasing the trunk line before getting it again 0 5 1 5 2 0 4 0 12 0 s Feature Guide Configuration Slot E1 Common Common Basic 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no PBX No Slot No Card type is only E1 Line Coding Selects the E1 PCM line cording HDB3 AMI Frame Sequence Selects the E1 frame type PCM30 PCM30 CRC Frame Option Specifies the values of C bit and D bit C A D B C 0 D 0 C 0 D 1 C 1 D 0 C 1 D 1
129. x n nz0 11 ms Maximum Make Width Specifies the minimum Make Width 8x n nz1 5 ms Flash Flash Signal Detection OPX Assigns the detection of a flash signal OPX Enable Disable Minimum Break Width OPX Specifies the minimum Break Width OPX 24 8 x n n 0 60 ms Flash Width OPX Specifies the duration time that the system will recognise as switchhook flash after the minimum BREAK width OPX 24 8x n n 0 188 ms Flash Signal Detection TIE Assigns the detection of a flash signal TIE Enable Disable Minimum Break Width TIE Specifies the minimum Break Width TIE 24 8 x n nz0 60 ms Flash Width TIE Specifies the duration time that the system will recognise as switchhook flash after the minimum BREAK width TIE 24 8x n n 0 188 ms Caller ID Caller ID Start Code Selects the start code of Caller ID None X At A B C D Caller ID Information Selects the Caller ID information code None X t A B C D End Code Caller ID End Code Selects the end code of Caller ID None A B C D Feature Guide Channel 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Slot Refers to the slot no Display only PBX No Slot No T1 designates the number Channel number Refers to the channel number 1 24 Display only Connection Refers to the connection status of
130. 0 series telephones To enable this feature system programming is required If disabled hands free conversation is performed instead 108 Feature Guide 1 9 Conversation Features 1 9 3 Mute Description During a conversation a PT user can disable the speaker microphone or the handset microphone to consult privately with others while listening to the other party on the phone through the built in speaker or the handset receiver The user can hear the other party s voice during Mute Only your voice will be muted Conditions e This feature is available with all PTs that have the AUTO ANSWER MUTE button Feature Guide 109 1 9 Conversation Features 1 9 4 Headset Operation 110 Description This PBX provides headset compatible PTs A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset For connection and operation refer to the Operating Instructions for the headset This Conditions Feature Guide feature is also known as Handset Headset Selection A headset is an option If the headset mode is on pressing the SP PHONE button activates the headset not the built in speaker To set the headset mode on a DPT use personal programming Headset Operation or press the Headset button To set headset mode on an APT use the handset headset selector provided on the set and or on the headset Headset Button A flexible button on a DPT can be customised as the Headset button The Headset button ca
131. 1 Dials 2011 Explanation To use this method it is necessary to change the first one or two digits of extension numbers of either PBX e g 10XX for PBX 1 20XX for PBX 2 to avoid having the same extension number Case 1 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 dials extension number 2011 gt Extension 1012 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 2011 of PBX 2 Case 2 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials extension number 301 1 gt Extension 1011 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 3011 of PBX 3 PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code Dial the TIE line access number PBX Code Extension Number Example PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX 3 PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 PBX Code 953 ji i E Extn 101 Extn 1012 Extn 1011 Extn 1011 RENE Dials 7 953 1011 Dials 7 952 1011 PBX code TIE line access no Extn no Feature Guide 217 1 26 Networking Features 218 Explanation To use this method it is necessary to know each PBX code in order to identify the location of an extension Case 1 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 dials TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 and extension number 1011 gt Extension 1012 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 1011 of PBX 2 Case 2 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials TIE line access number 7 PBX code 953 and extension number 1011 gt Extension 1011 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 10
132. 1 15 Feature Guide Channel 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Slot Channel number Refers to the slot no Display only Refers to the channel number PBX No Slot No E1 designates the number Display only Connection Refers to the status of port connection INS OUS Display only Command Specifies the operating card command INS OUS Subscriber Number Specifies the trunk access number Max 16 digits telephone number Channel Type Selects the channel type Undefined DR2 E amp M P E amp M C Trunk Attribute Selects the trunk attribute Note It is available only when Channel Type is E amp or E amp Public Private Trunk Dialling Mode Selects the trunk dialling mode DTMF Pulse MFC R2 E1 Receiving Type Selects the dial type when receiving incoming call Undefined Same as Trunk Dialling Mode DTMF Pulse MFC R2 Receiving Digits Selects the maximum number of digits accepted on incoming call 0 7 CPC Detection Time Specifies the CPC signal duration 80 x n 2 75 Outgoing call recognised on outgoing calls ms CPC Detection Time Specifies the CPC signal duration 80 x n 2 75 Incoming call recognised on incoming calls ms DTMF Duration Selects the duration of the DTMF time 80 160 ms Trunk Pulse Speed Selects the pulse speed 10 20 pps
133. 1 Custom Service 12 Custom Service 21 Custom Service 15 Custom Service 42 Custom Service 30 Lunch Break Night COIN O oO Jo N Explanation A DID call reaches a VM DPT group directly or by the Intercept Routing feature According to the DID Programming Example and VPS Programming Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment a caller will hear a corresponding company greeting of the VPS Time mode day lunch break night of the preprogrammed tenant is applied to the DID destination and company greeting number 192 Feature Guide 1 21 Voice Mail Features Trunk Call Trunk Call 123 4567 123 2468 Sends the following information VPS Trunk Group 1 Time mode Day y Intercept Sends the following information VPS Trunk Group 3 Time mode Night Tenant 3 Company B Jt E Extn 102 Tenant 1 Company A i VPS Floating Extn No 100 TE d mmm Caller s Identification Notification to the VPS When receiving a trunk call the PBX sends the caller s identification number name to the VPS Status Notification to the VPS After the call is transferred by the VPS the PBX sends the status of the transferred extension e g busy to the VPS Paging by the VPS The VPS can perform the paging feature using the recorded message 10 Live Call Scree
134. 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting Description If a called extension is busy or in DND mode Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the same idle extension hunting group which can be programmed through system programming gt Hunting Floating Extension Number Idle extensions are automatically searched according to a preprogrammed hunting type Idle Extension Hunting Type This feature is also known as Station Hunting Type Description Circular Hunting An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle extension hunting group in a circular way Incoming call Y Extn Busy Extn gt Extn Extn Assigned order gt Terminated An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle Hunting extension hunting group until reaching the last assigned extension Incoming call B Extn E Extn gt Extn Assigned order P X Conditions e Idle Extension Hunting applies to Intercom trunk and doorphone calls to a single destination e Anextension user can belong to only one idle extension hunting group 38 Feature Guide If all the searched extensions are busy 1 2 Receiving Group Features The PBX redirects the call to an overflow destination which can be assigned f
135. 11 of PBX 3 2 TIE Line Routing and Modification Table 2 1 To Make a TIE Line Call If you dial a 2 b 3xxx 4xxx 2 3 4 Other PBX Extn Extension Number The TIE Line Routing and Modification Table is referenced by the PBX to identify the trunk route when an extension user makes a TIE line call It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs in the TIE line network The routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided by the dialled number There are two system programmes for the tables TIE Line Routing Table used to assign the leading digits PBX code or extension number and trunk group hunt sequence TIE Modify Removed Digits Added Number used to remove digits from and add a number to the dialled number of the TIE line call This modification may be needed depending on the TIE line network configuration Programming Examples Your PBX is PBX 1 and there are four PBXs in your TIE line network To identify the trunk route as illustrated you should make the following tables a Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code TIE Line Network 4 uu mmm Extn 3xxx L Ji Extn 2xxx b 1st 3xxx TIE in the Flexible Nurnbering Plan e 99 eeecp Rec C RUApUU A a aE Feature Guide 2 3 5 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX 1 1 26 Networking Features
136. 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Description Each extension is assigned a COS number gt Class of Service Several features are controlled on a COS basis Conditions e Remote COS Access Extension users can make a call from other extensions of the lower level COS by using their own higher level COS temporarily Feature Guide 243 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 2 Group Description This PBX supports various types of groups 1 Trunk Group Trunks can be grouped into a specified number of trunk groups e g for each carrier trunk type etc gt Trunk Group Several settings can be assigned on a trunk group basis All trunks belonging to a trunk group follow the assignment determined for that trunk group One trunk can belong to only one trunk group on a port or channel basis Port basis LCOT DID E amp M ISDN BRI ISDN PRI23 ISDN PRISO Channel basis E1 T1 2 Extension Group The PBX supports extension groups Extension Group Assignment each of which is used to compose the following groups a Tenant 2 2 3 Tenant Service b Call Pickup Group See below Paging Group See below Every extension must belong to one extension group but cannot belong to more than one extension group Assignable Extensions PT SLT DWX ISDN Extension T1 OPX Example Extension Group 1 Extension Group 2 Extn 100 Extn 101 Extn 102 Extn 103 Extn 104 Extn 2
137. 2PC on your computer It is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming 5 Read the license agreement Click Yes if you agree with the terms If you choose No you cannot install the TDA100 200 PC programming software License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully 6 Selecta folder to store the program You may accept the suggested folder Click Next Choose Destination Select folder where Setup will install files 218 Feature Guide 277 3 2 PC Programming 7 Choose the model the country area and the language and then click Next IX TDGI2AL Australia English 8 Selecta start menu folder where the software will be held You can accept the suggested folder Click Next to start installing Select Program Folder Please select a program folder iste Strela 278 Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming 9 Click Finish to complete the installation Setup Complete Setup has finished installing TD 12PC on your computer Click Finish to complete Setup 10 Run the PC programming software 11 Enter the password to run the program in fully featured mode TDA100 200 and click OK Feature Guide 279 3 2 PC Programming 12 The initial screen is displayed 280 Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming 3 2 1
138. 3 733 86 Not Ready Mode Ready Mode x735 735 87 Log in Log out x736 736 88 Incoming Call Queue Monitor 5739 739 89 Hot Line programme set cancel x740 740 90 Absent Message set cancel X750 750 91 BGM set cancel X751 751 Feature Guide 263 2 3 System Data Control Location Feature Default Ne Pattern 1 Pattern 2 with X without X 92 Reserved 93 Timed Reminder confirm set cancel x760 760 94 96 Reserved 97 Extension Lock set cancel x77 77 98 Time Service Switch x780 780 99 Reserved 100 Remote Extension Lock off 782 782 101 Remote Extension Lock on 783 783 102 Personal Programme Clear x790 790 103 Personal Password set cancel 799 799 104 Dial Information CTI None None 105 140 Reserved 141 156 Other PBX Extension Number TIE 1 16 None None 157 170 Reserved 171 250 Quick Dialling 1 80 None None 2 Flexible Numbering available busy DND or ringback tone is heard Feature numbers which are available while busy DND or ringback tone is heard can be customised for easy use The numbers should be one digit 0 through 9 X or and must not conflict For default refer to the following table Flexible Numbering Table available while busy DND or ringback tone is heard Feature Default Call Waiting DND Override 10r2 Executive Busy Override 3 Message Waiti
139. 3 PT Programming System Password for User 111 gt Password gt END 4 10 digits ENTER 1234 ENTER Manager Password 112 gt Famo gt m EL i ENTER ENTER Verified Code Number 120 gt gt Locatontie gt riedi gt gt E 0001 1000 Max 4 digits END ENTER ENTER Verified Code Name 121 gt gt LocationNe Nam gt gt 3 END 1 1 Max 20 charact ENTER 0001 1000 ax 20 characters ENTER Verified Code Password 122 gt gt Location gt Password gt gt E 0001 1000 Max 10 digits END ENTER ENTER Verified Code COS Number 123 gt gt Location No gt 05 gt gt gt LA 0001 1000 01 64 END ENTER 01 ENTER Decimal Point for Currency 130 gt gt CoesiredNo gt gt EI 0 7 END ENTER 2 398 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Currency 131 gt gt Gram gt gt C3 3 chracters END ENTER ENTER Main Processor Software Reference 190 gt END ENTER Reference Feature Guide 399 3 3 PT Programming Time Programming Hold Recall Time 200 gt gt Gm gt gt C3 0 240 s END ENTER 605 HOLD Transfer Recall Time 201 gt gt END ENTER 5 Intercept Time 203 gt ins gt gt END ENTE
140. 5 Priority Hunting idle G DN button Ring Ring Any telephone All UCD Priority Hunting Ring Delayed Ringing is not available Example Group Call Waiting mode All e Group call distribution method for idle extensions UCD All extensions hear the Call Waiting tone Ring G DN Button for Group Call Waiting The way that the Group Call Waiting feature works depends on the Group Call Waiting Distribution method as follows a Ring The Group Call Waiting feature activates for all busy member extensions even when the extensions do not have G DN buttons simultaneously for only one incoming call additional calls will wait in a queue b UCD Priority Hunting The Group Call Waiting feature activates on an idle G DN button located on busy member extensions in a certain order This order depends on the type UCD or Priority Hunting Calls will arrive at idle buttons until all G DN buttons are occupied additional calls will wait in a queue Note In the method b if an extension has only one G DN button for an incoming call distribution group the Group Call Waiting feature for the group will not work at the extension Conditions 1 2 Receiving Group Features Incoming Call Y Incoming Call 4 Distribution Distribution Group 1 Group 2 Floating Floating extension extension no 200 no 300 eee 1 G DN200 Call Waiting CU G DN200
141. 7 001987654321 3 2 Caller ID Table Assignment The System Speed Dialling Table is also used as the Caller ID Table In each location of the table the following items can be assigned a System Speed Dialling number Trunk Access number caller s telephone number b System Speed Dialling name caller s name shown on the display or SMDR CLI destination used for CLI feature When a caller s modified telephone number matches a System Speed Dialling number the Trunk Access number is disregarded in the table the call is sent to the assigned CLI destination Feature Guide 1 15 Caller ID Features Example aa System Speed Dialling System Speed Dialling CLI Destination Dialling No 000 90123456789 ABC Company 200 001 System Speed Dialling Number gt System Speed Dialling Name 3 3 Caller s Name Reference Aname can also be shown on the display or SMDR The PBX searches for the name in the following order 1 Personal Speed Dialling data of the original called extension 2 System Speed Dialling Caller ID Table of the tenant 3 Caller ID name received from the public line Caller ID Name Reference If the name is not found it will not be displayed Conditions e Hardware Requirement The LCOT Card and CID Card for calls from analogue trunk e Caller ID signalling type can be selected through system programming Caller ID
142. 7 Direct One touch Answering 61 Direct Trunk Access 75 Directed Call Pickup 63 DISA Built in Automated Attendant Number DISA AA Service 137 DISA Continuous Tone Detection 410 DISA Cyclic Tone Detection 410 DISA Delayed Answer Time 401 DISA Extend Time 401 DISA Intercept Routing Busy DND 138 DISA Intercept Routing No Answer 139 DISA Intercept Time 401 DISA Intercept No Dial 137 DISA Security Mode 422 DISA Security Mode and Available Features 137 DISA Silence Detection 410 DISA Timer 330 Display Information 160 DND Override 60 412 Do Not Disturb DND 60 Door Number Reference 421 Door Open 132 Door Open Assignment 413 Door Open Duration Time 401 Doorphone Call 131 369 Doorphone Call Destination 421 Doorphone Call Ring Type 343 Doorphone Timer 331 429 Index DSP Digital Signal Processor Gain Adjust ment 311 DSS Console 368 DTMF Tone 305 309 317 DWX Digital Wireless Extension Registration 419 DWX Directory 198 DWX Feature Buttons 199 DWX PIN Registration 420 DWX Ring Group 196 358 DWX Termination 420 E E amp M P Pulse Length 311 318 E1 Line Service 4 178 E1 Line Service Features 178 Emergency Call 77 Emergency Dialling Number 371 402 Entering Characters 393 Entering System Programming mode 392 Exception Code 402 Exception Code Tables 92 Exclusive Call Hold 120 Executive Busy Override 69 412 Executive Busy Override Deny 69 412 Extension Contr
143. 85 3 2 PC Programming 286 Parameter Description Value Range Dial Tone Dial Tone Detection Specifies the length of time to detect the 0 5 20 0 s Time dial tone Dial Tone Waiting Time Specifies the length of time that the PBX 400 2000 ms should wait for dial tone to be presented Dial Tone Allowable Specifies the maximum length of allowed 8 200 ms Noise Duration noise Pay Tone Pay Tone Single Type Selects the frequency of pay tone 12 16 KHz Pay Tone Gain Specifies the pay tone gain 0 31 dB Pay Tone Pulse Min Specifies the minimum pulse width of 8 2000 ms tone Pay Tone Pulse Max Specifies the maximum pulse width of pay tone None 8 2000 ms Pay Tone Pulse Specifies the minimum duration between 8 2000 ms Interval pay tone signals Sending Flash on Assigns whether to send Flash on call Enable Disable completion completion and a demand for pay tone Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Port Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no Display only PBX No Slot No LCOT designates the number Port Refers to the port no Display only Trunk Connection Refers to the status of port connection INS OUS Display only Note To confirm the Trunk connection and programming using the PT dial X 3 7 Trunk Access number 3 digits You will hear a dial tone if it is available and
144. Always starts searching from the first assigned extension Ring All extensions in the group ring simultaneously Delayed Ringing Delayed ringing or no ringing can be programmed for each extension in the group gt Delayed Ringing The call can be answered by pressing the flashing button even if no ring or a delayed time is set v B D Rings immediately simultaneously Delayed Ringing Rings after a specified time delay Feature Guide 43 1 2 Receiving Group Features 44 Feature Guide Call Waiting for Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Call Waiting When there are no available extensions in distribute in a group the group members can receive the Call Waiting tone To use this feature Select the Group Call Waiting mode through system programming This determines the distribution method for waiting calls e Member extensions must assign the Call Waiting mode individually or they will not be notified Call Waiting in Section 1 1 3 Incoming Call Indication Features SUMMARY How the Group Call Waiting Feature Activates Programming Conditions Result Group Call Group Call Group Call Waiting Capable Waiting Mode Distribution Method Distribution Method Telephone Distribution UCD I UCD PT DWX with Priority Hunting
145. Applies to the overlap receiving 0 600 s T303 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the SETUP message to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call Applies to the overlap sending 0 3000 s T305 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the DISC message to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it No tone announce 0 3000 s T306 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the DISC message to the ISDN before receiving the reply to it This setting is used when inband tone is supplied 0 3000 s T307 Specifies the time that the system waits after Suspending before restarting 0 6000 s T308 Specifies the maximum waiting time after receiving the Release message to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T309 Specifies the time that the system tries to disconnect the data link before saving the call 0 3000 s Feature Guide 299 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range ISDN T310 Specifies the maximum waiting time after 0 30005 Extension receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message before expecting the continuance message T312 Specifies the maximum waiting time after 0 600 s sending the SETUP message to the ISDN bef
146. BRP OM TYPO see CE 407 BRI Layer 1 Active Mode ice tunes eene kia 407 BRI Layer 2 Active 408 BRI Gontiguration 408 sings aE 408 BRI Network Type eiie i e eame EX ex V SERERE EE Rea ER RR uu Ru 408 BRI Extension 408 DIL 1 1 Destinatii E 408 DID NUM c M 409 DID E 409 DID Destination E 409 Trunk Group Intercept Destination 409 Host PBX Access Code eene nennen nenne entren nnns enne en nnn 409 Extension to Trunk Call Duration Time ssssseseeseneeeeeeenenennnen nennen 409 Trunk to Trunk Call Duration Time sssesssesssseseseeeneeeenneenn nennen nnne nnne 410 DISA 21 1 410 DISA Continuous Tone 4 0 0 eene nene 410 DISA Cyclic Tone Detection nnn nennen 410 Caller ID Signal 410 Pay Tone ESDDEBITE 410 Outgoing Trunk Group
147. Busy DND OGM No EXt No 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 Message No 01 300 100 301 200 103 202 101 102 400 104 205 04 02 301 T Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension Number Feature Guide 139 1 14 Optional Device Features 140 Flowchart A DISA call from an outside party is received Feature Guide Is there an idle port on the MSG Cards Yes DISA Delayed Answer Time Time out Is Intercept Routing Busy DND employed The PBX answers the call DISA Mute Time Time out Y The outgoing message OGM plays and The call is routed to the intercept the PBX starts to receive the DTMF signalling destination Is the first digit dialled DISA 1st Dial Time for Intercept Time out Yes The call is routed to the Operator Intercept Routing No Destination The outgoing message OGM stops Goes to DISA 2nd Dial Time for AA Time out No Is the second digit dialled Is the first dialled digit assigned a destination for the DISA AA service The PBX receives the following dialled digits and checks the dialled number The call is routed to the destination What is the DISA security mode Continued to the next page 1 14 Optional Device Features
148. C Programming 348 Parameter Description Value Range Trunk Call Limitation Selects the trunk call limitation which is a system programmable feature that disconnects an Trunk call when a specified timer expires Outgoing Outgoing Incoming Automatic Call Hold by INTERCOM CO G DN button Selects the treatment for the caller in Automatic Call Hold by INTERCOM CO G DN button Hold Disconnect Dialled Digits during Selects whether digits dialled during the call Yes No the Call are included in the redial number SLT Ringing for CTI Selects the operation when making a call to Ring No Ring the SLT using CTI Computer Telephony Integration code End of Dialling Code Selects the end of dialling by dialling Yes No ISDN Service End Method Selects the method to end the ISDN service Dialling inter digit Time out Designated code for Trunk to Trunk trunk ISDN Service End Specifies the code to end the ISDN service Max 2 digits Code Automatic Time Assigns whether to adjust the time Enable Disable Adjustment automatically System Background Music BGM Parameter Description Value Range Internal Music on Hold Specifies the internal Music on Hold input 6 3 0 3 6 dB Input Level level External Music on Hold Input Level Background Music Specifies BGM 1 8 6 3 0 3 6 dB 1 8 System Echo Cancel
149. COLR button A flexible button can be customised as the CLIR or COLR button e CLIP COLP number must match the telephone number provided by the telephone company Otherwise it will be ignored or replaced by another number CLIP COLP method differs when using a private network 1 26 1 TIE Line Service Feature Guide 173 1 18 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features Malicious Call Identification MCID Description An extension user can ask the telephone company to trace a malicious caller during a call or while hearing reorder tone after the caller hangs up Information on the malicious call will be received later on This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 130 Malicious Call Identification MCID supplementary service Conditions e MCID Signal Waiting Time The time allowed for sending an MCID signal while hearing reorder tone is programmable 174 Feature Guide 1 18 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS Description If the called party is busy and the call has been made using an ISDN line an extension user can set to receive callback ringing when the called party becomes free When the user answers the callback ringing that party s number is automatically dialled This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Stand
150. Company TIE Line Network SS Pee rum mee AA A J cope PBX 1 PBX Code 951 952 9 01 23 4567 n TRG 2 gt of PBX 1 952 DISA Floating extn no verified code entry feature no x verified code verified code password 9 01 23 4567 Outside Party j j 01 23 4567 N Dials 7 952 9 01 Dials 7 952 DISA Floating extn no 23 4567 verified code entry feature x verified code verified code password 9 01 23 4567 Explanation Case 1 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 Idle Trunk Access ARS number of PBX 2 9 and telephone number 01 23 4567 2 The call is not connected to the outside party 01 23 4567 through PBX 2 which has PBX code 952 due to the COS assignment of the trunk groups of PBX 2 Case 2 1 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 dials the TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 DISA floating extension number of PBX 2 verified code entry feature number verified code verified password Idle Trunk Access ARS number of PBX 2 9 and telephone number 01 23 4567 2 The call overrides the COS assignment of the trunk groups of PBX 2 and the call is connected to the outside party 01 23 4567 through PBX 2 which has PBX code 952 Feature Guide 229 1 26 Networking Features
151. Configuration Configuration Slot Parameter Description Value Range Note Slot Refers to the slot PBX No Slot Display only 1 11 Card Specifies the type of None DHLC8 None No cards card installed in each DLC16 DLC8 slot of each cabinet MSLC16 SLC8 DHLC8 8 Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card SLC16 CSIF8 DLC16 16 Port Digital Extension Card LCOT16 LCOT8 BRIg DLC8 8 Port Digital Extension BRI4 PRI23 MSLC 16 16 Port Single Line Telephone Extension PRI30 T1 E1 with Message Lamp Card E amp M8 IP GW4 OPB3 CTI SLC8 8 Port Single Line Telephone Extension LINK Card SLC16 16 Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card CSIF8 8 Port Cell Station Interface Card LCOT16 16 Port Analogue Trunk Card LCOTS 8 Port Analogue Trunk Card BRI8 8 Port BRI Card BRIA 4 Port BRI Card PRI23 PRI Card PRI30 PRI Card T1 T 1 Trunk Card E1 E 1 Trunk Card 8 8 Port E amp M Trunk Card IP GWA 4 Channel VoIP Gateway Card OPB3 Optional 3 Slot Base Card CTI LINK CTI Link Card Feature Guide 281 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Note Status Refers to the status INS OUS Fault INS The card is in service of the card Fault OVER Display only Fault DIE Fault CUS The card i
152. D 1 FWD Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their incoming calls to preset destinations 2 DND An extension user can send the tone to let the caller know he is not available Conditions e FWD and DND features apply to Intercom calls including doorphone calls and trunk calls including a call from an extension that placed a trunk call on a consultation hold e FWD DND Button Both the FWD and DND features for the extension can be customised on a flexible button Only one of the features will work at a time Multiple types of FWD DND buttons can be customised on an extension e Group FWD Button The FWD feature for the incoming call distribution group can be customised on a flexible button Multiple types of Group FWD buttons can be customised on an extension FWD DND Button and Group FWD Button Types Type Description FWD DND for FWD DND Internal Works for incoming intercom calls Extension FWD DND External Works for incoming trunk calls FWD DND Both Works for all incoming calls FWD for Group FWD Internal Works for incoming intercom calls 2 Group FWD External Works for incoming trunk calls Group Group FWD Both Works for all incoming calls Button Status The FWD DND button and Group FWD button show the current status as follows The pattern can be changed through system programming Feature Guide 55 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DN
153. D Caller ID FSK Carrier Assigns the detection of the carrier when Enable Disable Detection receiving Caller ID Caller ID FSK END Detection Selects the recognition of reception of Caller ID end Length Time Time Caller ID FSK Header Examination Assigns to check Caller ID header when receiving Caller ID Enable Disable Caller ID FSK Detection Start Time Specifies the length of time after receiving a call before detecting Caller ID 80 1200 ms Caller ID FSK Detection Time Specifies the length of time while detecting Caller ID 1040 4000 ms Caller ID DTMF preamble Selects the Caller ID preamble None x A B C D Caller ID DTMF Information Code Selects Caller ID DTMF information code None X A B C D Caller ID DTMF End Code Selects the code signalling end of Caller ID None X A B C D Caller ID DTMF Information Code Private Caller ID DTMF Information Code Out of Area Caller ID DTMF Information Code Technical Reason Caller ID DTMF Information Code Unknown Number Caller ID DTMF Information Code Restricted Number Specifies Caller ID DTMF Information Code Private Out of Area Technical Reason Unknown Number Restricted Number Max 16 digits Information Header Selects the third information block in the header DDN Caller ID Feature Guide 2
154. D Features Light pattern Status default Red on FWD on Slow red flashing DND on Off FWD DND off Mode Change When either the FWD or DND feature is assigned pressing the FWD DND button changes the on off setting alternately When both the features are assigned simultaneously pressing the button changes the settings as follows gt FWD gt DND gt Off 7 56 Feature Guide 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Call Forwarding FWD Description Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their calls to preset destinations The circumstances under which the calls are forwarded are as follows Type Circumstance All Calls Any time Follow Me When an extension user fails to set this feature before leaving the desk this feature can be set from the destination extension Busy When the extension user s line is busy No Answer When the extension user does not answer within a preprogrammed time Call Forwarding No Answer Time Busy No Answer When the extension user s line is busy or the user does not answer within a preprogrammed time Call Forwarding No Answer Time Depending on the type of incoming intercom or trunk calls it is possible to set different destination for each Intercom Calls Extension Forwards to to Extension Another Extension Trunk Calls to Forwards to Ext
155. DPT Digital Integration does not work Live Call Screening LCS e An SLT which is connected to an LCS activated PT in parallel can also be used to monitor message recording Even if the SLT user is using a cordless telephone an alarm tone through the handset lets him know that a message is being recorded To intercept the call press Flash Recall button or flash the hookswitch e LCS Button A flexible button can be customised as the LCS button e Live Call Screening Password Control To prevent unauthorised monitoring a personal password must be set by the LCS user If the user forgets the password it can be cleared by a manager e Each extension can be programmed to either end recording or continue recording the conversation after the call is intercepted through personal programming LCS Mode Set After Answering Two way Recording into the VPS e Two way Record Two way Transfer Button A flexible button can be customised as the Two way Record or the Two way Transfer button An extension number can be assigned to the Two way Transfer button so that it can be used as a one touch record button for the mailbox of the specified extension e When all of the VPS ports are busy a Pressing the Two way Record button sends an alarm tone b Pressing the Two way Transfer button followed by an extension number sends an alarm tone 194 Feature Guide 1 22 Digital Wireless Extension DWX Features 1 22 Digital Wireless Exten
156. Dealer amp User Assigns whether to allow the dealer and Enable Disable Feature Guide Maintenance RS 232C Port 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range RS 232C Port Parameter 1 4 New Line Selects the new line code CR LF CR Baud Rate Selects the baud rate 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps Data Bits Selects the word length 7 8 Parity Selects the parity bit None Mark Space Even Odd Stop bits Selects the stop bit 1 2 Flow Control Selects the flow control type None Hardware Xon Xoff Maintenance Daily Test Setting Parameter Description Value Range Setting Assigns testing Enable Disable Start Time Specifies the start time of testing 00 00 23 59 Maintenance External Modem Control Parameter Description Value Range External Modem Command Specifies the external modem command for the initial setting Max 80 characters consisting of 0 9 2 a z or the other marks Maintenance Power Failure Transfer Control Number Parameter Description Value Range PFT Card Position 1 6 Trunk Card Slot Specifies the trunk card location 1 11 Number Extension Card Slot Specifies the extension card location 1 11 The same number for each of the trunk and extension card is not available Feature Guide 387 3 2 PC Programming 388 Maintenance Error
157. Denied Code 402 TRS Barring Level 93 411 TRS Barring Line Routing Table Programming 402 TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dial ling 92 402 TRS Barring Denied Code 377 TRS Barring Exception Code 377 TRS Barring Option 377 TRS Barring Special Carrier Access Excep tion Code 377 Trunk Access 75 Trunk Access Number Reference 405 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 4 133 Trunk Call Duration Limitation 411 Trunk Call Limitation 114 Trunk Call Ring Type 343 Trunk Connection 405 Trunk Group 349 350 405 Trunk Group Access 75 Trunk Group Intercept Destination 409 Trunk Name 405 Trunk Number 359 Trunk Port 381 Trunk Programming 405 Trunk Setting 293 301 339 Trunk Timer 329 Trunk to Trunk Call Duration 114 Trunk to Trunk Call Duration Time 410 Two way Recording into the VPS 193 U Unattended Conference 126 Uniform Call Distribution UCD 43 User Manual References 2 User Programming List 386 User to user Signalling Type 1 through 3 UUS 1 through UUS 3 162 V Verified Code 372 Verified Code COS Number 398 Verified Code Entry 100 Verified Code Name 398 Verified Code Number 398 Verified Code Password 398 VIP Call 48 Virtual Private Network VPN 235 Visual Caller ID 37 VM Group Floating Extension Number 418 Voice Mail VM DTMF Command 357 Voice Mail VM DTMF Status 356 Voice Mail VM Group 182 355 358 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 191 Voice Mail DTMF Integrati
158. Display only ID informed from CS Port Parameter Description Value Range Slot Refers to the slot no Display only PBX No Slot No CSINF designates the number Port Refers to the port no Display only 1 8 Status Specifies the port status Display only INS OUS Fault Configuration Slot CTI LINK Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no PBX No Slot No Card type is only CTI LINK IP Address Specifies the IP address XXX XXX XXX XXX Subnet Mask Specifies the Subnet Mask XXX XXX XXX XXX Gateway Specifies the gateway address XXX XXX XXX XXX FTP Account Specifies the FTP account 4 10 characters FTP Password Specifies the FTP password 4 10 characters Number Maintenance Port Specifies the maintenance port no 10000 65535 CTI Port Number Specifies the CTI port no 10000 65535 Feature Guide 323 3 2 PC Programming Configuration Slot IP Gateway Port Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no PBX No Slot No Port Refers to the port no Display only Trunk Number Refers to the trunk number Display only 1 512 Auto setting Configuration Digital Wireless Extension DWX Connection Refers to the status of port connection INS OUS Display only Command Specifies the operating card command INS OUS Name Spec
159. Distribution Group 352 Incoming Call Distribution Group Extension Number 415 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY 40 Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Ex tension Number 415 Incoming Call Distribution Group Name 415 Incoming Call Distribution Group Type 416 Incoming Call Features 14 Incoming Call Indication Features SUMMA RY 34 Incoming Call Log 148 Incoming Call Log Display Lock 148 Incoming Call Queue Monitor 53 Incoming Call DDI DID Table 383 Incoming Call DIL DDI DID TIE 381 Incoming Call MSN 384 Incoming Call Option 384 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY 14 Individual Trunk Access 75 Installation Manual References 2 Installation Procedure 276 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 161 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY 161 Intercept 360 Intercept Routing 27 Intercept Routing Busy DND 27 Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA 27 Intercept Routing No Destination 29 Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group 49 Intercept Time 400 Intercom Call 70 Internal Call Block 33 Internal Call Features SUMMARY 32 Interrupt Redial 88 Introduction 274 IRNA 349 ISDN Centrex Service 163 ISDN En bloc Dialling Leading Digit table 376 ISDN Extension 176 ISDN Line Service 4 ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number 424 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol 165 Itemised Billing Code 106 L Last Number Redi
160. ENTER Programming Mode Level 516 gt gt 05 FP gt gt m 01 64 Disable Personal END ENTER System amp Personal ENTER Feature Guide 413 3 3 PT Programming Extension Programming XDP Assignment 600 gt gt Slot No gt PortNo gt See gt gt m 101 111 01 08 AUTO ANS END ENTER ENTER HOLD To the Next Port No To the Desired Port No NEXT CANCEL VPS DSS Console PC Console Assignment 601 gt C gt SlotNo gt Portno gt FP gt m 101 111 01 08 de Normal ENS ENTER EE ENTER VPS 1 1 12 VPS 2 1 12 PC CNS 1 8 Class of Service 602 gt Extn No gt C gt gt a aa END ENTER 179 cigit 5 Extension Group Assignment 603 gt gt Extn No Extension Group No gt C gt LJ 1 5 digits 001 032 END ENTER e 001 ENTER Extension Intercept Destination 604 gt gt emaint gt gt E 1 Day 2 Lunch 1 5 digits END ENTER 3Break A Night ENTER 414 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Call Forwarding No Answer Time 605 gt Emm gt gt gt Ga 1 5 digits 1 120 5 END e 155 ENTER CLIP COLP Number Assignment 606 gt gt Emmo CP gt gt a 5 digi Max 16 digit END ENTER 19 digits ax 16 digits ENTER Incoming Call Distribution Group Exte
161. ENTER NEXT oes dem ENTER HOLD System Speed Dialling Number 001 gt gt Speed Dieting gt Telephone Ne gt gt E 000 999 32 digits END ENTER All Not stored ENTER To the Next Speed Dialling No To the Desired Speed Dialling No v NEXT CANCEL System Speed Dialling Name 002 gt gt Speed Dialling gt Name gt C gt EI 000 999 20 characters END ENTER All Not stored ENTER Extension Number 003 gt Curent Enn No gt Newent No gt 1 5 digits 1 5 digits ENTER 101 ENTER Extension Name 004 gt Extn Name gt gt 1 Max 5 digits 20 characters END ENTER All Not stored ENTER 394 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Personal Password 005 gt Extn No gt Password gt gt imi m END ENTER Max 5 digits Max 10 digits ENTER Operator Assignment 006 gt gt gt gt gt m 1 Day 2 Lunch 1 5 digits END ENTER 3 Break 4 Night 3 ENTER Console and Paired Telephone Assignment 007 gt gt ConsoleNo gt Exin No gt gt 01 08 1 5 digits END ENTER All consoles Not stored ENTER Absent Message 008 gt gt LocationNo gt gt E 1 8 Max 16 characters END ENTER 1 Will Return Soon ENTER 2 Gone Home 3 At Ext 969696 4 Back at 5 Out until 6 In a meeting 7 9 Blank
162. F by ISDN P MP Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P Call Hold Puts one ISDN call on hold Call Hold HOLD by ISDN HOLD by ISDN 1 18 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features Service Description Details in Call Transfer Transfers an ISDN call to an outside party Call Call Transfer CT by ISDN Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer CT by without Announcement are available ISDN Malicious Call An extension user can ask the telephone Malicious Identification company to trace a malicious caller Information Call MCID on the malicious call will be received later on Identification MCID Completion of If an outside called party is busy an extension Completion Calls to Busy can receive callback ringing when the called of Calls to Subscriber party becomes free Busy CCBS Subscriber CCBS ISDN Centrex Service An extension user can have access to the features of the ISDN Centrex Service of the telephone company e g Call Transfer This is used by putting the current ISDN call on hold by sending a flash recall signal This feature is enabled or disabled for each ISDN port Private Networking Connection QSIG Private networking with QSIG is possible using an ISDN line The QSIG mode Master or Slave can be enabled on an ISDN port basis ISDN Extension ISDN Extension in Section 1 18 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SU
163. H4 4 Port Doorphone Card DPH2 2 Port Doorphone Card E104 4 Port External Input Output Card ECHO16 16 Channel Echo Canceller Card Status Refers to the status INS OUS Fault INS The card is in service of the card Display Fault OVER only Fault DIF OUS The card is out of service Fault Card was pulled out from the slot or the card is not communicating with the system Fault The number of trunk and or extension OVER ports exceeds the system capacity Fault DIF The card is different from the card specified in programming Command Specifies the Blank Delete Delete Card has been removed from the operating card INS OUS System INS It performs Automatic Configuration of the card if the slot is in the OUS condition OUS Operation is suspended If the port is on hook the port is disabled Otherwise the system will wait until the port becomes idle Doorphone No 1 4 Port Refers to the port no Automatic Display only setting 1 16 Feature Guide 283 3 2 PC Programming 284 Common Configuration Slot LCOT Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no PBX No Slot No Card type is only LCOT Time Outgoing Guard Time Specifies the length of outgoing guard time 3 6 s after receiving Reverse Alert signal First Dial Time Trunk Specifies the min
164. IE MSN dial information Digits to delete Specifies the number of digits to be deleted 0 15 from the number received from the DDI DID TIE MSN lines Additional Dial Specifies the number of digits to be added to the number received from the DDI DID TIE MSN lines Max 8 digits consisting of 0 9 Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Incoming Call DDI DID Table Parameter Description Value Range DID DDI Table 1 1000 Number Specifies DID DDI number Max 32 digits Name Specifies DID DDI name Max 20 characters CLI Ring Routing Day In Day mode Enable Disable Lunch In Lunch mode Break In Break mode Night In Night mode DID DDI Destination Day In Day mode Extension Number Lunch In Lunch mode Break In Break mode Night In Night mode Tenant Number for Specifies the tenant number for incoming 1 8 DDI DID DDI DID calls VPS Trunk Group Specifies the trunk group number for the 1 48 Number VPS Feature Guide 383 3 2 PC Programming 384 Incoming Call MSN Parameter Description Value Range Slot Refers to PBX No Slot No Display only Port Refers to the port no Display only Incoming Type Selects how the incoming trunk call is routed to the destination within the system DIL DDI DID MSN Location 1 10 Number Specifies the MSN number Max 16 digits Name
165. ISDN call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature when the call is received through an ISDN line Extension users can set the forward destination to the network on an MSN basis The setting must have been done beforehand to use this feature There are the following types Type Description Call Forwarding Incoming calls are forwarded unconditionally Unconditional CFU Call Forwarding An incoming call is forwarded when the Busy CFB destination on the PBX is busy Call Forwarding No An incoming call is forwarded when the Reply CFNR destination on the PBX does not answer within a preprogrammed time period When the CFB or CFNR has been set the network determines to forward the incoming call to the preprogrammed destination after the call reached the PBX once When the CFU has been set the network forwards the call directly to the preprogrammed destination This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 207 Diversion supplementary service Example lt FWD gt lt Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP gt ISDN MSN 123 4567 CFU Destination 01 23 4567 MSN 123 4567 987 6543 H Y 1 Outside Caller Lu Outside Party Outside Caller Outside Party 1 01 23 4567 01 23 4567 Dials 123 4567 Y Dials 123 4567
166. In this case the SLT port TR of the super hybrid port can be used as an XDP port to connect an SLT as a sub telephone There are two modes for the XDP port as follows Mode Description Parallel Mode The DPT and SLT have the same extension number so that they can act as one extension They use the main telephone s DPT s extension data e g extension number COS 1 9 9 Parallelled Telephone XDP Mode The DPT and SLT have different extension numbers so that they can act as completely different extensions To use XDP mode XDP mode must be enabled on the port through system programming gt XDP Assignment Conditions 242 Feature Guide Automatic Detection on Super Hybrid Port A DPT APT or SLT can be connected to a super hybrid port without programming A DSS Console or a VPS Panasonic KX TVS TVP series DPT Digital Integration can also be connected with an SLT in XDP mode APT and SLT in Parallel Mode An APT and an SLT can also be connected to a super hybrid port and used in parallel mode Wireless XDP Parallel Mode A DWX can be used in parallel mode with a wired telephone 1 22 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode DSS Console and Pared Telephone Assignment When a DSS Console is connected a pared extension must be assigned through system programming Console and Paired Telephone Assignment 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 System Configuration Software
167. Leading Dial Modification Dial Modification No Digits Trunk Trunk Group Removed Added Group Removed Added Digits No Digits No 01 952 1 0 02 953 1 0 2 3 XXQ953 03 954 2 3 X X954 Explanation Location 01 The hunt sequence by dialling 7 Code 952 XXXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 1 Sending no to PBX 2 952 Location 02 The hunt sequence by dialling 7 Code 953 XXXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 1 m Sending no to PBX 2 953 XXXX The 2nd route trunk group TRG 2 Sending no to PBX 4 x X9534 XXXX Location 03 The hunt sequence by dialling 7 PBX Code 9544 XXXXT The 1st route trunk group TRG 2 m Sending no to PBX 4 X X9544 XXXX 1 26 Networking Features 2 2 To Receive a TIE Line Call a Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code Example PBX 4 PBX 3 Extn 3011 ji i Extn 1011 Extn 2011 Dials 3011 1 PBX 2 PBX 2 removes digits from and or adds number to the number sent from PBX 1 3011 according to the assignment for each trunk port of PBX 2 If the modified number is an extension number of PBX 2 e g 2011 the call will be received at extension 2011 If not PBX 2 checks the modified number in the TIE Line Routing and Modified Table of PBX 2 If the match is found in the table the call will be modified according to the table and send to the corresponding PBX PBX 3
168. MMARY An ISDN BRI PRI port can be used for extension connection While the extension connection is enabled ISDN terminal devices e g ISDN telephone G4 Facsimile personal computer or a behind PBX can be connected to the port When the ISDN port is in P P configuration one ISDN terminal device can be connected to the port When the ISDN port is in P MP configuration a maximum of eight ISDN terminal devices can be connected to the port However only a maximum of two devices can be used simultaneously Conditions Overlap En bloc ISDN call dialling mode Overlap or En bloc can be selected for each ISDN port When Overlap is selected the PBX sends each dialled digit individually When En bloc is selected the PBX sends all of dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling The PBX recognises end of dialling as follows Dialling if programmed Dialling a preprogrammed telephone number Inter digit timer expires Some supplementary services are provided by the key protocol gt ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol in Section 1 18 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY Extension Number An extension number can be assigned to each ISDN port Feature Guide 163 1 18 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 164 Feature Guide ISDN Extension Progress Tone The PBX can be programmed to send the call progress tone to ISDN extensions on an ISDN
169. NG 423 sCieBci cq 423 423 423 Stop Bits sted 423 SMDR POM 423 SMDR Page Length ide ictus er eco ren 424 SMDR Skip Perforation 40 0001 0000 424 SMDR Outgoing Call Printing 424 SMDR Incoming Call Printing esses nennen nennen 424 Remote Programming 424 Modem Floating Extension 424 ISDN Remote Floating Extension 0 424 Slot Card Type 1 enne nennen rennen nennen enne 425 Slot Card e e n dE ade EE E 425 OPB3 Option Card Type Reference ssssssssessssesssseeeeenenee nennen enne 425 OPB3 Option Card nnne 425 A MINOX 427 Feature Guide 11 12 Feature Guide Section 1 Call Handling Features Feature Guide 13 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY Description Incoming calls via a trunk publ
170. Night Lunch Day Night Answer Specifies an Answer button Release Specifies a Release button Toll Restriction Call Barring button TRS Barring Level Specifies TRS Barring level 1 7 ISDN Service Access button Feature Number Specifies the feature number Max 32 digits CLIR Specifies the CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction button COLR button Specifies the COLR Connected Line Identification Restriction 366 Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Two way Record button Voice Mail VM Extension Specifies the VM extension number Extension Number Extension Number Specifies the extension number of message recording None Extension Number LCS Specifies the Live Call Screening LCS button LCS Cancel Specifies the LCS Cancel button Voice Mail Transfer button Extension Number Specifies the VM extension number Extension Number Wrap up Specifies the Wrap up button Charge Specifies the Charge button ISDN Hold Specifies the ISDN Hold button Headset Specifies the Headset button Those buttons can be assigned to one or more CO buttons Line Extension Digital Wireless Extension PF Button Parameter Description Value Range Extension Number Specifies the extension number Extension Number Display only Name Refers to the extension name
171. No PortNo gt CO ENTER 101 110 01 08 TE ENTER DIL 1 1 Destination 450 gt gt meo gt Sotka gt gt Bestnstin Ta gt gt 1 Day 2 Lunch 101 110 01 16 Max 5 digits ENTER 3 Break 4 Night gt gt LO gt EJ END ENTER 408 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming DID Number 451 gt Location 001 gt gt Eg ENTER 0001 1000 32 digits ENTER END DID Name 452 gt gt Location o Name gt gt E ENTE 0001 1000 20 characters ENTER END DID Destination 453 gt Time No Location No gt Destination No gt E 1 Day 2 Lunch 14 mem END ENTER 3Break4Nign 000171000 5 digits e rd Trunk Group Intercept Destination 470 gt Q gt gt Trunk Group No Destination gt gt 1 Day 2 Lunch 1 64 1 5 digit ENTER 4 Night 01 6 05 gt a END ENTER Host PBX Access Code 471 gt lt gt Trunk Group No gt bp 1 8 ENTER 5 gt gt Access Code gt gt LJ Max 10 digits END ENTER Extension to Trunk Call Duration Time 472 gt Q gt Trunk Group No gt gt Qe 01 64 01 60 END ENTER 10 min ENTER Feature Guide 409 3 3 PT Programming Trunk to Trunk Call Duration Time 473 gt Trunk Group No gt gt gt E 01 64 01 60 min END ENTER e 10 min ENTER DISA Silence Detection
172. Not stored Charge Margin 010 gt xg gt 2 2 decimal places END ENTER 00 00 ENTER Charge Tax 011 gt gt Location No Taxxxvv gt Q gt 1 3 242 decimal places END ENTER 00 00 ENTER Feature Guide 395 3 3 PT Programming Charge Rate per Unit 012 gt Trunk Group gt gt Qe EJ 01 64 Max 8 digits END ENTER including decimal point ENTER All trunk lines 1 00 396 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming System Programming Flexible Numbering 100 gt LocationNo awene gt gt E 01 36 4 digits Default List END ENTER ENTER HOLD To the Next Location No To the Desired Location No v NEXT CANCEL Time Service Switching Mode 101 gt sc gt gt AUTO ANS END BUE ENTER Time Service Start Time 102 gt gt Week No gt Time gt Hour Minute gt gt 0 Sun 1 Mon 1 Day 1 2 Lunch 00 00 23 59 ENTER 2Tue 3Wed 3 2 4 Night Different by EMER 4 Thu 5 Fri 6 Sat the country area To the Next Time No To the Next Week No v NEXT CANCEL Automatic Trunk Group Access Assignment 103 gt gt Trunk Group No gt amp gt END 01 64 01 64 ENTER Location No Trunk Group No ENTER System Password for Dealer 110 gt gt Password gt Q gt LJ END 4 10 digits ENTER 1234 ENTER Feature Guide 397 3
173. Number ssesssssseseseeeenenenenee nennen nennen entren ens 411 TRS Barring Level pepe er pag eerte 411 Trunk Call Duration Limitation 4 0 10 enne nnne nnne 411 Call Transfer on Trunk 44 4 040 0 eene nennen nnns 411 Call Forwarding on Trunk Calls 2 044 4 11 nnne nnns 411 Executive Busy Override 412 Executive Busy Override 412 DND OV6ITIdG 228 412 Account Code 412 Speed Dialling TRS Barring 2 412 Extension Lock TRS Barring Level sese 412 Manager Assignment eva aaa uu eaa coma Ra a vk ux 412 Door Open Assignment ssssssssssssssseseeeeeeeennn eene 413 Time Service Switching nennen 413 Wireless Parallel Mode for Paired 413 Programming Mode Level 413 XDF Assign Oni m 414 VPS DSS Console PC Console 0 2 2 4 0000 414 Class OFSEmni E 414 Ext
174. Panasonic id IP PBX Feature Guide Hybr KX TDA100 KX TDA200 Model SS ee ee SS inn 7271777 Please read this manual before connecting the Hybrid PBX save this manual for future reference Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic KX TDA100 KX TDA200 Hybrid IP PBX Introduction About this Feature Guide This Feature Guide is designed to serve as an overall feature reference for the Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX It explains what this PBX can do and how to obtain the most out of its many features and facilities This manual contains the following sections Section 1 Call Handling Features Provides details about the call handling features Section 2 System Configuration and Administration Features Provides details about the system configuration and administration features Section 3 Programming Provides system programming instructions Section 4 Appendix Provides tables listing tones and ring tones Section 5 Index Provide feature titles important words to help you access the required information easily Terms used in this Feature Guide Installation Manual References The required installation instruction titles described in the Installation Manual are noted for your reference Feature Guide References The related feature titles described in this Feature Guide are noted for your reference User Manual References The operation required to implement the feature
175. R Hot Line Waiting Time 204 gt gt Gm gt gt 0 15s END ENTER 15 Automatic Redial Repeat Times 205 gt gt Gumberoftines gt gt a 1 15 END ENTER Different by the country area ENTER Automatic Redial Interval 206 gt gt gt gt m 1 120 10 5 END ENTER Different by ENTER the country area 400 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Door Open Duration Time 207 gt gt ENTER 5 ENTER Call Duration Count Start Time 208 gt gt Gime gt 0 60 s END ENTER 0s ENTER DISA Delayed Answer Time 209 gt Time gt gt C3 0 30 s END ENTER 55 ENTER DISA Extend Time 210 gt Gm gt L7 mi END ENTER omn ENTER DISA Intercept Time 211 gt gt Time gt S gt CO 0 60 s END ENTER 205 Feature Guide 401 3 3 PT Programming TRS Barring Line Routing Table Programming TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling 300 gt gt SF gt OSD AUTO ANS END ENTER Disable Enable ENTER HOLD TRS Barring Denied Code 301 Leve No Location No gt enied code gt gt E END ENTER 2 6 001 100 Max 16 digits ENTER To the Next Location No To the Desired Location No v NEXT CANCEL Exception Code 302 gt gt Level No Location No
176. Resource Description Device External Pager Used as the destination for TAFAS feature External Pager Floating Extension Number Outgoing Message OGM Used to send messages for DISA feature Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension Number Analogue Remote Maintenance Used to access the PC programming mode through a modem on a personal computer Modem Floating Extension Number ISDN Remote Maintenance Used to access the PC programming mode through the ISDN interface on a personal computer ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Used to call an incoming call distribution group gt Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number DWX Ring Group Used to call a DWX ring group VM DPT Group Used to call a VM DPT group VM Group Floating Extension Number VM DTMF Group Used to call a VM DTMF group Conditions e Itis possible to give names to floating extension numbers Incoming Call Distribution Group Name Outgoing Message OGM Name 266 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 7 Software Upgrading Description It is possible to upload software from a personal computer to the PBX to upgrade the following Data File Storing Area Main Central Processing Operating system data area on the MPR MPR software data Card Default data of system Count
177. SUMMARY he cannot retrieve the parked call which the extensions made 1 11 Holding Features 1 11 3 Call Splitting Description An extension user can alternate between two other parties Placing the current call on hold allows the user to have a conversation with the other party Conditions e While having a conversation with one party the other party is in Consultation Hold Consultation Hold Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer Conference or Call Splitting Feature Guide 123 1 11 Holding Features 1 11 4 Music on Hold Description Music can be played to any party on hold The following music sources are available a Internal music source b External music source C Cyclic tone BGM number or cyclic tone can be selected for the Music on Hold Music Source Selection for Call Hold BGM numbers are the same as the external music port numbers e g External music port 1 is BGM1 However 2 includes internal music sources 1 and 2 as well as external music port 2 It is possible to choose what music source will be used as BGM2 Music Source Selection for Port 2 BGM Number and the Music Source BGM No Music Source 1 External music port 1 2 External music port 2 Internal music source 1 or 2 Conditions e Hardware Requirement User supplied music source e Volume Control It is possible to change the volume of an internal
178. Speed Dialling Name Feature Guide 25 1 1 Incoming Call Features Explanation If the caller s number is 123 456 7890 The Trunk Access number is disregarded 1 Checks the number in the table gt Matches the number in location 000 2 The call is routed to the CLI destination extension 200 Conditions Speed Dialling Number Table assigned by each tenant is applied e Automatic Caller ID Number Modification The Caller ID number is used after modification by the Automatic Caller ID Number Modification 1 15 1 Caller ID 26 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Intercept Routing Description Provides automatic redirection of incoming trunk calls There are two types of Intercept Routing as follows Feature Description Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time period Intercept time Intercept Time it is redirected to the preprogrammed destination Intercept Routing Busy DND If a called party is busy or in mode the call is redirected to the preprogrammed destination The available intercept destination is as follows Type 1 The destination assigned on the extension port which the original destination joins Extension Intercept Destination Type 2 The destination assigned on the trunk group which receives the call Trunk Group Intercept Destination Origin
179. Station Lock Control e TRS Barring Level COS programming determines the TRS Barring level for Extension Lock gt Extension Lock TRS Barring Level Feature Guide 97 1 7 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 7 4 Dial Tone Transfer 98 Description An extension assigned as the manager can change the TRS Barring level for the extension user temporarily After that the extension user can make his call Example An extension user can call a manager to release the restriction on outgoing call e g overseas calls 3 Make a trunk call 2 Change HET TRS Baring level E Toll Restriction E 1 Call E Call Barring button Guest Room Manager Trunk call restricted Conditions changed level effective just one time e Restriction Call Barring Button A manager extension must store the desired TRS Barring level in the Toll Restriction Call Barring button A flexible button can be customised as the Toll Restriction Call Barring button Feature Guide 1 7 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 7 5 Remote COS Access Description An extension user can use another extension telephone with the COS assigned on his own extension temporary The extension accesses his own extension from another telephone and operates features with the same conditions which are assigned his own extension It is one of the remote operations A personal
180. T7235 except KX T7235G FR SL NE If the KX T7235G FR SL NE are connected to the PBX the OHCA feature for the KX T7235 should be disabled through system programming If the OHCA feature cannot be used due to COS or called extension s telephone type the Call Waiting tone will be sent to the called extension Feature Guide 73 1 5 Making Call Features Whisper OHCA Description An extension user can give a message to a busy extension through the handset Conditions e COS programming determines which extensions can use this feature e This feature is available only when the calling and called extension use one of the following telephones KX T7600 series KX T7500 series KX T7400 series except KX T7451 e Whisper OHCA feature cannot be used due to COS or telephone type the Call Waiting tone will be sent to the called extension e called extension does not use KX T7600 KX T7500 or KX T7400 series telephone but forces Whisper OHCA the announcement may be heard by the other party e possible to enable the Whisper on any telephone However it may not work properly 0 The voice may be heard by the other party 74 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 8 Trunk Access Description There are the following features to access a trunk Feature Description Accessing method Idle Selects an idle trunk Dial the Idle Trunk Access number Or automatically from
181. TD7590 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt cc Push on hook button Function Select Select for 5 seconds Twice INITIAL SETTING REGISTRATION gt gt gt gt pspn 7 A V pp Choose DECT 4 digits C Tone Choose System Lock SYSTEM No 1 4 ENABLE DISABLE gt gt lt 5 gt System Lock Password gt 100 gt System Lock Password gt fe epe 4 digits 4 digits DISABLE rrr Using the KX TD7580 Feature Guide 419 420 3 3 PT Programming gt gt 0 gt 0 gt 5 gt Push power button Function Select Select for 2 seconds button Setting Handset REGISTRATION 2 9 Y gt 0 rsew EJ 7 Select Choose Base 4 digits Function Tone Register H set unit No 1 4 button DWX Termination 691 gt gt gt m 001 128 END ENTER ENTER DWX PIN Registration 692 gt gt DWXNo DWXPIN gt EE ENTER 0 14 4 Changing DWX using the KX TD7690 VENU SEL Bd E gt dida gt uu F1 key PROGRAM F1 ib SETTING M F1 key CHANGE pin Fi key ER s C Tone 4 digits F1 key Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Resource Interface Programming External Pager Floating Extension Number 700 gt gt Farm gt Emo gt gt C3 1 2 1 5 digits ENTER ENTER HOLD To the Next Pager No To the Desired P
182. Type of Number for Outgoing Public Selects the Type of Number applied to the outgoing Trunk calls via ISDN Unknown International National Network Subscriber Private Selects the Type of Number applied to the outgoing Trunk calls via ISDN Unknown International National Network Subscriber Numbering Plan ID for Incoming Public Specifies the Numbering Plan ID applied to the Unknown ISDN Incoming calls via ISDN Telephony National Standard Private Private Specifies the Numbering Plan ID applied to the Unknown ISDN Incoming calls via ISDN Telephony National Standard Private Type of Number for Incoming Public Specifies the Type of Number applied to the Unknown Incoming calls via ISDN International National Network Subscriber Private Specifies the Type of Number applied to the Incoming calls via ISDN Unknown International National Network Subscriber 4 Default Extn X QSIG Maste QSIG Slave X Not possible Value Range and Default of Trunk Attribute in Port Type Port type Public Private r X XX Default Default Feature Guide 303 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Supplementary Service CLIP Assigns Calling Line Identification Presentation Yes No CLIP COLP Assigns Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP
183. able items refer to the following Programmable Items Number in the Item Description Pattern 1 Date Shows the date of the call 2 Time Shows the end time of a call as Hour Minute AM or PM 3 Ext Shows the extension number floating extension number Extension which was engaged in the call Also shows the following codes Dxxx Outgoing trunk call from a doorphone xxx doorphone number Txxx Outgoing trunk call by TIE line service xxx trunk group number xxx Verified call xxx verified code 4 CO Trunk Shows the trunk number used for the call For patterns A and B 00 will be shown for trunk numbers over hundred 5 Dial Number Trunk Call Outgoing Trunk Call Shows the dialled telephone number Valid digits are as follows 0 through 9 P Pause F Flash recall EFA signal A Host PBX Access code dot Secret dialling X Privacy dial Incoming Trunk Call Shows lt l gt the caller s identification name number It is also possible to show the DDI DID MSN call information In this case D DDI DID MSN name number is added before lt gt Outgoing Intercom Call Shows the dialled extension number followed by EXT Log in Log out Shows the log in or log out status 6 Ring Shows the ring duration before answering a call in Minutes Seconds 7 Duration Shows the duration of the call in Hours Minutes Seconds 8 Acc Code Shows the account code a
184. age Waiting while hearing a ringback tone busy tone or DND tone Messages are always left on the original extension Messages cannot be sent to their FWD or intercept destination Both the message sending extension and receiving extension can cancel a left message If the message receiving extension calls the sending extension and is answered the message will be cleared automatically However if the message has been left on the VPS it depends on the VPS 1 16 2 Absent Message Description 1 16 Message Features The extension users can set the message e g the reason for absence where he is on his telephone When display PT user calls the extension the message is shown on the caller s telephone The following messages can be programmed as desired Type m Message Example Description System 1 Will Return Soon Messages may be edited message through system programming Lnd irc Absent Message They are 3 At Extn Extension used for every extension user Number commonly 4 Back at Hour Minute 5 Out until Month Day 6 In a Meeting 7 8 Personal 9 A message is programmable at message each extension through personal programming Personal Absent Message which can only be used by that extension user Note The 96 means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an individual extension Up to seven s be stored for each m
185. ager No NEXT CANCEL Music Source Selection for Port 2 710 9 P AUTO ANS gt Internal2 Music Source Selection for Call Hold 711 gt gt Music SourceNo O gt ED END Beep Music1 8 ENTER Music 2 ENTER Music Source Selection for Transfer 712 QJ gt SF gt gt Hold Musi END ENTER ENTER Doorphone Call Destination 720 gt SB gt gt Destination gt Ga 5 digi END ENTER 01 4 16 1 5 digits ENTER Door Number Reference 729 gt gt Siti Pot END ENTER 101 111 Reference only Feature Guide 421 3 3 PT Programming Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension Number 730 gt lt gt Message No gt Ext No gt 9 gt 5 diai END ENTER 01 64 1 5 digits Outgoing Message OGM Name 731 gt gt Message gt Name gt gt ENTER 01 64 Max 20 characters ES END DISA Security Mode 732 gt SF None END ENTER Trunk All ENTER 422 Feature Guide SMDR amp Maintenance Programming New Line 800 gt ENTER Baud Rate 800 gt ENTER Data Bits 800 gt ENTER Parity 800 gt ENTER Stop Bits 800 gt ENTER SMDR Port 801 gt Q ENTER gt gt m gt AUTO ANS CR LF CR
186. ailbox of the VPS Max 16 digits including and Incoming Call Log for Specifies the maximum number of the 0 100 the Incoming Call incoming calls to be recorded in the Distribution Group incoming call log Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Member Parameter Description Value Range Group Member Specifies the Group member number Max 32 members Extension Number Specifies the extension number Extension Number Extension Name Refers to the name Display only Delayed Ringing Specifies the number of rings the system is to wait to ring first one extension or group of extensions short time later if the first is unanswered Immediate 1 2 3 4 5 6 No Ring Wrap up Time Specifies the wrap up time 10 x n 0 300 s Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Queuing Time Table Parameter Description Value Range Queuing Time Table 1 64 Incoming Call Distribution Group Sequence 1 16 Specifies the sequence of events during queuing None Intercept Disconnect Sequence 1 16 Outgoing Message OGM 1 64 Wait 5 x n 1 16 s Group Idle Extension Hunting Parameter Description Value Range Idle Extension Hunting 1 64 Idle Extension Hunting Type Selects the Idle Extension Hunting type Circular Terminate Overflow Destin
187. aiting Calls Now 00006 The number of queuing calls Max Waiting Time 05 10 The longest queuing time EXIT LOG SPRVS Since 29 JAN 09 10AM Monitoring starting date and time Total Calls 00996 Total number of incoming calls gt Overflow Calls 00131 Total number of overflowed calls Lost Calls 00039 The number of lost calls Average Waiting 02 12 Average queuing time EXIT CLEAR y lt Log in Log out Monitor Remote Control Mode with DSS Button light gt 31 Jan 08 13AM FRI 250 Sales Section Waiting Calls Now Max Waiting Time EXIT 00006 a 05 10 With am qa J c ag a Log in Log out Monitor DSS buttons of the incoming call distribution group members show their status the status as follows Log in Log out Remote Control y Pressing the button changes Red on Log out Lighting pattern Status Status Light pattern Green on Log in Ready I Log out Red on Slow Green Flashing Log in Not Ready Wrap up Log in Ready Green on Off Extension in another incoming call distribution group Feature Guide 53 1 2 Receiving Group Features 54 Conditions Feature Guide Available Extension as a Supervisor Extension a One supervisor extension can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group but it need not be
188. al 88 LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time Incoming 406 LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time Outgoing 406 LCOT Dialling Mode 405 LCOT Disconnect Time 407 LCOT DTMF Duration 406 LCOT Flash Time 407 LCOT Pause Time 406 LCOT Pulse Speed 406 LCOT Reverse Circuit 406 LED Indication 158 Line 359 Line Preference Override 67 Line Preference Incoming 62 Line Preference Outgoing 67 Line Doorphone 369 Line DSS Console DSS Key 368 Line DSS Console Setting 368 Line Extension Digital Wireless Extension 359 Line Extension Digital Wireless Extension CO Button 364 Line Extension Digital Wireless Extension Personal Speed Dialling 364 Line Extension Digital Wireless Extension PF Button 367 Line Extension Digital Wireless Extension Setting 359 Line External Pager 369 Line Outgoing Message OGM 370 Line Trunk Line 359 Line DSS Console 368 Live Call Screening LCS 193 Live Call Screening Password Control 194 Local Access Priority 350 Local Alarm Information 270 Log in Log out 51 Log in Log out Monitor 52 53 431 Index Log in Log out Monitor and Remote Control 53 M Main Processor Software Reference 399 Maintenance 385 Maintenance Daily Test Setting 387 Maintenance Error Alarm Information 388 Maintenance External Modem Control 387 Maintenance Power Failure Transfer Control 387 Maintenance PT Programming by User 386 Maintenance Remote 386 Maintenance RS 232C Port 387
189. al Destination The Available Intercept Destination Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Type 1 Extension T 1 OPX Digital Wireless Extension DWX Type 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group works Overflow Feature in Section 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY The overflow destination is assigned on the incoming call distribution group which the original destination joins Overflow Destination on Time Out DWX Ring Group Type 2 VM Group DTMF DPT Type 2 External Pager TAFAS Type 2 DISA Type 2 Analogue ISDN Remote Type 2 Maintenance Idle Trunk Access Phone no Not available Trunk Group Access no Phone no Not available Other PBX Extension TIE with no Type 2 PBX Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Not available Code Feature Guide 27 1 1 Incoming Call Features 28 This is applied only when the call does not reach the DISA line e g busy in other words when it does not reach the destination e g extension by using the DISA feature Once the call reaches the destination by using the DISA feature the Intercept Routing feature of the destination works Each of them can have different intercept destinations for each time mode day lunch break night Available Intercept Destination Intercept Destination Availability Wired Extension PT
190. all Park 122 Description Ane xtension user can place a held call into a common parking area of the PBX This releases the user from the parked call to perform other operations The parked call can be retrieved by any extension user Conditions Feature Guide Automatic Call Park It is possible to select an idle parking area automatically Retry If the specified parking area is occupied or there is no vacant area for Automatic Call Park the originator will hear busy tone Retrying is possible while hearing busy tone by selecting parking area or a vacant area Call Park Recall If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period Call Park Recall will be heard at the extension assigned as the Transfer Recall destination If the extension is engaged in a call the hold alarm will be heard If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period Default 30 minutes itis automatically disconnected Call Park Button Pressing the Call Park button parks or retrieves a call in a preset parking area A flexible button can be customised as the Call Park button It shows the current status of the preset parking area as follows Light pattern Status Slow red flashing Parked in the preset parking area Off No parked call Call Park Retrieve Deny If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis Internal Call Block in Section 1 1 2 Internal Call Features
191. all is made Is the ARS mode 1 enabled No Normal Trunk Access Sends the telephone number to the user selected carrier Is the dialled number found in the Yes Leading Digit Exception Table s the dialled number found in the Leading Digit Table 3 Checks the Routing Plan Table to determine which carrier to use No Is the carrier found in the appropriate time zone Is there an available trunk group Q Because all Yes trunk are busy Yes default Modifies the dialled number by deleting the digits 9 and following the modify commands Is normal Trunk Access allowed v Sends the telephone number by the Idle Trunk Sends reorder tone Sends ES the modified id busy tone to the trunk Access 102 Feature Guide 1 8 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features Programming Procedures 1 ARS Mode Assignment ARS Mode If Automatic access is selected ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any of the Idle Trunk Access methods If Any method is selected ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Trunk Access method Leading Digit Exception Table 2 Assignment Store the telephone numbers that will avoid using the ARS feature 2 ARS Leading Digit Exception Table Loc
192. ammed destination Multiple Directs a call with an MSN from an ISDN line to Multiple Subscriber a preprogrammed destination Subscriber Number MSN Number MSN Ringing Service Ringing Service Destination Change with the Caller s Identification Number The Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution feature works in conjunction with the DIL DID DDI MSN features Feature Description Details in Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution Directs a call to a CLI destination if the caller s identification number has been assigned to the Caller ID Table Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution Available Distribution Feature for Each Optional Trunk Card Type Feature DIL DID DDI MSN Type Channel Typ LCOT x x x L CO x x x 1 G CO x x x DID O e x x TIE E amp M e O x x DR2 x x E1 E amp M C x E amp M P O x x amp x x x E amp M P e x x x BRI CO O x e PRI CO O x e x Note Enable default Enable x Disable Feature Guide 15 1 1 Incoming Call Features 16 5 Available Destination 6 Destination Availability Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Digital Wireless Extension DWX Incoming Call Distribution Group DWX Ring Group VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS
193. amming 386 Parameter Description Value Range Privacy Mode Specifies the printing type of dialled Dialled Number number Print X Display Language Specifies the language shown on SMDR English 4 Other Preinstalled Languages Date Format Selects the date format in SMDR Month Day Year Day Month Year Year Month Day Year Day Month Character Code Selects the character code IBM ASCII ISO 8859 1 Maintenance Remote Parameter Description Value Range Analogue Remote Modem Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number Extension Number Name Specifies the name Max 20 characters ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number Extension Number Operation user to programme Name Specifies the name Max 20 characters Remote Programming Assigns the remote programming Enable Disable Assignment Remote Password Specifies the number of time you are None 1 15 Lock Times allowed to enter the wrong remote password Maintenance PT Programming by User Parameter Description Value Range User Programming List 000 999 Programming number Refers to the programming number Display only Programming Name Refers to the programming name Display only User Operation Assigns whether to allow the user to Enable Disable programme
194. and have your extension settings available to you Settings such as extension number one touch dialling memory and COS are all available to you at the new location Example This feature is useful when e Moving location e There is no specific desk for your use This feature is also known as Walking Station Conditions e This feature is available by switching the telephone between PT and PT SLT SLT PT and SLT Moving across the tenants is also possible e incoming calls to your extension will also reach you at your new location e A personal password is required to use this feature Feature Guide 211 1 24 Extension Conirolling Features 1 24 4 Timed Reminder Description Each extension user can set an alarm for any time as a wake up call or reminder This feature can be programmed to activate only once or daily If the user goes off hook during the alarm he hears special dial tone If a voice message is used he hears a prerecorded voice message Conditions e Be sure that the PBX clock works e Setting a new time clears the previous time e Programmable Time The Alarm Ringing Duration time the number of alarm repeat times and intervals are programmable through system programming e To use the voice message feature The MSG Card is required and the message must be recorded An extension assigned as the manager can record messages 1 14 5 Outgoing Message OGM The different message can be as
195. and or external music source e Itis also possible to choose a different music source for each tenant 124 Feature Guide 1 12 Conference Features 1 12 Conference Features 1 12 1 Conference Features SUMMARY Description A conference call allows a conversation between three or more parties simultaneously The following features are available to establish a conference call Feature Description Details in Conference During a two party conversation an extension user can 1 12 2 add other parties to establish a conference call with up Conference to eight parties Executive Busy An extension user can interrupt an existing call to 1 5 5 Override establish a three party conference call Executive Busy Override Privacy Release During a conversation with an outside party on the S CO e 1 12 3 button a PT user can allow another extension to join the Privacy conversation Release Conditions e PBX supports 30 simultaneous calls which are engaged in conference calls e g 10 three party conferences 3 eight party conferences 2 three party conferences Feature Guide 125 1 12 Conference Features 1 12 2 Conference Description This PBX supports three through eight party conference calls During a two party conversation an extension user can add other parties to their conversation thereby establishing a conference More than four party conferences are only possible when a PT
196. annot retrieve the held call which the extensions made SLT Hold Mode It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT in the following methods 1 11 Holding Features Hold Transfer to Trunk Transfer to Extension Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Mode 1 Going on hook Trunk Access No Extension No Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch ipla Hold Feature No Trunk Access No Extension No Default Going on hook Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Mode 3 Hold Feature No Hold Feature No Extension No Going on hook Trunk Access No Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Mode 4 Hold Feature No Hold Feature No Hold Feature No Going on hook Trunk Access No Extension No If the following occur frequently with an SLT choose Mode 2 Mode 3 or Mode 4 a Nobody answers when a call is received b Busy tone is heard even though nobody is using the trunk If a call is not terminated after going on hook the above cases occur To avoid these problems choose Mode 2 Mode 3 or Mode 4 Every call will be terminated unless the Hold feature number is entered after flashing the hookswitch in Mode 2 Mode 3 and Mode 4 Feature Guide 121 1 11 Holding Features 1 11 2 C
197. ard ETS specifications ETS 300 359 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS supplementary service Conditions e This feature is available under the following conditions The callers PBX is capable of using and the service is provided by the network b The called party s PBX is capable of accepting CCBS e To receive and send CCBS receiving and sending CCBS must be enabled individually on an ISDN port basis through system programming e Anextension user can set only one CCBS at a time e CBS setting is cancelled if there is no callback ringing within 60 minutes or callback ringing is not answered within 10 seconds e CCBS Signal Waiting Time The time allowed for sending a CCBS signal while hearing busy tone is programmable Feature Guide 175 1 18 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features ISDN Extension Description An ISDN BRI PRI port can be used for either trunk or extension connection When extension connection is enabled ISDN terminal devices e g ISDN telephone G4 facsimile personal computer or a behind PBX can be connected to the port If the ISDN port is in point to point P P configuration one terminal device can be connected to the port If the ISDN port is in point to multipoint P MP configuration a maximum of eight terminal devices can be connected to the port However only a maximum of two devices can be used simultaneously Individual terminal devices
198. arge Management An extension assigned as the manager can use the following call charge management features in Manager Programming mode a Call Charge Fee Reference and Clear for Each Extension Verified Code b Call Charge Fee Reference for Each Trunk c Call Charge Rate Set for Each Trunk Group d All Clear e Call Charge Fee Print Out f Budget Management for Each Extension Verified Code Examples of Call Charge Fee Reference Charge Meter Print Out Total amp AI CO Total Charge 00175 95 CO Line 001 00194 00 002 00073 00 003 00161 00 004 00033 00 Charge Meter Print Out All Extensions Extension amp Verified Code 775 00194 00 102 00073 00 776 00161 00 lt Verified Code 104 00194 00 105 00073 00 106 00161 00 107 lt 00033 00 Note XXX Call Charge Fee Reference for a verified code XXX verified code Conditions General Call Charge Fee Reference by Charge Reference Button A display telephone user can check the total call charge for his own extension using the Charge Reference button A flexible button can be customised as the Charge Reference button It is possible to select whether to disconnect the line after an alarm tone or only to send an alarm tone when the amount of the call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit Feature Guide 207 1 23 Administrative Information Output Features during a conversation However even if disconnecting the line
199. ase referto the next protocol Protocol Timer Protocol Timer Parameter Description Value Range ISDN line QSIG Master QSIG Slave T200 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the L2 command to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T202 Specifies the maximum waiting time after resending the TEI request to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T203 Specifies the maximum time to detect no communication status of L2 0 600 s T301 Specifies the maximum waiting time after making a call to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it 0 18000 s T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call Applies to the overlap dialling 0 600 s T303 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Setup message to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call Applies to the overlap dialling 0 3000 s T305 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the DISC message to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it 0 3000 s 288 Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range ISDN line T308 QSIG Master Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Release message to the ISDN before expectin
200. ation Specifies the destination extension when all extensions in the Extension Group are unavailable Max 32 digits including X and PF Member 1 16 Specifies the member of the hunting Extension Number Group VM DPT Group Group VM Group Common Parameter Description Value Range VPS Queuing Mode Assigns the queuing operation when VPS Enable Disable ports are busy Notification Mailbox Assigns to send a transfer notification when Enable Disable VPS receives a call by Intercept Routing Recall Notification Assigns to send recall notification Enable Disable Group VM DPT Group Group Information Parameter Description Value Range Voice Mail VM Group 1 2 Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number Extension Number Group Name Specifies the group name Max 20 characters Feature Guide 355 3 2 PC Programming 356 Group VM DPT Group VPS Trunk Group No for Recall Parameter Description Value Range VPS Trunk Group 1 48 VPS Trunk Group No Specifies the trunk group number when a 1 48 for Recall call returns to the VPS by Recall Group VM DTMF Group Group VM DTMF Group Common Parameter Description Value Range Voice Mail VM DTMF Status Ringback Tone Specifies the code indicating ringback tone Busy Tone Specifies the
201. ation DND Mode Selects the treatment of DISA callers when they dial a extension in DND mode Do Not Disturb DND Tone Intercept Outgoing Message OGM DISA dial Selects what happens when the caller dials Retry DTMF x Cyclic Tone Selects cyclic tone detection Fixed Option Detection Tone On Maximum Time Specifies the tone required for detection 10 x n n211 400 ms Tone Off Maximum Time Specifies the amount of silence following the tone to be recognised 10 x n n211 400 ms Detection Times Specifies the number of cycles required 3 16 System Option Parameter Description Value Range Line Codec Selects the encoding technique A Law u Law Carrier Codec Selects the encoding technique A Law u Law Extension Clear Call Waiting Clears Call Waiting feautre Clear No Clear Extension Clear Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Clears Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND feature Clear No Clear Extension Clear Hot Line Clears Hot Line feature Clear No Clear Automatic Redial for Analogue Trunk Assigns Automatic Redial for Analogue Trunk feature Enable Disable Automatic Redial No Answer Selects if the redial occurs when the called number rings but is not answered Retry Disconnect Call Hold Mode Selects the Call Hold mode Hold Exclusive Hold Feature Guide 347 3 2 P
202. ation Leading Digit No Exception 001 033555 002 06456 gt ARS Exception Number Leading Digit Table 9 Assignment Store the area codes and or telephone numbers as leading digits that will be routed by the ARS feature In this table the Routing Plan refer to 4 Routing Plan Table Assignment is selected for each number The additional number of digits must be assigned only when for example is needed after a dialled number The is added after the assigned number of digits of dialled number excluding a leading digit 3 ARS Leading Digit Table Location Leading Additional Routing Plan No Digits No of Digits Table No 2 0001 039 7 1 0002 03 0 4 0003 0444 5 5 ARS Leading Digits 2 _ ARS Routing Plan Number If a dialled number matches a leading digit the number will be modified according to the corresponding Routing Plan Table and the modified number will be sent to the trunk when the assigned additional number of digits are dialled or the Inter digit time expires If a dialled number matches multiple leading digits entries the leading digit entry with the lowest numbered location will have priority Feature Guide 103 1 8 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features Example Dialled Corresponding Desenption Number Routing Plan Table No P 039 123 4567 1 039 is found in location 0001 and seven digits assigned additional number of digit
203. ay lunch break night gt Queuing Time Table Number Each Queuing Time Table has a specified number of sequences The following procedures are provided to make up a Queuing Time Table Procedure Table Command Description Condition OGM a An outgoing message After the outgoing message 01 64 is sent to the caller Music on Hold will be sent and redirects to the next sequence b x 5 sec Puts the caller in the waiting If an outgoing message OGM has not queue for b 01 16 x 5 seconds been sent to the caller the caller hears a ringback tone If an outgoing message OGM has been sent to the caller the caller hears Music on Hold Seqc Redirects to sequence c 01 16 None Intercept Redirects to overflow destination None Disconnect Disconnects the line None None Redirects to the next sequence assigned on sequence 01 the Time No command Table will not be activated Programming Example of Queuing Time Table Time Sequence Table No Seq 01 Seq 02 Seq 03 Seq 04 Seq 16 01 OGM 01 6x5sec Overflow 02 03 Queuing Time Table The call will be disconnected if the destination is not determined after sequence 16 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features Explanation for Queuing Time Table 01 Conditions Queuing Time Table 01 The call Seq 01 Seq 02 Seq
204. ay only Command Specifies the operating card command INS OUS Trunk Attribute Selects the trunk attribute Public Private Trunk Dialling Mode Selects the trunk dialling mode DTMF Pulse Gain Adjustment Selects the gain level table during a call 1 12 DTMF Duration Selects the duration of the DTMF time 80 160 ms Trunk Pulse Speed Selects the pulse speed 10 20 pps Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Wink Signal Time Out Selects the length of waiting time for the Wink Signal after seizing a trunk Note It is assignable only when Start Signal Type is set to Wink 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8128 ms Start Signal Type Selects the start signal type e Wink The wink signal is transmitted to the telephone company before the incoming calls are received e Immediate No wink signal is transmitted Immediate Wink E amp M TIE Line Type Selects the type of E amp M connection 2 4 wires E amp M Sensitivity Out Selects the voice level for transmission 6 3 0 3 dB Sending Caller ID to Selects whether to send the Caller ID to the Yes No TIE TIE line Receiving Caller ID Selects whether to receive the Caller ID to Yes No from TIE the TIE line E amp M Sensitivity In Selects the voice level for reception 6 3 0 3 dB Ringback Tone Service Assigns the ringback tone service Enable Disable PBX Dial Tone Assigns whethe
205. before pressing the REDIAL button e Itis possible to select the trunk to be used for redialling idle line or the line previously used through system programming Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features Speed Dialling Personal System Description An extension user can make calls using abbreviated dialling for frequently dialled numbers which are stored in the PBX extension data or the PBX system data System Speed Dialling Number Personal Speed Dialling is also known as Station Speed Dialling Conditions General e Any number e g telephone number feature number can be stored in a speed dialling number A name can be assigned to each Personal Speed Dialling number and System Speed Dialling number System Speed Dialling Name e Call Directory Speed Dialling Display PT users can make a call by selecting stored numbers and or names on the display Personal Speed Dialling e Personal Speed Dialling Display Lock An extension user can lock the Personal Speed Dialling number display to prevent other users from viewing the number In this case the Incoming Call Log information display is also locked A Personal Password is required to use this feature e Storing the Predialled Number the Personal Speed Dialling The predialled number can be stored in the Personal Speed Dialling by pressing the AUTO STORE button In this case the extension will enter into the personal programming mode automatica
206. ble to set the Delayed Answer time DISA Delayed Answer Time so that the caller will hear a ringback tone within a preprogrammed time period first before hearing an outgoing message OGM DISA Mute Time It is possible to set the Mute time until the outgoing message OGM plays and the PBX starts to receive the DTMF signalling after the caller reaches the DISA line Trunk to Trunk Call Duration If a call between two outside parties is established the call duration can be restricted by a system timer If the timer expires the line will be disconnected unless the originating caller retries by pressing X or extends the time by sending any DTMF signalling gt 1 9 8 Trunk Call Limitation The caller can prolong the call duration within the preprogrammed time period DISA Extend Time and preprogramming number of times Tone Detection The following three types of tone detection can be enabled for each trunk group to disconnect a trunk to trunk call via DISA Silence Detection DISA Silence Detection Continuous Signal Detection gt DISA Continuous Tone Detection Cyclic Signal Detection DISA Cyclic Tone Detection Call Retry While hearing a ringback reorder or busy tone retrying the call is possible by pressing X During a trunk to trunk conversation the result of pressing is programmable retry mode or DTMF mode DISA Reorder Tone Duration Itis possible to set the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time
207. box number is programmable for each extension number and incoming call distribution group Mailbox Access ID The Inter digit time for the DTMF command is programmable The Pause time for the VPS is programmable Data Line Security is set automatically on the extensions in the VM DTMF group to achieve proper recording 1 21 Voice Mail Features 1 21 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Description A Panasonic VPS that supports DPT Digital Integration e g the KX TVP200 can be connected to this PBX in a tightly integrated fashion DPT Digital Integration features can be used when the VPS is connected through DPT ports of the PBX Feature Explanation 1 Automatic Configuration Quick Setup The PBX informs the VPS of its extension numbers and the floating extension numbers of the incoming call distribution groups so that the VPS can create mailboxes with this data automatically FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS incoming calls are forwarded to the VPS The PBX sends a mailbox number of the forwarding extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS the intercepted trunk calls will be redirected to the VPS If the Intercept to Mailbox setting is enabled through system programming the PBX sends the
208. bscriber Number For BRI only e CLIP COLP number for each extension gt CLIP COLP Number Assignment e CLIP COLP number for each incoming call distribution group Each extension can select either the CLIP COLP number for the ISDN port or the extension to be used The CLIP COLP number for the incoming call distribution group is used when making a call by pressing the G DN button or receiving a call which arrives at the G DN button Calling Connected Line Identification Restriction CLIR COLR It is possible for each extension to restrict to send his telephone number to the network by pressing the CLIR button COLR button or entering the feature number These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 093 Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR supplementary service ETS 300 098 Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR supplementary service Conditions e availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company e CLIP COLP number for the connected ISDN port can be used for the ISDN terminal devices which cannot be assigned their own CLIP COLP number such as a doorphone e COLP CLIR COLR Assignment for Each Port Each service can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN port of the PBX e CLIR Button and COLR Button It is possible to switch between CLIP and CLIR by pressing the CLIR button and COLP and COLR by pressing the
209. can be assigned to each VM DTMF group Example VM Group 1 Floating Extn No 250 Group Name A Company VPS Location No Extension No 01 117 02 118 VM DPT Group Assignment Assign the VM DPT group number and the location number to the desired extension port as its attribute Incoming calls will hunt starting at the lowest location number A floating extension number and a name can be assigned to each VM DPT group All extension ports for one VM DPT group should be connected to only one DHLC Card or only one DLC Card The PBX port which assigned the DPT attribution as 01 in a VM DPT group e g VPSG 02 01 must be connected to VPS port 01 The digital integration is performed between these ports Example Extn Port No Attribute VM Group 1 10101 VPSG1 01 Floating Extn No 2 100 10102 Normal Group Name B Company VPS 10103 VPSG1 02 gt Location No Extn Port No 10104 VPSG2 01 01 10101 10105 DSS Console 02 10103 VPS DSS Console PC Console Assignment VM Group Floating Extension Number Incoming Calls to VM Group When incoming calls are received at the floating extension number of the VM group calls will hunt starting at the lowest location number In this case the FWD and DND settings for each extension port are disregarded It is programmable whether the calls queue when all extension ports in
210. can wait in a queue Each incoming call distribution group and member extensions can be programmed as desired to handle incoming calls Calls to the group can be monitored by an extension assigned as a supervisor supervisor extension Programming Item Example for Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 with Diagramme A through F in the table are described in the following diagramme A B D E F Group Floating Group Distribution Answering Queuing Hurry up Overflow Overflow Destination Tenant No No Method Agent Level Time Day Night No gt i 290 Sales Ring 3 3 3 60 100 100 1 2 291 Engineering UCD Max 8 8 90 200 200 5 Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number 2 s Incoming Call Distribution Group Name s Incoming Call Distribution Group Type Maximum Number of Agents gt Queuing Call Limit gt Queuing Hurry up Level 7 gt Overflow Time Assignment gt Overflow Destination on Time Out Overflow Destination by Busy Tenant number is required to determine the time mode day lunch break night and the music source for Music on Hold for each group Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features Calls arriving at incoming call distribution group 1 De Overflow Feature 55 a Sends busy tone Bu
211. ccess number of PBX 1 8 trunk group number 02 TRG2 PBX code 952 Idle Trunk Access ARS number of PBX 2 9 and telephone number 01 23 4567 2 The call is connected to the outside party 01 23 4567 through PBX 2 which has PBX code 952 Feature Guide 225 1 26 Networking Features b Trunk Call through Other PBXs by the ARS feature Example lt Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code gt Telephone Company TIE Line Network PBX 1 9 01 23 4567 m 4 ja j 2 Outside Party Extn 1011 Extn 2011 01 23 4567 Dials 9 01 23 4567 Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the Idle Trunk Access ARS number of PBX 1 9 and telephone number 01 23 4567 2 PBX 1 modifies the call adds the Idle Trunk Access ARS number of PBX 2 9 and sends the call to PBX 2 through the TIE line trunk group TRG 2 according to the ARS programming of PBX 1 3 PBX 2 sends the call to the outside party 01 23 4567 226 Feature Guide 1 26 Networking Features lt PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code gt Telephone Company TIE Line Network PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 952 9 01 23 4567 7 Amo momo momo momo m momo mo momo moo momo mo Interface TRG 2 gt mimm _ Outside Party Extn 1011 Extn 1011 01 23 4567 Dials 9 01 23 4567 Explana
212. d BGM Number Cyclic Tone Programming Example Tenant No Operator ARS Mode Music Source 1 Extn 101 Local Access System 2 None System Cyclic Tone 3 Floating extn no 200 Off BGM1 Feature Guide 247 2 2 System Configuration Software 3 Resource Use 3 1 Resources which can be divided Each of the following resources can be enabled or disabled for each tenant If enabled the resource can be used by extensions within the tenant a Outgoing Message OGM b External Pager for TAFAS Programming Example Resource Tenant 1 Tenant 2 OGM 1 Enable Enable OGM 2 Disable Enable 3 2 Doorphone Door Opener Each doorphone port can be assigned to one tenant Calling a doorphone and opening the door can be performed only by the extensions in the assigned tenant A call from a doorphone can be received by the extensions regardless of tenancy Programming Example Resource Tenant No Doorphone 1 3 Doorphone 2 2 4 System Memory Division for the System Speed Dialling Location numbers for the System Speed Dialling can be divided for each tenant Programming Example of System Memory Division Data Location No Tenant 1 Tenant 2 Tenant 3 System From 000 101 401 Speed Dialling To 100 500 999 248 Feature Guide Conditions 2 2 System Configuration Software System Memory Division Example nt
213. d after the External Feature Access signal during a trunk call e Host PBX Access Code Special Carrier Access Code TRS Barring checks for numbers dialled with a Host PBX Access code or a Special Carrier Access code in the following cases Stored Type Not stored Found Not found Host PBX Deletes the code The call is made TRS Barring checks Access Code TRS Barring check is excepted from TRS the whole number carried out on the Barring following digits Special Carrier Deletes the code TRS Barring checks TRS Barring checks Access Code TRS Barring check is the whole number the whole number carried out on the following digits e ARS If ARS is applied to a dialled number TRS Barring will check the user dialled number not the modified number by ARS In this case a Host PBX Access code and or a Special Carrier Access code will not be checked e Dialled Digit Restriction During Conversation Dialled digits can be restricted while engaged on a received trunk call If the dialled digits exceed the preprogrammed limitation the line will be disconnected e ATRS Barring level be changed by some features The priority of features when multiple features are used is as follows 1 Dial Tone Transfer 2 Budget Management 3 TRS Barring Override for System Speed Dialling 4 Remote COS Access Verified Code Entry 5 Extension Lock Feature Guide 95 1 7 Toll Restriction TRS Ca
214. d an intercom call and multiple trunk calls simultaneously An SLT user can hold either an intercom call or a trunk call To hold multiple intercom calls on a PT simultaneously use the Call Park feature Call Park feature can also be used to hold multiple intercom calls and or trunk calls simultaneously on an SLT It is possible to put a call on hold while dialling a trunk call or hearing a ringback tone Music on Hold Music if available is sent to the held party Hold Recall If a call on hold is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period Hold Recall Time Hold Recall is heard at the extension which put the call on hold If the extension is engaged in a call the hold alarm will be heard If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period the call is automatically disconnected This timer starts when Hold Recall activates Automatic Call Hold A PT user can programme holding of the a current call when pressing another CO G DN INTERCOM button If this feature is not enabled the current call will be disconnected Example It is possible to receive a call by pressing the flashing G DN button this puts the current intercom call on the INTERCOM button on hold To return to the held call press the INTERCOM button Call Hold Retrieve Deny If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis Internal Call Block in Section 1 1 2 Internal Call Features SUMMARY he c
215. de PBX on the network of 0 9 or System Numbering Plan Quick Dialling Parameter Description Value Range Quick Dialling 1 80 Quick Dialling Access Specifies the feature number for Quick 1 4 digits consisting of Executive Busy Override Assigns the feature number for Executive Busy Override Alternate Calling Ring Voice Assigns the feature number for Alternate Calling Ring Voice Message Waiting Set Sets the number to control the message waiting lamp Call Monitor Specifies the call monitor feature number Automatic Callback Busy CCBS Specifies the Automatic Callback Busy Camp On activation code Conference Sets up the conference call dialling features 0 9 X or amp Default Blank Quick Dialling Number Specifies the number to dial Max 32 digits System Numbering Plan One Digit Parameter Description Value Range Call Waiting OHCA Assigns the feature number for Call One digit consisting of Whisper OHCA Do Not Waiting OHCA Whisper OHCA Do Not 0 9 or Disturb DND Disturb DND Override Override Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming System Class of Service System Class of Service Basic Parameter Description Value Range Class of Service 1 64 TRS Barring TRS Barring Level Day In Day mode 1 7 Lunch In Lunch mode Break In Break mode Night In Night mode
216. e 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Charge Margin Specifies a margin to be applied to the 0 99 99 telephone charges when printed on the Check out sheet Tax rate Tax 1 Specifies a tax rate which applies to 0 99 99 telephone charges Tax 2 Specifies a tax rate which applies to minibar 0 99 99 charges Tax 3 Specifies a tax rate which applies to other 0 99 99 charges Decimal Point Specifies the decimal point position This 0 7 programme is available in rate and charge settings Currency Specifies the currency Max 3 characters Currency Display Selects the currency display position Before After Position Budget Management Selects how the extension is treated when Alarm Over the extension exceeds the limit Alarm Disconnect Charge Counting on Assigns whether to start counting the Enable Disable Answer Detection charge when detecting an answer Feature Guide 373 3 2 PC Programming 374 Feature Hotel Parameter Description Value Range Hotel Operator Operator 1 Specifies the operator 1 Extension Number Operator 2 Specifies the operator 2 Extension Number Operator 3 Specifies the operator 3 Extension Number Operator 4 Specifies the operator 4 Extension Number Hotel Telephone Cost Detail Print Assigns if call details are printed with the telephone charges Enable Disable Cleaning
217. e 339 System Class of Service Basic 339 System Class of Service Internal Call Block 341 System Class of Service Trunk Group 341 System Echo Cancel 348 System Numbering Plan 333 System Numbering Plan Extension 333 System Numbering Plan Feature 334 System Numbering Plan One Digit 338 System Numbering Plan Other PBX Access Code 338 System Numbering Plan Quick Dialling 338 System Option 347 System Outgoing Message OGM 347 System PT 342 System PT Common 342 System Ring 343 System Ring Pattern Table 343 System Ring Common 343 System Ring Ring Pattern Table Detail 344 System SLT 341 System System Timer 327 System Time Service 332 System Time Service Holiday 333 System Time Service System 332 System Tone 345 System Tone Common 345 System Tone Tone Pattern Assignment 346 T T1 Line Service 180 T1 Line Service Features 180 Table 371 Tenant 376 Tenant Service 247 Tenant to Tenant Call Block 249 Terminated Hunting 38 Terms used in this Feature Guide 2 TIE Line Service 4 216 TIE Routing Plan Table 380 Time Programming 400 Time Service 250 Time Service Start Time 397 Time Service Switching Mode 397 413 433 Index Timed Reminder 212 Timer 350 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 92 377 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 92 Tone Pattern Assignment 346 Transfer Recall 118 Transfer Recall Time 400 Transferring Features 118 TRS Barring
218. e Enable Disable Identification Restriction feature Wireless XDP Parallel Sets up Wireless XDP Parallel Mode to None Extension Mode work with a wired telephone Number Option 3 PT Preferred Line Selects the line to which the extension is No Line Idle Outgoing connected automatically when making a INTERCOM Flexible call key 1 36 Preferred Line Incoming Selects which line the extension is connected automatically when answering a call No Line Ringing Line Flexible key1 36 On hook Dial Mode Selects the operation when dialling in on hook status This program is not intended for DWX Predial Hot Key Dial Intercom Alerting Selects the intercom alerting mode This program is not intended for DWX Tone Call Voice Call Voice Call Deny Call Waiting Tone Type Selects the type of Call Waiting tone for PT extensions Call Waiting Tone Ringing tone Live Call Screening Recording Mode Selects whether to close the mailbox or keep recording the conversation after a call is interrupted Stop Recording Keep Recording Live Call Screening Answer Mode Selects whether the voice message being recorded is monitored automatically through the built in speaker Hands free mode or an alarm tone is sent Private mode while an incoming caller is leaving a message in the mailbox of the extension This program is not intended for DWX Hands free Private
219. e destination Destination Availability Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Digital Wireless Extension DWX Incoming Call Distribution Group DWX Ring Group VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA AIA A A OO 1 10 Transferring Features Destination Availability Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance x Idle Trunk Access no Phone no x Trunk Group Access no Phone no x Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code x Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code x One touch Transfer The DSS Console and the PT user can hold a call and quickly transfer it to an extension by pressing the DSS button directly A One touch Dialling button can also be used if the TRANSFER command is stored with a number Feature Guide 119 1 11 Holding Features 1 11 Holding Features 1 11 1 Call Hold Description An extension user can put a call on hold The following features are available depending on the result Feature Description Call Hold General Any extension can retrieve a held call Exclusive Call Hold Only the extension user who held the call can retrieve it The result of the holding operation can be determined through system programming Pressing the HOLD button again just after the first time alternates the mode between General and Exclusive Call Hold Conditions 120 Feature Guide A PT user can hol
220. e for each 10 digits tenant Trunk Group 1 64 Specifies the authorisation code each trunk Max 10 digits group Modified Command Specifies the modified command Max 16 digits including 0 9 S Z gg ARS Exception Code Parameter Description Value Range ARS Exception Code 1 200 Code Number Specifies the number Max 16 digits Feature Guide 379 3 2 PC Programming 3 2 8 Private Network 380 Private Network Common Parameter Description Value Range PBX Code Specifies the identity of PBX Max 7 digits Private Network TIE Routing Plan Table Parameter Description Value Range TIE Routing Plan Table 1 32 Leading Digits Specifies the leading one two or three digits of the number for TIE calls Used to determine the trunk group for routing a TIE call Max 3 digits consisting of 0 9 or X Wild card Priority 1 8 Call making a TIE call Digits to delete Specifies the number of digits to be deleted 0 15 from the dialled digits Additional Digits Specifies the digits to be added to the Max 32 digits dialled number Trunk Group for TIE Specifies the trunk group to be used when None 1 64 Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming 3 2 9 Incoming Call Incoming Call DIL DDI DID TIE Param
221. ected Call Pickup Specifies the feature number for picking up the directed call TAFAS Calls through an External Pager Specifies the feature number for TAFAS Calls through an External Pager Group Paging Answer Specifies the feature number for answering Group Paging Automatic Callback Busy cancel CCBS cancel Specifies the feature number for cancelling Automatic Callback Busy CCBS User Remote Operation Remote COS Access Verified Code Entry Specifies the feature number for Remote Operation User Remote COS Access Verified Code Entry Wireless XDP Parallel Mode set cancel Specifies the feature number to set cancel Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Account Code Entry Specifies the feature number for Account Code Entry Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve Specifies the feature number for Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve Call Hold Retrieve Intercom Calls Specifies the feature number for Call Hold Retrieve Intercom Calls Call Park Call Park Retrieve Specifies the feature number for Call Park Call Park Retrieve Call Hold Retrieve Trunk Calls Specifies the feature number for Call Hold Retrieve Trunk Calls Door Open Specifies the feature number for opening the door External Feature Specifies the feature number for External Access Feature Access ISDN Hold Specifies the feature number for holding an ISDN call COLR Specifies t
222. ed The timer is applied for a trunk call which is made via the PBX If both call is made by the extension e g a trunk call made by an extension is transferred to an outside party the shorter limit will apply to the call Budget Management If the preprogrammed call charge limit is reached an extension user cannot make further trunk calls Whether the line is disconnected after an alarm tone is programmable Dialling Digit Restriction during Conversation While engaged on a received trunk call the dialling of digits can be restricted If the number of dialled digits exceeds the limitation the line will be disconnected Conditions e During an Unattended Conference Call both the Unattended Conference Recall time and the Extension to Trunk Call Duration time are applied 114 Feature Guide 1 9 Conversation Features 1 9 9 Parallelled Telephone Description Two telephones can be connected in parallel to one port in the following combinations Main Telephone Sub Telephone APT or DPT SLT APT DPT or SLT DWX e g KX TD7XXX series When parallel mode is used the two telephones work as follows e Both share one extension number main telephone s extension number Either telephone can make or answer a call e Transfers calls If one goes off hook while the other is on a call the call is switched to the former Conditions General e SLT Ring Assignment If an SLT is
223. ed automatically Idle Line When an extension user goes off hook an idle trunk is selected automatically from the assigned trunk groups No Line When an extension user goes off hook no line is selected He must select the desired line to make a call Prime Line When an extension user goes off hook the preset line is selected automatically A prime line can be selected from the Line Access buttons S CO G CO L CO G DN Conditions e Line Preference Override A user can override the preset Line Preference temporarily by pressing the desired Line Access button or Memory Dialling button e g One touch Dialling before going off hook e select Idle Line Preference the trunk groups available to the extension should be programmed on a COS basis Outgoing Trunk Group Number Also trunk groups available for Idle Trunk Access should be assigned Automatic Trunk Group Access Assignment Feature Guide 67 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 Automatic Callback Busy Camp On Description If the line is busy when a call is made callback ringing will inform the caller when the line becomes free using this feature After the extension answers the callback ringing the dialled number is automatically redialled Conditions e Ifthe callback ringing is not answered within a preprogrammed time period the callback is cancelled e Ifthe extension hears busy tone before dialling the telephone number only the trunk or
224. ed for 7 digits including 0 9 en bloc dialling Dial Digits Specifies the recognised dialled digits 0 30 Feature Guide TRS Barring Denied Code 3 2 PC Programming 3 2 6 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Parameter Description Value Range TRS Barring Level Selects a TRS Barring level 2 6 Deny Code 1 100 Specifies the TRS Barring deny codes Max 7 digits TRS Barring Exception Code Parameter Description Value Range TRS Barring Level Selects a TRS Barring level 2 6 Exception Code Specifies the TRS Barring exception Max 16 digits 1 100 codes TRS Barring Special Carrier Access Exception Code Parameter Description Value Range Special Carrier Access Code 1 20 Exception Code Specifies the exception code of the carrier Max 16 digits access code TRS Barring Option Parameter Description Value Range TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling Assigns whether to override TRS Barring by System Speed Dialling Enable Disables Check X and data Selects whether the system checks for X and as a part of the TRS Barring procedure No Check Check Trunk Seizure after TRS Barring Time Out Selects the status of the Trunk when the TRS Barring check times out Keep Disconnect TRS Barring Dial Digits Incoming Call Specifies the maximum number of dialled digits allowed while rec
225. ed to monitor the party s voice in hands free mode MESSAGE m Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party who left the message waiting indication REDIAL Used to redial the last dialled number TRANSFER Aa Used to transfer a call to another party Flexible CO Trunk Used to make or receive a trunk call or can be reassigned to a different trunk or to another feature button Feature Guide 1 17 Proprietary Telephone PT Features Button Usage INTERCOM INT Used to make or receive intercom calls AUTO Used to receive an incoming call in hands free mode or G T used for microphone or handset mute during a ANSWER MUTE 2 conversation Dual feature button Used to monitor an intercom call automatically a hands cach 84 free conversation is not possible Also used for handset microphone mute during a conversation AUTO DIAL Used for System Personal Speed Dialling and storing STORE programme changes CONF A Used to establish a multiple party conversation Conference FWD DND s e Used to perform FWD or DND Dual feature button Used to insert a pause in a stored number With an APT it PAUSE is used as the PROGRAM button Soft Used to perform the feature or operation appearing above the button at the bottom line of the display SELECT Used to select the displayed feature or to call the displayed number SHIFT Used
226. eiving incoming calls None 1 7 Dialling Mode Selects the dialling mode during a All Tone Pulse Selection while talking conversation with an outside party Key Pad TRS Barring Check Assigns whether to restrict the call after Enable Disable after EFA utilising EFA External Feature Access Feature Guide 377 3 2 PC Programming 3 2 7 Automatic Route Selection ARS ARS System Parameter Description Value Range ARS Mode Selects whether to use ARS Automatic Off Local Access Route Selection or not All Access No Carrier Access Selects what happens when the system Local Access code Operation does not find the carrier code Disconnect ARS Leading Digit Parameter Description Value Range ARS Leading Digits 1 1000 Leading Digits Specifies the leading digits of the telephone Max 16 digits number which will be routed by the ARS Wild card is not procedure available Additional Dial Digits Specifies any additional digits 0 5 digits Routing Plan Specifies the Routing Plan which is used for 1 16 routing the telephone number registered in leading digit ARS Routing Plan Time Table Parameter Description Value Range Routing Plan Time Table 1 16 Time Table Sun Sat Time A Setting Assigns whether the plan is used a firsttime Enable Disable each day Time A Specifies Time
227. elects the source of music during Transfer Hold Music Ringback System System Timer Parameter Description Value Range Extension Timer Hot Line Start Time Specifies the start time when hot line starts 0 15 s Extn First Digit Time Specifies the maximum time allowed 0 15 s between the start of an extension dial tone and the first digit being dialled on an extension call Extn Inter digit Time Specifies the maximum time allowed 0 15 s between each digit on an extension call Call Duration Start Specifies the duration start time for PT 0 60 s Time display and SMDR Personal Password Specifies the maximum time to prohibit 1 15 s Lock Time password entry following incorrect password entry Automatic Redial Specifies the number of time to repeat 0 15 Repeat Times redials Automatic Redial Interval Specifies the interval between redial attempts 10 x n nz1 120 s Automatic Redial Call Duration Time Specifies the duration of redial calls if unanswered 10 x n nz1 30 s Timed Reminder Alarm Repeat Times Specifies the number of time of Timed Reminder calls 1 15 Timed Reminder Alarm Interval Specifies the interval between Timed Reminder calls 10 x n nz1 120 s Timed Reminder Alarm Ringing Duration Time Specifies the duration of ringing of the Timed Reminder alarm 10 x n 1 30 s Message Waiting Ringing Duration Time Speci
228. elephone display before answering a call ISDN Line Service The PBX can manage calls received from ISDN lines by point to point or point to multipoint configuration TIE Line Service ATIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs which provides cost effective communications between company at different locations E1 Line Service The E1 line is at the bottom of the digital transmission hierarchy The E1 line carries 30 voice channels Voice is digitised by Pulse Code Modulation Feature Guide Table of Contents 1 Call Handling Features eene 13 1 1 Incoming Call FeatUres rentas nnt utat nin n han suat Ian er ku AME nnn 14 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call 5 14 Direct In Line 01 n nnne nnns enne nennen nennen 17 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling Inward DDI 19 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing 2 23 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution seseeseeseseeneenn 25 INterCe pt ROUTING c 27 Intercept Routing No 29 Collect Call Block only for 2 240 22224 0 1 00 0 30 1 1 2 Internal Call Features SUMMARY 32 intemal 33 1 1 3
229. elephone type Display only CO button Specifies the feature assigned Not Stored S CO G CO L CO DSS 1 12 24 36 to a CO button One touch Message FWD DND Both FWD DND External FWD DND Internal Group FWD DND Both Group FWD DND External Group FWD DND Internal Account Conference Voice Mail Transfer Two way Record Two way Transfer LCS LCS Cancel System Alarm G DN Answer Release ISDN Service Access Call Log EmergencyPaging Log in Log out Time Service Terminate EFA Charge Call Park CLIR COLR Hurry up Wrap up Toll Restriction Call Barring ISDN Hold Headset 364 Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Detail Parameter Description Value Range S CO button Trunk Number Specifies the trunk number 1 512 Tone Specifies the tone type 1 48 G CO button Trunk Group Specifies the trunk group number 1 64 Number Tone Specifies the tone type 1 48 L CO button Tone Specifies the tone type 1 48 DSS button Extension Number Specifies the extension number Extension Number One touch Dialling button Dial Specifies the dialled number Max 32 digits Group DN button Extension Number Specifies the incoming call distribution Incoming call group floating number distribution group floating extension number Tone Specifies the tone type 1 48 Message button Extension Number Specifies the extension number None Ex
230. ension if the called extension is not able to answer calls 1 VM Group Type Type Description VM DTMF Group A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF Integration features VM DPT Group A group of DPT ports which use the Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration features A maximum of 12 ports 24 channels of the VPS can form each group One Panasonic KX TVS KX TVP system can be in only one group A maximum of two VPSs can be connected to each PBX One VPS must be in its own VM DTMF group and or VM DPT group Thus each PBX can support a maximum of two VM DTMF groups and two VM DPT groups Example PBX VM DPT Group E m VM DTMF Group Floating extn no 100 1 Floating extn no 250 1 1 101 102 103 104 117 118 119 120 5 DPT DPT 5 5 Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port 1 VPS VPS nmm 182 Feature Guide DPT Digital Integration DTMF Integration 1 21 Voice Mail Features VM DTMF Group Assignment Assign a floating extension number to the desired VM DTMF group Incoming calls will hunt starting at the lowest location number A name
231. ension Group Assignment 414 Extension Intercept Destination 414 Call Forwarding No Answer Time ssssseeseeseeeeeeeeeneeenene nennen nenne nnne 415 CLIP COLP Number Assignment 415 Incoming Call Distribution Group Extension 415 Delayed Fihginig ccr or m deny ree edere a n ed a ea Reed tenis 415 Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number 415 Incoming Call Distribution Group 415 Incoming Call Distribution Group Type ssseeeeeeeenneeennmenenennenen nnne 416 Overflow Destination on Time 416 Overflow Time Assignment ener nennen nnns rennen 416 Feature Guide Overflow Destination by 416 Queuing Call 1 416 Queuing Hurry up Level 417 Queuing Time Table 417 Queuing Time tetti hb ERE er Pe ope ve bed daten 417 Maximum Number of nenne enne ener nene 417 Paging Group for Extension Group 417 Paging Gr
232. ension Outside Party Available Forwarding Type All Calls Busy No Answer Busy No Answer Incoming Call Distribution Group Forwards to zu Another Extension Intercom Calls to Incoming Call Distribution Group Trunk Calls to Incoming Call Distribution Group Forwards to Outside Party Available Forwarding Type All Calls Feature Guide 57 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 58 Available Destination Condition for Original Destination Availability Extension Incoming Call Distribution Group OPX Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 Only available when FWD to extension is allowed through Digital Wireless Extension DWX COS programming Incoming Call Distribution Group DWX Ring Group VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS Only available when access DISA to the resource is allowed through COS programming Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Trunk Access no Phone no Only available when FWD to Trunk Group Access no Phone no trunk is allowed through COS programming Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code O NG Oc Di If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis Internal Call Block in Section 1 1 2 Internal Call
233. er FWD or DISA recording each as incoming call and outgoing call The PBX waits for a preprogrammed time period Call Duration Count Start Time between the end of dialling and start of the SMDR timer for outgoing trunk calls When the PBX has sent out all dialled digits to the telephone company and this timer expires the PBX starts counting the call A display PT shows the elapsed time of the call The starting time and the total duration of the call are recorded on SMDR If the reverse signal detection has been set gt LCOT Reverse Circuit the PBX will start counting the call after detecting the reverse signal from the telephone company regardless of the above timer Serial Interface RS 232C Parameters The following communication parameters can be assigned for the Serial Interface RS 232C port New Line Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits a NewLine Code Select the code for the personal computer or printer If the personal computer or printer automatically feeds lines with carriage return select CR If not select CR LF b Baud Rate A baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the PBX to the personal computer or printer C Word Length A word length code indicates how many bits compose a character d Parity Bit A parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character Make an appropriate selection depending on the requireme
234. er the system or the VM port turns off the Message Waiting lamp after the extension user retrieved a message recorded in his mailbox By PBX By VM Feature Guide 357 3 2 PC Programming 358 Group Group Information Parameter Description Value Range Voice Mail VM Group 1 2 Floating Extension Number Specifies VM Floating extension number Extension Number Group Name Specifies the group name Max 20 characters Type Selects the service type AA VM VM Port 1 12 Specifies the VM port number Extension Number Group DWX Ring Group Parameter Description Value Range DWX Ring Group 1 32 Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number Extension Number Name Specifies the floating extension name Max 20 characters Digital Wireless Extension 1 128 Assigns the digital wireless extension Y Belonging to a Group N Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming 3 2 4 Line Line Trunk Line Parameter Description Value Range Trunk Number 1 128 Physical Location Slot Refers to the slot position Display only PBX No Slot No Port Refers to the port no Display only Channel number Specifies the channel number BRI4 BRI8 0 1 PRI23 0 22 PRI30 0 29 Other cards 0
235. ernational call data and one for long distance call data The PBX checks the local international call data first If a match is not found the long distance call data is applied Example lt Table Selection gt Trunk Modification Group No Table lt Modification Table gt 1 15 Caller ID Features TRG 01 Modification Table 1 TRG 02 Area Code Removed Digits Added No Local International 012 3 Blank Call Data 1 Local International Call Data 2 Local International Call Data 10 Long Distance Call Data 1 Not programmable Feature Guide 145 146 1 15 Caller ID Features lt Modification Flowchart gt A trunk call with a caller s information is received Checks the Table Selection Table 1 Is the area code found in a local international data in the modification table Yes No e g 00987654321 e g 3344556677 Checks the local international call data Checks the long distance call data Matches Data 2 Modifies the number as programmed Removed digits 2 Added number 001 Modifies the number as Received number 00987654321 programmed 9 Removed digits 0 Added number Modified number 00987654321 001987654321 1 Remove the 2 Add 001 first 2 digits Y Modification is completed Modification is completed 0334455667
236. ers one system programmer 15 personal programmers one manager programmer 15 personal programmers or 16 personal programmers System Programming Password Level To access system programming a valid password must be entered There are two types of passwords each of which is factory preprogrammed default and can be changed Type Description Dealer Password All system programming available for PT programming is accessible System Password for Dealer User Password Permitted system programming is accessible System Password for User Each access to system programming can be controlled Personal Programming Data Default Set A user can return all of the items programmed on the telephone to default 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 3 Automatic Setup Description There are two automatic setup features as follows 1 Automatic ISDN Configuration 2 Automatic Time Adjustment 1 Automatic ISDN Configuration The ISDN BRI port configuration can be set automatically BRI Automatic Configuration The following items will be set by making and receiving a call using the subscriber number assigned for each ISDN BRI port a b d L1 Active Mode L2 Data Link Mode Access Mode Point to Point Point to Multipoint TEI Assignment Mode Fix 00 63 Automatic 2 Automatic Time Adjustment It is possible to adjust the PBX clock automatically in the following two ways a b Condition
237. erval 400 Door Open Duration Time 0 000 401 Call Duration Count Start Time 0 0 4 1111 00 000 401 DISA Delayed Answer 0 000100 401 DISA Extend 401 DISA Intercept Time iii cree ante end eire Chu lo e di nda 401 TRS Barring Override by System Speed 0 402 TRS Barring Denied 402 Exception 402 Special Carrier Access 402 Emergency Dialling 402 ARS Mode m 402 ARS Leading Digits 20020 4 403 ARS Routing Plan 14 4 2 2 2 042 00 0 0 001 6 06 403 ARS Exception 403 ARS Routing Plan Time 2 2 240224 10 nennen nennen 403 ARS Routing Plan Table 1 16 2 2 402400 00 403 ARS Cater 403 ARS Outgoing Trunk Group for Carrier
238. ess XDP Parallel Mode set cancel x48 48 54 Account Code Entry x49 49 55 Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve x50 50 56 Call Hold Retrieve Intercom Calls held at X51 51 other extension 57 Call Park Call Park Retrieve 52 52 58 Call Hold Retrieve Trunk Calls held at other 53 53 extension 59 Door Open x55 55 60 61 Reserved 62 External Feature Access x60 60 63 Reserved 64 ISDN Hold 62 62 2 3 System Data Control Location Feature Default 1 Pattern 2 with X without X 65 7 0 7x0 66 CLIR 7 1 7 1 67 CLIP COLP 7 2 7 2 68 7 3 7X3 69 ISDN FWD 7 5 7X5 70 Reserved 71 Message Waiting set cancel callback x70 70 72 FWD DND set cancel Both x710 710 73 FWD DND set cancel External X711 711 74 FWD DND set cancel Internal X712 712 75 FWD DND No Answer Timer set X713 713 76 Group FWD DND set cancel Both X714 714 77 Group FWD DND set cancel External X715 715 78 Group FWD DND set cancel Internal X716 716 79 Call Pickup Deny set cancel 720 720 80 Paging Deny set cancel X721 721 81 Walking Extension 727 727 82 Data Line Security set cancel 730 730 83 Call Waiting for Intercom Calls set cancel 731 731 84 Call Waiting for Trunk Calls including x732 732 doorphone calls calls for an incoming call distribution group set cancel 85 Executive Busy Override Deny set cancel x73
239. essage Conditions e extension user can select only one message at a time The selected message is displayed at the extension while on hook Feature Guide 151 1 17 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 17 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 17 1 Fixed Buttons 152 Description PTs DSS Consoles Add on key modules and DWXs are provided with the following feature Line Access buttons Depending on your device type some buttons may not be provided PT and Add on Key Module Button Usage Navigator Key Used to adjust the ringer speaker handset and headset volume and the display contrast Navigator Key and Jog Dial can also be used to select data from the Call Directory and the System Feature Access Menu on the display Jog Dial Volume Key e ENTER Used to confirm the selected item CANCEL Used to cancel the selected item PROGRAM PROG Used to enter and exit the programming mode Used to disconnect the current call and make another call FLASH without hanging up Disconnect mode or Terminate mode RECALL R or used to send a flash recall signal to the telephone company or host PBX to access their features External Feature Access mode HOLD 4 Used to place a call on hold SP PHONE Used for hands free operation Also used to switch between Speakerphone m handset and hands free operation MONITOR Used for a hands free dialling Also us
240. eter Description Value Range Trunk Port 1 128 Slot Refers to PBX No Slot No Display only Port Refers to the port no Display only Channel number Specifies the channel number BRI4 BRI8 0 1 PRI23 0 22 PRI30 0 29 Other cards 0 Card Type Refers to the card type Display only BRI PRI LCOT T1 E1 E amp M IP GW Port Type Refers to the port type Display only L CO Trunk line Extn QSIG Master QSIG Slave G CO DID E amp M C E amp M P OPX Trunk Attribute Refers to the trunk attribute Public Private VPN Incoming Type Selects how the incoming trunk call is routed to the destination within the system DIL DDI DID MSN TIE Value Range of Incoming Type Card Type Port Type Value Range DI Di Trunkline DIL DID MSN PRI DIL DID IP Gateway DIL DID Feature Guide 381 3 2 PC Programming 382 Parameter Description Value Range CLI Calling Line Identification Ring Destination Day In Day mode Enable Disable Lunch In Lunch mode Break In Break mode Night In Night mode DIL Destination Day In Day mode Extension Number Lunch In Lunch mode Break In Break mode Night In Night mode Tenant Number for DIL Specifies the tenant number for DIL 1 8 VPS Trunk Group Specifies the trunk group number for the 1 48 Number VPS DDI DID T
241. extension s COS Level 7 Level 1 What is the TRS Barring level Levels 2 3 4 5 6 Is the dialled number found in applicable Denied Code Tables Is the dialled number found in applicable Exception Code Tables Y The call is denied The call is made The user hears reorder tone 94 Feature Guide 1 7 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features Conditions WARNING The software contained in the TRS Barring feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service Failure to upgrade the premises PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the customer s employees from gaining access to the network and to these codes KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA e A COS should be assigned for each extension Class of Service e TRS Barring checks are applied to the following ARS Trunk Access Idle Trunk Group Individual e itis programmable whether X or is checked by the TRS Barring This is useful in preventing unauthorised calls which could be possible through certain telephone company exchanges e TRS Barring checks the digits dialled after a flash recall signal during a trunk call It is programmable whether TRS Barring checks the digits dialle
242. f another PBX through the TIE lines a Trunk Call through Other PBXs by Making a TIE Line Call Method Example lt Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code gt Telephone Company TIE Line Network PBX 1 9 01 23 4567 7 4 TIE Line Interface TRG 2 gt mt _ T Outside Party 1011 2011 i 01 23 4567 Dials 802 9 01 23 4567 i Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX 1 8 trunk group number 02 TRG2 Idle Trunk Access ARS number of PBX 2 9 and telephone number 01 23 4567 2 PBX 1 sends the call to PBX 2 through the trunk group TRG 2 TIE line 3 PBX 2 sends the call to the outside party 01 23 4567 224 Feature Guide 1 26 Networking Features lt PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code gt Telephone Company Trunk TIE Line Network PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 952 9 01 23 4567 dl 7 Amo momo momo momo m momo mo momo moo momo mo TIE Line i nterface TRG 2 gt Jat Jl Outside Party Extn 1011 Extn 1011 01 23 4567 Dials 7 952 9 01 23 4567 or 802 952 9 01 23 4567 Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 Idle Trunk Access ARS number of PBX 2 9 and telephone number 01 23 4567 or dials the Trunk Group A
243. fies the codes required to access the VM service Max 16 digits including and Transfer and Recall Destination Specifies the Transfer and Recall destination Extension Number Blank Your own extension number CLIP COLP Number Specifies the CLIP COLP number used for Max 16 digits Assignment the extension Call Waiting for direct Specifies the Call Waiting mode for direct Off Call Waiting extension calls extension calls OHCA Whisper OHCA Call Waiting from Assigns whether Call Waiting from Trunk amp On Off Trunk amp Incoming Incoming group is On or Off group Call Pickup Set Assigns whether Call Pickup is On or Off On Off Hot Line Specifies the telephone number for Hot Max 32 digits including Line and PF Data Mode Assigns whether Data Line Security mode On Off is enabled Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Option 2 Call Pickup Deny Assigns Call Pickup Deny mode set cancel Executive Busy Assigns Executive Busy Override Deny set cancel Override Deny feature Incoming Call Log Lock Assigns whether to lock the incoming call Unlock Lock log Paging Deny Assigns the Paging Deny feature set cancel CLIP COLP Specifies the CLIP COLP number Trunk line Extension CLIR Assigns the CLIR Calling Line Enable Disable Identification Restriction feature COLR Assigns the COLR Connected Lin
244. fies the duration of the message waiting ring for SLTs 10 x n 1 300 s Message Waiting Ringing Interval Specifies the interval between message waiting rings n n21 60 min Feature Guide 327 3 2 PC Programming 328 Parameter Description Value Range Busy Do Not Disturb DND Reorder Tone Duration Time Specifies the duration of Busy Do Not Disturb DND Reorder Tone Continue 0 15 s Reorder Tone Duration Specifies the reorder tone duration PT 1 15s Time PT Handset Handset Mode Mode Reorder Tone Duration Specifies the reorder tone duration PT 1 15s Time PT Hands Free Hands Free Mode Mode PT On hook Display Specifies the length of time to display Idle 1 15 s Time after going on hook DTMF Duration while talking Specifies the duration of the DTMF signal while talking 80 160 240 320 ms DTMF Inter digit Pause Time while talking Specifies the length of time of DTMF Inter digit Pause Time while talking 64 16 x n nz0 15 ms Pause Time while talking Specifies the length of the Pause Time while talking 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 ms Unattended Conference Recall Start Time Specifies the length of recall start time of unattended extension None 1 60 min 1st Unattended Conference Recall Continuation Time Specifies the length of continuing time of the first recall of unattended extension None 1
245. g the reply to it 0 600 s QSIG Slave T309 Specifies the maximum time that the system tries to disconnect the data link before saving the call 0 3000 s T310 Specifies the maximum waiting time after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message before expecting the continuance message 0 3000 s T313 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Connect message before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T316 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Restart message before expecting the reply to it 0 3000 s T318 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Resume message before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T319 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Suspend message before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T322 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Status enquiry message before receiving the reply to it 0 600 s T3D3 Specifies the time that the system tries to establish L2 in Permanent mode 0 3000 s T3D9 Specifies the time that the system tries to disconnect L2 in Call by Call mode 0 3000 s Feature Guide 289 3 2 PC Programming 290 Parameter Description Value Range ISDN Extension T200 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the L2 command to the ISDN before expecting the reply
246. gramming Selection ARS Trunk Programming Setting of trunk trunk group or BRI line 4XX features 5XX COS Programming Class of Service parameters 6XX Extension Programming Assignment of the extension features xx Resource Interface Assignment of the various interfaces on Programming the PBX BXX SMDR amp Maintenance Setting of SMDR and maintenance Programming features Card Programming The programming used to refer to or delete 9XX the Card Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Entering Characters To store a name or message you can enter the following characters Those tables show you the characters available on each button To change to another table press the Message button Table 1 Standard Display Table 2 Times Buiions 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 alB Ec 2 G E d e f D E 3 4 G H I lg h li li lf ft i a 5 115 6 O m n o N 6 6 6 qG 6 L7 P Q RS pq r s B5 7 8 T U V t u v 0 0 amp 8 9 X Y w x y Y 9 0 13 0 GO 4 lt gt C amp f Feature Guide 393 3 3 PT Programming Basic Programming Date amp Time 000 gt CQ gt gt gt Gay kee all NEXT 00 99 01 12 01 31 gt gt CQ CO gt gt Minute gt OS gt EI
247. gt gt SEC gt 2 2400 4800 9600 1 9200398400 5600 115200 bps gt gt Secor gt 7 9 8 bits gd sct P None Mark Space Even Odd gt gt Sue gt cp gt setecT P None RS232C1 4 USB1 4 1bit 2bits o gt END ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER 3 3 PT Programming END HOLD END END END END Feature Guide 423 3 3 PT Programming SMDR Page Length 802 gt gt Cem gt END ENTER ee ENTER SMDR Skip Perforation 803 gt gt Skip Perforation gt gt ZD um END ENTER SMDR Outgoing Call Printing 804 gt sheer gt O gt mB No print END ENTER Print ENTER SMDR Incoming Call Printing 805 gt gt se gt Q gt LD No print END ENTER Print ENTER Remote Programming Assignment 81 0 gt Qu gt sc gt gt Disable END ENTER Enable ENTER Modem Floating Extension Number 811 gt Q gt Extn No gt O gt LJ EFE END ENTER ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number 812 gt lt gt Exn no gt gt FD END ENTER 1 5 digits ENTER 424 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Slot Card Programming Slot Card Type Reference 900 gt gt Card Name gt EE 101 111 Reference onl END ENTER HOLD Reference only Slot Card Deletion
248. he destination extension regardless of the forward setting CD FWD AII Calls Incoming Y _ Mec ore call J Callor j E transfer a call Boss Secretary Orignal FWD destination Message Waiting While calls are forwarded Message Waiting information is not forwarded The MESSAGE button light turns on at the originally called extension Idle Extension Hunting Idle Extension Hunting applies to calls forwarded to a busy extension in an idle extension hunting group All and Busy If the forward destination is not available to answer a call this feature is cancelled and the original destination will ring for the following type of call Doorphone call Trunk calls via the LCOT or T1 L CO G CO Cards No Answer and Busy No Answer No Answer Time The number of rings before the call is forwarded is programmable for each extension Call Forwarding No Answer Time Follow Me This feature is only available when the original extension is allowed on a COS basis Feature Guide 59 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 60 Do Not Disturb DND Description An extension user can make use of the DND feature If this feature is set calls will not arrive at the extension but arrive at other extension by using the Idle Extension Hunting feature gt 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting or the Intercept Routing Busy DND feature Intercept Routing in Section 1 1
249. he extensions which can use the following manager features Manager Assignment Manager Example An extension user can call a manager to release the restricted outgoing call e g international call Feature Description Details in Password Manager Call Sees clears and prints the call Required 1 23 2 Programm Charge charge data Charge Metre ing Managem ent Remote Clears the personal password of an Required 1 24 1 Password extension remotely and a verified Personal Clear code password Password Lock is Password also unlocked 1 7 6 Verified Code Entry Remote Sets or cancels the Extension Lock Required e 1 7 3 Extension on an extension remotely Extension Lock Lock Dial Tone Transfer Changes the TRS Barring level of the Not 1 7 4 Dial extension temporarily required Tone Transfer Outgoing Message Records and plays back outgoing Not 1 14 5 OGM messages OGMs required Outgoing Message OGM Time Service Switches the time mode day lunch Not 2 2 4 Time break night manually required Service BGM External Sets the External BGM on and off Not 1 14 4 required Background Music BGM Conditions e Manager Password One manager password can be assigned per PBX Manager Password Feature Guide 255 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 1 PC Programming Description This PBX can be programmed and administered using a
250. he feature number for COLR Connected Line Identification Restriction CLIR Specifies the feature number for CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction 1 4 digits consisting of 0 9 X or Feature Guide 335 3 2 PC Programming 336 Parameter Description Value Range CLIP COLP Specifies the feature number for CLIP COLP Calling Line Identification Presentation Connected Line Identification Presentation MCID Specifies the feature number for MCID Malicious Call Identification ISDN FWD Specifies the feature number for Call Forwarding CF on ISDN ISDN Call Waiting Specifies the feature number for ISDN Call Waiting Message Waiting set cancel callback Specifies the feature number for Message Waiting set cancel callback FWD DND set cancel Both Specifies the feature number to set cancel Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND for all incoming calls FWD DND set cancel External Specifies the feature number to set cancel Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND for incoming Trunk calls FWD DND set cancel Internal Specifies the feature number to set cancel Single Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND for incoming intercom calls FWD DND No Answer Timer set Specifies the feature number for setting the duration time to activate the Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND feature Group FWD DND set
251. he group only one channel will be used One DWX can belong to multiple groups DWX Ring DWX Ring DWX Ring Group 01 Group 02 Group 03 Floating Extn No 301 302 303 Group Name Sales 1 Sales 2 Sales 3 DWX01 O x x DWX02 x x DWX03 x x DWX04 x DWX05 x O x DWX06 x x DWX07 x x O DWX Ring Group 1 DWX Ring Group 2 Floating Extn No 301 Floating Extn No 302 Name Sales 1 Name Sales 2 DWX01 SRE DWx04 DWXO6 DWX02 DOE Conditions e DWX Ring Group A maximum of 24 groups for the KX TD7580 and 32 groups for other DWXs can be created e When a DWX joins a DWX ring group the following personal settings are disregarded a When the DWX ring group is called Delayed Ringing Display information when the incoming calls arrive The settings e g display priority are disregarded It is also not possible to switch the displayed items manually 196 Feature Guide 1 22 Digital Wireless Extension DWX Features The setting which is assigned on the DWX e g FWD The status of the DWX e g busy b Log in log out setting from the DWX ring group from the incoming call distribution group which the DWX ring group belongs to Note Log in log out setting of the DWX ring group from the incoming call distribution group is also disregarded DWX Ring Group 4 Incoming Call Distribution Group v DWX Ring Group e Log in N 2
252. he minimum duration of a flash signal 8 x n n 3 63 ms Hooking Flash Time Max Specifies the maximum duration of a flash signal 8x n n 3 191 ms Minimum DTMF Detection Time Specifies the minimum to defect the DTMF tone 2xn 1 31 ms SLT Power Supply Selects the power supply voltage of the SLT 85 V 145 V Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Port Parameter Description Value Range Slot Refers to the slot no Display only PBX No Slot No Card type is only extension Port Refers to the port no Display only 1 8 16 32 Port Type Refers to the port type Display only None DPT DPT DXDP SLT S Hybrid XDP S Hybrid SLT Telephone Type Specifies the telephone type Unknown SLT In the interactive mode display only APT Note T7020 T7030 T7033 LESS T7050 T7055 T7130 It is displayed only in the interactive 17320 17330 17350 mode NEW DPT T7220 T7230 T7235 T7250 T7420 T7425 T7431 T7433 T7436 T7450 T7451 T7520 T7531 T7533 T7536 T7550 T7560 T7565 7625 17630 7633 T7636 T7660 T7665 NEW DSS T7040 T7240 T7340 T7440 T7441 T7540 T7541 T7640 Connection Refers to the connection status of port INS OUS Display only Command Specifies the operating card command INS OUS Status Refers to the status Display only INS OUS Fault e 135 PT or SLT is connected e OUS Not connected e Fault Not connected to the port
253. her PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code OQ DEF OX i Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code Feature Guide 49 1 2 Receiving Group Features 50 2 Busy on Busy The Busy on Busy feature works when the destination for the Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group feature is not assigned in one of the following conditions a There is no space in the Waiting queue b The Queuing Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged in Example of a When the answering agent number Maximum Number of Agents is 2 and the queuing call number gt Queuing Call Limit is 0 There are five assistants in the shop If two of them are engaged on the phone the next caller will hear busy tone to prevent the caller from thinking that there is no one in the shop or that the shop is closed Conditions Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group If the Overflow time expires and the overflow destination is unavailable If the trunk call arrives through the LCOT or T1 L CO G CO Card The line is disconnected If the call arrives through the other cards Redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again Busy on Busy Feature Guide If a trunk call arrives through the LCOT or T1 L CO G CO Card busy tone will not be sent to the caller 1 2 Receiving Group Features Log in Log out Description Incoming call distribut
254. hook Monitor ona Enable Disable Old PT system wide basis For Proprietary Telephones prior to 74 series Off hook Monitor for Assigns Off hook Monitor on a system wide Enable Disable KX T74 75 76 basis For KX T74 75 76 PT CO Button during Trunk Calls Selects a CO button operation during trunk calls Privacy release LCD switch Automatic Answer Specifies the number of rings before 0 3 rings Normal High Speed Enable Disable Ring Times answering Jog Dial Speed Selects the jog dial speed PT Ring Off Assigns to set the PT ringer off System Feature Access Menu No 1 Display list 1 No 2 Display list 2 No 3 Display list 3 No 4 Display list 4 No 5 Display list 5 No 6 Display list 6 No 7 Display list 7 No 8 Display list 8 Callback Cancel C Pickup Direct C Pickup Group Doorphone Call Door Open External Background Music Paging Itis available to setthe same features on multiple lists Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming System Ring System Ring Common Parameter Description Value Range SLT Ring Mode Selects the SLT ring mode 5120 4992 3840 2976 ms SLT Ring Type Selects the SLT ring frequency 20 25 Hz System Ring Pattern Table Ring Pattern Table Trunk Parameter Description Value Range Ring Pattern Table 1 8 Trunk Call Ring Type Trunk Group 1 64 Se
255. hrough 9 and Flexible Numbering Table available while a dial tone is heard Location Feature Default me Pattern 1 Pattern 2 with X without X 1 Extension numbering scheme 1 1 1 2 Extension numbering scheme 2 2 2 3 Extension numbering scheme 3 3 None 4 Extension numbering scheme 4 4 None 5 Extension numbering scheme 5 5 None 6 Extension numbering scheme 6 6 None 7 32 numbering scheme 7 32 None None 33 Operator Call 9 0 9 0 34 Idle Trunk Access ARS 0 9 0 9 35 Trunk Group Access 8 8 36 TIE Line Access 7 None Feature Guide 261 2 3 System Data Control 262 Feature Guide Location Feature Default Pattern 1 Pattern 2 with X without X 37 Redial 38 Speed Dialling System Personal 39 Personal Speed Dialling Programming x30 30 40 Doorphone Call x31 31 41 Group Paging x33 33 42 External BGM on off 35 35 43 Outgoing Message OGM playback record x36 36 44 Individual Trunk Access x37 37 45 Parallel Telephone Mode x39 39 46 Group Call Pickup x40 40 47 Directed Call Pickup X41 41 48 TAFAS Calls through an External Pager x42 42 49 Group Paging answer X43 43 50 Reserved 51 Automatic Callback Busy cancel CCBS cancel x46 46 52 User Remote Operation Remote COS Access X47 47 Verified Code Entry 53 Wirel
256. ic line are distributed to their destination using a suitable distribution feature 1 Available Networking Type for Each Optional Trunk Card Type Each trunk port of an optional trunk card can be assigned its networking type Public Private or VPN Virtual Private Network Networking Public Private Virtual Private es Type DIL DID Network Type Channel Type ven LCOT x x L CO e x x G CO e x x 1 DID TIE E amp M x x x DR2 x x E1 E amp M C x E amp x E amp x EXM E amp MP x CO x x x x Q SIG Master x x Q SIG Slave x e IP GW x e x Note Enable default Enable x Disable 1 26 1 TIE Line Service 2 gt 1 26 2 Virtual Private Network VPN 14 Feature Guide 2 Distribution Feature 1 1 Incoming Call Features One of the following features can be assigned to each trunk port Feature Description Details in Direct In Line Directs a call to a preprogrammed single Direct In Line DIL destination e g Operator DIL Direct Inward Directs a call with a DID number from a DID Direct Inward Dialling DID line to a preprogrammed destination Dialling DID Direct Dialling Directs a call with a DDI number from an ISDN Inward DDI line to a preprogr
257. ication is programmable on a trunk group basis Charge Rate per Unit Calculation Method The margin or tax rate must be xx xx whole number part two digits decimal fraction two digits A calculation method depends on the information which is sent from the telephone company meter indication or charge 8 Call charge with tax and margin in meter indication Meter indication received from the telephone company x Call Charge Rate 1 Tax Rate x 1 Margin Rate b Call charge with tax and margin in charge Charge received from the telephone company 1 Tax Rate X 1 Margin Rate The calculation result is rounded up to the least significant decimal digit 4 Total Call Charge A PT user can show the total call charges on the display The call charge is totalled on an extension trunk or verified code basis 206 Feature Guide 1 23 Administrative Information Output Features The call charge on a verified code is not totalled for each extension 5 Budget Management It is possible to limit telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on each extension or verified code For example an extension in a rented office has a prepaid limit for the telephone usage If the amount of the call charge reaches the limit the extension user cannot make further trunk calls A manager may increase the limit or clear the previous call charge 1 7 2 Budget Management 6 Call Ch
258. ice Features Number in er the table Feature Description 1 TIE Line Service Refer to the TIE Line Service feature gt 1 26 1 TIE Line Service 2 Direct Inward Refer to the DID feature Direct Inward Dialling DID Dialling DID Direct Dialling Inward DDI in Section 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY 3 Direct In Line Refer to the DIL feature Direct In Line DIL in Section DIL 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY 4 Automatic Outgoing ANI Number Sends the caller s number to the E1 line The sending Identification method is the same as ISDN CLIP service Calling ANI Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP in Section 1 18 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY Incoming ANI Receives the caller s number from the E1 line When the ANI number is received it can be treated the same as a Caller ID number 1 15 1 Caller ID 5 Call Charge The call charge meter pulses can be received during a Information conversation 1 23 2 Charge Metre Hardware Requirement an optional E1 Card If an E1 line is used as a trunk the channel type depends on the contract with the telephone company Feature Guide 179 1 20 T1 Line Service Features 1 20 T1 Line Service Features 1 20 1 T1 Line Service Description The T1 line is at the bottom of the digital transmission hierarchy The T1 line carries twenty four 64 kbp
259. ifies the trunk name Max 20 characters Parameter Description Value Range Digital Wireless Exten sion DWX 1 128 DWX Number Specifies the DWX number Extension Number 4 digits DWX PIN Registration Specifies the DWX registration password 4 digits Status Specifies the status Display only Registered Checked mark Not registered Blank Registration Assigns the registration button Select No Select Termination Assigns the termination button Select No Select 324 Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Configuration External Clock Priority Parameter Description Value Range No 1 No 8 Clock Configuration Priority Specifies the physical number of the BRI PRI T1 E1 card that provides External Clock pulse to the system in priority order Note This programming is required to be installed if one BRI PRI T1 E1 card is None Slot no installed Configuration Option Parameter Description Value Range Extension Numbering Selects the extension numbering mode Automatic Manual Mode Status after Card Selects the initial status after installing the INS OUS Installation card Feature Guide 325 3 2 PC Programming 3 2 2 System System Basic Date amp Time Parameter Descripti
260. imum waiting time after 0 5 8 05 seizing the trunk line before sending dialled digits Tone Feed Back Assigns whether to turn on or off the tone Yes No feedback Ring Detection Ring Start Detection Specifies the minimum duration for the 24 1200 ms Time starting ring detection Ring Off Detection Specifies the minimum duration for the 1 0 15 0s Time finishing ring detection Pulse DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Dialling DTMF Inter digit Pause Specifies the DTMF Inter digit Pause Time 64 304 ms Pulse Inter digit Pause Time Selects the Pulse Inter digit Pause Time 630 830 1030 ms Low Speed Pulse Dialling Pulse Break Selects the break for pulse digits Other 60 67 Break Width Specifies the width of Break signal 24 80 ms Make Width Specifies the width of Make signal 12 60 ms High Speed Pulse Dialling Pulse Break Selects the break for pulse digits Other 60 67 Break Width Specifies the width of Break signal 16 72 ms Make Width Specifies the width of Make signal 12 60 ms Pulse Type Selects the pulse dialling signal type Normal Sweden New Zealand Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Caller ID Caller ID Signal Type Selects Caller ID signal type FSK Frequency Shift Keying FSK with Visual Caller ID DTMF Max Caller ID Selects the maximum number of time to 0 1 2 3 receive Caller I
261. ing and the telephone type Notification Description Details in Receiving Method Call Waiting Tone Sends the Call Waiting tone to the busy Call Waiting extension Tone Off Hook Call Talk with the busy extension using the built in Off Hook Call Announcement speaker and microphone of the called extension Announcement OHCA while the existing call is made using the handset OHCA Whisper OHCA Give a message to the busy extension through Whisper the handset OHCA Conditions e Each extension user can choose to receive Call Waiting tone OHCA Whisper or none of these e and Whisper OHCA are enabled or disabled by the COS of the calling extension e and Whisper OHCA do not work for some telephone types In such cases the Call Waiting tone will be sent to the called extension Calling Called Extension s Call Waiting Mode Extension s oHcAcos 9F Mode Cancel Call Waiting Tone OHCA Whisper OHCA Disable Call Waiting Call Waiting tone Call Waiting Call Waiting tone disabled tone Enable Call Waiting Call Waiting tone OHCA Whisper OHCA disabled or Call Waiting or Call Waiting tone tone e notification receiving methods Call Waiting tone OHCA and Whisper are available when the called extension is having a conversation with other party If not the calling extension will be kept waiting until the called extension beco
262. ing off hook This works even when multiple calls are received simultaneously Ringing Line Answers the longest ringing call at the own telephone simply by going default off hook Conditions Prime Line e The priority of the incoming call is as follows 1 The call arriving at a button on which the prime line is assigned 2 The call arriving at the INTERCOM button 62 Feature Guide 1 4 Answering Features Call Pickup Description An extension user can answer a call ringing at any other extension The following types are available Type Picking up Call Type Directed A specified extension s call Group A call within a specified call pickup group Call Pickup Deny Preventing other extensions from picking up calls ringing at your extension is also possible Conditions e Pickup applies to Intercom trunk and doorphone calls e internal Call Block An extension which cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis Internal Call Block in Section 1 1 2 Internal Call Features SUMMARY also cannot pick up any calls ringing at those extensions Call Pickup Directed e A user can also pick up a specified extension s call except an ISDN extension s call by pressing the corresponding DSS button COS programming determines the extensions that can use this feature Call Pickup Group e A specified number of call pickup groups can be created Pickup Group for E
263. ing to VM command FWD Intercept Transfer VPS In AA service mode VM Port 1 xVM Port 2 Operator Extn 102 A VM DTMF i Y VM Port X VM Port 3 C Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the desired extension The extension user should use the Voice Mail VM Transfer button when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS When the extension user presses this button and enters the desired extension number the PBX will transfer the call to the VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension with the required command after the VPS answers the call Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number Feature Guide 187 1 21 Voice Mail Features Performance of Pressing the VM Transfer Button and Entering an Extension Number Transmitted Command In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode Switching to VM command Recording message command Recording message command H H Mailbox No 6 H Mailbox No Example Trunk Call Sent 6 103 mailbox number PBX Switching to VM command Transfer with VM Transfer button extension number 103
264. ion Diode Display Display The display shows the caller s information 1 17 4 Caller s Information Display Information Information External Pager Trunk Answer The external pager sends a ring tone when e 1 14 3 from Any receiving a call Trunk Station Answer TAFAS From Any Station TAFAS Tone Voice Call Waiting A busy extension hears a tone or voice from Call during a the handset built in speaker indicating that Waiting Conversation another incoming call is waiting Conditions e Parallelled Telephone With a parallelled telephone connection two extensions ring on one extension number 1 9 9 Parallelled Telephone Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Ring Tone Pattern Selection Description A ring tone pattern can be selected for each incoming call type on a Ring Tone Pattern Table basis which can be assigned for each extension Patterns Ring Tone Pattern Telephone Type Single Double Triple S Double Option 1 Option 2 PT Cannot be changed Refer to the Ring Tone Sameas Same as Patterns for a PT below Single Double SLT T1 OPX Each pattern and its ringing cycle can be changed DWX Can set the ringing pattern on the DWX based on the ring tone pattern from the PBX S Double can be assigned for call back ring only Ring Tone Patterns for a PT 1280 ms Single Option 1 Double Option 2 Triple S Double
265. ion ACC Code CD 4 8 10 3 515 00 00 00 NA 01 02 02 01 07PM 12345 01 lt D gt CDE9876 lt I gt Q COMPANY 005 00 01 05 9876543210 01 02 02 01 07PM 12345 01 ABC COMPANY12345678 00 01 05 01 02 02 01 07PM 12345 01 123 00 01 05 01 02 02 01 07PM 12345 01 123456 00 12 05 98765 01 02 02 08 33AM 12345 In the office 01 02 02 01 07PM 12345 LOG IN 01 02 02 03 35PM 12345 LOG OUT 01 02 02 03 45PM 12345 EXT12355 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Pattern 80 digits with call charge information Date Time Ext Dial Number Duration Cost ACC Code CD 8 digits 7 5 2 20 8 8 2 10 3 01 02 0210 03AM12101 01 lt gt NA 01 02 0210 07AM 2005 01 12345678901234567890 00 0005 00560 00EU 9876543210 1 Qo o 7 00 8 9 f an extension number is five digits long there is no space between Time and Ext Pattern C 120 digits Date Time Ex Dial Number Ring Duration Cost ACC Code CD 8 digits 7 5 4 50 4 8 8 3 10 3 01 02 02 10 08AM 12301 0001 123456789012345678901234567890 00 00 05 00560 00EUR 9876543210 TR 01 02 02 10 07AM 12301 0001 lt 1 gt 1234567890123456789012345 005 00 0005 9876543210 TR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 8 9 Feature Guide Explanation 1 23 Administrative Information Output Features The following table explains the SMDR contents which are based on the numbers in the previous pattern examples For the programm
266. ion Value Range MFC R2 Group l E1 2 Group Specifies the function of X signal 11 15 X code E1 2 Group Specifies the function of DTMF signal 11 15 code Common E1 MFC R2 Setting 2 Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no PBX No Slot No Card type is only LCOT Group A Address Specifies the Address Complete Code Complete completion of dial code transmitted to 1 15 Assignment the telephone company ANI Specifies the ANI code requesting the 1 15 Request caller s number transmitted to the telephone company ANI 1 Specifies the ANI next code 1 15 Set up Specifies the Set up Speech Path code Undefined 1 15 Speech transmitted to the telephone company Path First Specifies the code requesting the Undefined 1 15 Request telephone company to transmit the first N Request Specifies the code requesting the telephone company to transmit the N th digit of the ANI number Undefined 1 15 the ANI number N 1 Specifies the code requesting telephone Undefined 1 15 Request company to transmit the N 1 th digit of the ANI number N 2 Specifies the code requesting telephone Undefined 1 15 Request company to transmit the N 2 th digit of the ANI number N 3 Specifies the code requesting telephone Undefined 1 15 Request company to transmit the N 3 th digit of Feature Guide 313
267. ion group members can join log in or leave log out the groups manually They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks to prevent calls being sent to their extensions They can return to the group when they are ready to answer calls Wrap up While logged in a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls after completing the last call Wrap up time While Wrap up timer is active calls to all incoming call distribution groups to which the extension belongs will skip the extension so that he can make some report or etc Wrap up mode can also be activated manually Not Ready by pressing the Wrap up button Log in Log out and Wrap up Status Example lt When the incoming call distribution group is in Priority Hunting distribution method gt Ready Waiting for a call x Press the button x ot Ready Answering a Wrap up Making a report time expires temporary break Incoming call Y Y Extn Extn Extn Extn Extn 102 103 104 1 105 106 Ready Not Ready Wrap up Ready After completing Press the the call x Wrap up button Y Wrap up Extn Making a report 102 Log out Conditions e Generally there should be at least one extension in a group that is logged in However all extensions can log out if permitted through system programming
268. ions Fixed Button Functions T76XX Previous PT PREVIOUS GeeS NEXT 9 eres mp Page up CSS d Page down 5 Back to previous D CLEAR ua SELECT No PROGRAM Pause 7 PAUSE FLASH Flash RECALL Secret D SOFT KEY _ Cc Feature Guide 391 3 3 PT Programming 392 Entering System Programming mode System Programming enables the extension user to set the time call destination and all sorts of system conditions within the limits of available programming The dealer or manager can also set up a desired parameters for user programming It is necessary to enter the relevant password to start programming Programming has two levels Dealer level and User level Dealer Level Q G Dealer Password p Programming No 1234 3 digits User Level gt gt gt User Password gt ogra g No 1234 3 digits Note means default value through this manual Programming Structure Programming m N mbet Programming Group Title Description Basic Programming Frequently used programming steps 1XX System Programming Global system parameters 2xx System Timer Flexible system timers Programming 3XX TRS Barring ARS Table TRS Barring and Automatic Route Pro
269. irms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to extension users Type Description Tone 1 a Sent when the setting is accepted b Sent when a call is received in Voice Calling mode The caller s voice will be heard after the tone Tone 2 a Sent from an external paging device or an extension before being paged b Sent when a call is received in Hands free Answerback mode Tone 3 1 a Sent before a conversation is established when using the Paging feature b Sent when a conversation is established with the extension in the following modes after the call making operation e Hands free Answerback mode e Voice Calling mode Tone 3 2 Sent just before a conversation is established when accessing the following features by the feature numbers e Call Park Retrieve e Call Pickup e Hold Retrieve e Paging Answer e TAFAS Tone 4 1 Sent when moving from a two party call to a three party call e g Executive Busy Override Conference Privacy Release Two way Recording Tone 4 2 Sent when moving from a three party call to a two party call e g Executive Busy Override Conference Privacy Release Two way Recording Tone 5 Sent when a call is placed on hold including Consultation Hold Conditions e Confirmation Tone Patterns and Frequencies All confirmation tone patterns and frequencies can be arranged as desired For default patterns refer to the Appendix in Section 3 1 e tis
270. isation of the Automatic 6 1 2 18 24 incoming line data dB First Dial Time Trunk Specifies the Pause Time between seizing the trunk and sending dialled digits 0 5 x n 1 16 s First Dial Time DID TIE Specifies the Pause Time between seizing the DID TIE channel and sending dialled digits 32 x n n21 255 ms Answer Detection Time Specifies the duration time that the system requires to recognise the answer signal 32 x n n21 255 ms Wink Signal Width Specifies the duration time of the Wink signal 128 160 192 224 256 288 ms DTMF Tone DTMF Inter digit Pause Specifies the DTMF Inter digit Pause Time 64 16 x n nz0 15 ms DTMF Transmitting Specifies the output power of the MFC R2 signals 3 2 1 0 1 12 dB 3 N dB N 0 15 DTMF Receiving Specifies the threshold of DTMF detection 42 0 41 0 40 0 11 0 dB N 42 OdB N 0 31 Feature Guide 305 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Pulse Dialling Pulse Break Selects the break for pulse digits 60 67 Pulse Type Selects the pulse dialling digit pattern Normal Sweden New Zealand Pulse Inter digit Pause Selects the Pulse Inter digit Pause Time 630 830 1020 ms Tone Feed Back Selects whether to turn on or off tone feedback Yes No Maximum Break Width Specifies the minimum Break Width 72 8
271. ise ime System Memory Speed Dialling No 000 iu r For Tenant 1 100 101 For Tenant 2 400 401 500 501 H For Tenant 3 999 Tenant to Tenant Call Block The following can be restricted on a COS basis by the Internal Call Block feature gt Internal Call Block in Section 1 1 2 Internal Call Features SUMMARY a Calling extensions in the restricted tenant s b Picking up calls ringing in the restricted tenant s C Retrieving a call held within the restricted tenant s An incoming call distribution group must belong to one tenant because the following features are determined on a tenant basis a Music on Hold while a call is waiting in the queue b The Time Table which determines the overflow destination Feature Guide 249 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 4 Time Service Description This PBX supports day night lunch and break modes of operation TRS Barring can be arranged separately The destination of incoming calls can be set differently for each mode 1 Time Service Switching Mode Day lunch break night mode can be switched either automatically or manually Time Service Switching Mode The switching mode can be assigned for each tenant Type Description Automatic The PBX will switch mode according to the preprogrammed Time Table Manual A manager or preprogrammed extension on a COS basis Time
272. l Network Subscriber Private Selects the Type of Number applied to the outgoing Trunk calls via ISDN Private Network Unknown International National Network Subscriber Numbering Plan ID for Incoming Public Selects the Numbering Plan ID applied to the Incoming calls via ISDN Public Switched Telephone Network Unknown ISDN Telephony National Standard Private Private Selects the Numbering Plan ID applied to the Incoming calls via ISDN Private Network Unknown ISDN Telephony National Standard Private Type of Number for Incoming Public Selects the Type of Number applied to the Incoming calls via ISDN Public Switched Telephone Network Unknown International National Network Subscriber Private Selects the Type of Number applied to the Incoming calls via ISDN Private Network Unknown International National Network Subscriber Value Range and Default of Trunk Attribute in Port Type E r QSIG Maste Private VPN Default X X QSIG Slave X Not possible Feature Guide 295 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Supplementary Service CLIP Assigns Calling Line Identification Yes No Presentation CLIP COLP Assigns Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP CLIR Assigns CLIR Calling Line Identificatio
273. l format ISDN lines if available can be connected to public line trunk private line QSIG or ISDN terminal devices extension 1 ISDN Interface and Configuration Interface Type Description Port Basic Rate Provides two 64 kbps B channels Trunk QSIG Point to Point Interface BRI for communication and one 16 Master Slave Point to kbps D channel for signalling 2B Extension multipoint D Primary Rate Provides thirty or twenty three 64 Trunk QSIG Point to Point Interface PRI kbps B channels for Master Slave communication and one 64 kbps Extension D channel for signalling 30B D 23B D BRI Port Type For BRI only 2 BRI Configuration For BRI only Notes e Point to Point One ISDN terminal device can be connected to one ISDN port e Point to multipoint P MP A maximum of eight ISDN terminal devices can be connected to one ISDN port Feature Guide 161 1 18 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 162 2 Feature Guide ISDN Supplementary Service Table for Public Network CLIP before answering the call Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP Sends the telephone number of the answered party to the network when answering a call The caller can see the number on his telephone display when the line is connected Calling Line Identification Restric
274. lay Item Display Example Condition The extension number and name of the 123 Tom Smith calling or called extension or incoming call distribution group Status of the called extension 123 Busy The number and name of the optional Door 02 1st Door device The dialled telephone number 1234567890 The received call information The first line message a Callers name ABC Company can be either a d b Callers number 12345678 or e at each c Original Destination if the call is 102 Mike extension forwarded d Trunk number name Line 001 Sales e DDI DID MSN name or number Panasonic Call charge fee during a trunk call 12 35 EUR The currency Currency position of the currency symbol and the decimal point Decimal Point for Currency are programmable Call duration during a trunk call Line 001 12 02 28 Conditions e Multilingual Display Each extension can select its display language through personal programming Display Language Selection e Display Contrast It is possible to adjust the display contrast through personal programming Display Contrast Selection 160 Feature Guide 1 18 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 18 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 18 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY Description ISDN is a digital switching and transmission network ISDN transmits voice data and image in digita
275. lects the ring type for trunk group Single Double Triple Option1 Option2 Ring Pattern Table Doorphone Parameter Description Value Range Ring Pattern Table 1 8 Doorphone Call Ring Type Door 1 16 Selects for each doorphone Single Double Triple S Double Option1 Option2 Feature Guide 343 3 2 PC Programming 344 Ring Pattern Table Others Parameter Description Value Range Ring Pattern Table 1 8 Ring Type Extension Selects the ringing pattern for the Single Double Triple extension Option1 Option2 Timed Reminder Alarm Selects the ringing pattern for Timed Single Double Triple Reminder Alarm Option1 Option2 Callback Selects the ringing pattern for Callback Single Double Triple S Double Option1 Option2 S Double 1 40 Assigns S Double ringing pattern Option1 1 40 Assigns Option1 ringing pattern Option2 1 40 Assigns Option2 ringing pattern Live Call Screening Selects the ringing pattern for Live Call Single Double Triple Screening Option1 Option2 Message Waiting Selects the ringing pattern for Message Single Double Triple Waiting Option1 Option2 System Ring Ring Pattern Table Detail Parameter Description Value Range Ring Pattern Option 32 ms x 40 Single 1 40 Assigns Single ringing pattern Double 1 40 Assigns Double ringing pattern Triple 1 40 Assigns Triple ringing
276. les for Levels 2 through 6 Level 3 Tables for Levels 2 and 3 Tables for Levels 3 through 6 Level 4 Tables for Levels 2 through 4 Tables for Levels 4 through 6 Level 5 Tables for Levels 2 through 5 Tables for Levels 5 through 6 Level 6 Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Tables for Level 6 Level 7 Not Programmable Not Programmable gt TRS Barring Denied Code 2 Exception Code Explanation Level 1 Allows all calls Level 2 Denies codes stored in the Denied Code Table for Level 2 except the codes stored in Exception Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Level 3 Denies codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 and 3 except the codes stored in Exception Code Tables for Levels 3 through 6 Level 7 Allows intercom calls only Programming Example Level for Time Mode Level for System COS No pyster Day Lunch Break Night Speed Dialling 1 1 1 1 6 1 2 2 2 2 6 1 gt TRS Barring Level 2 Speed Dialling TRS Barring Level Feature Guide 93 1 7 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features Flowchart An extension user makes a trunk call Is the call made by System Speed Dialling Is TRS Barring Override for System Speed Dialling enabled Yes Checks the Checks the TRS Barring TRS Barring level for level for System Speed the time mode of the Dialling of the extension s COS
277. ll Barring Barring Features 1 7 2 Budget Management Description Limits the telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget If the amount of the call charge reaches the limit an extension user cannot make further trunk calls A manager may increase the limit or clear the amount of the call charge Conditions e Ifthe limit is reached TRS Barring Level 7 is applied e Budget Management for Verified Call If an extension user make a trunk call with a verified code the call charge will be counted on the verified code not the extension The limit of the call charge can be assigned on each verified code e The pay tone service or ISDN Advice of Charge AOC service is required for this feature 96 Feature Guide 1 7 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 7 3 Extension Lock Description An extension user can change the TRS Barring level of the telephone so that other users cannot make inappropriate trunk calls Any numeric code 10 digits max can be used as a password to lock the telephone The same code is used as a password to unlock it This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout Conditions e This feature also restricts setting of DND and FWD e Remote Extension Lock Overrides Extension Lock If an extension assigned as the manager sets Remote Extension Lock on an extension that has already been locked by the extension user the user cannot unlock it This feature is also known as Remote
278. lling If enabled the dialled number will be shown as dots Privacy dial Enables or disables privacy dial If enabled the last two digits of the dialled telephone number and any additional digits after connection will be shown as X e g 123 456 78XX Date order The date order is changeable month day year day month year year month day year day month Language The display language can be selected Conditions 1 23 Administrative Information Output Features SMDR Format The following SMDR format can be set through system programming in order to match the paper size being used in the printer a Page Length determines the number of lines per page gt SMDR Page Length b Skip Perforation determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page SMDR Skip Perforation C Character Code determines which code to be used IBM ASCII or ISO 8859 1 The SMDR data is not deleted even if the PBX is reset If the PBX is reset during a conversation the call will not be recorded on the SMDR If marks are displayed for the date time ring and duration e g the date and time setting has been changed four or more times during the ring and duration are counted The following calls are regarded as two separated calls in the SMDR a Calls before and after the flash recall EFA signal is manually sent during a conversation b Trunk to trunk calls by Call Transf
279. lly so that a name can be assigned for the stored number System Speed Dialling e TRS Barring Override for System Speed Dialling Itis possible to override the TRS Barring using the System Speed Dialling c Speed Dialling TRS Barring Level e Memory Division for Tenant Each tenant can share the memory as desired through system programming 2 2 3 Tenant Service Feature Guide 89 1 6 Memory Dialling Features Quick Dialling Description An extension user can access a person or feature easily This is enabled by storing the number e g extension number telephone number or feature number for Quick Dialling Conditions e Quick Dialling is convenient in the following cases a Room service calls in a hotel b Calling another branch via the public network The extension user needs to dial only the extension number of another branch e Quick Dialling number follows the flexible numbering plan 2 8 5 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering e storing example is as follows Location No Quick Dialling No Desired Number Quick Dialling 01 110 9110 Trunk Call Quick Dialling 02 5 5001 Room Service Quick Dialling O3 2011 90123456789 Another Branch 90 Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features Hot Line Description An extension user can make an outgoing call by only going off hook if the user has previously stored the telephone number or the extension numbe
280. long to the group b One extension can be the supervisor extension of more than one incoming call distribution group Available Paired DSS Console The KX T7640 is only available for this feature Accumulation Value Clear Accumulation value total incoming calls total overflowed calls lost calls average queuing time can be cleared manually The date and time of clearing is saved and it is shown on the display monitoring starting date and time When the value exceeds 99999 before clearing will be shown If a call to an incoming call distribution group is overflowed If the display is in idle status it will change to monitor mode for the corresponding incoming call distribution group automatically If the display is monitoring another incoming call distribution group it will not change Other Features while in Monitor Mode The supervisor extension can use other features making calls pressing the MESSAGE button etc even while in monitor mode When each operation is finished his telephone returns to the queue monitor display 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features SUMMARY Description When an extension user cannot answer calls e g busy not at the desk it is possible to forward or refuse the calls using the following features 1 Call Forwarding FWD 2 Do Not Disturb DN
281. ls in Calling Name Sends the caller s name to the QSIG network when Identification making a call Presentation CNIP Connected Name Sends the name of the answered party to the QSIG Identification network when answering a call Presentation CNOP Calling Name Stops the caller s name being presented to the called Identification party by the caller Restriction CNIR Connected Name Stops CNOP being sent by the answered party Identification Restriction CNOR Call Forwarding Forwards a call in the private network using the Call Call CF Forwarding CF by ISDN P P feature Forwarding CF by ISDN P P Call Transfer CT Transfers a call to an extension in another PBX Call Transfer CT by ISDN Completion of Calls Receives callback ringing when a busy called party on Completion to Busy Subscriber the private network becomes free of Calls to CCBS Busy Subscriber CCBS Advice of Charge Sends the call charge information of the public ISDN Advice of AOC to the private network Charge AOC Feature Guide 1 26 Networking Features 1 26 4 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network Description The PBX can connect to another PBX or outside party by Internet Protocol IP In this case voice communication is converted to IP and send as packets of the data onto the IP network VoIP network supports the private network communications by the TIE line service me
282. me Caller ID Waiting Time Specifies the length of waiting time to 0 15 s for Analogue line receive the analogue Caller ID Feature Guide 329 3 2 PC Programming 330 Parameter Description Value Range Recall Timer Hold Recall Time Specifies the length of waiting time before 1 240 s alerting the holding extension user using Held Call Reminder A reminder tone is emitted every 5 seconds until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up Transfer Recall Time Specifies the length of time before transfer 1 240 s on Trunk Calls recall occurs If a transferred Trunk call is not answered before the programmed number of rings the call returns to the extension user who originally transferred it Transfer Recall Time Specifies the length of time before transfer 1 240 s on Intercom Calls recall occurs If a transferred Intercom call is not answered before the programmed number of rings the call returns to the extension user who originally transferred it Call Park Recall Time Specifies the length of waiting time before 1 240 s alerting Call Park Recall the extension who parked the call ISDN Hold Recall Time Specifies the length of time to recall the 0 15 min hold on ISDN DISA Timer DISA Delayed Answer Specifies the length of waiting time after 0 30 s Time receiving a DISA call before answering it DISA Mute amp Outgoing Specifies the maximum
283. me available to receive the notification Even while waiting the calling extension will hear a ringback tone e f none of these notification receiving methods Call Waiting tone OHCA or Whisper OHCA is set at the called party the caller will hear reorder tone Feature Guide 71 1 5 Making Call Features Call Waiting Tone Description When an extension user attempts to call a busy extension ringing or having a conversation the Call Waiting tone can be sent to the called extension to let him know another call is waiting Conditions e This feature only works if the called extension has activated Call Waiting If it is activated the calling extension will hear a ringback tone e Call Waiting tone can be selected Tone 1 or Tone 2 through personal programming Call Waiting Tone Type Selection 72 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Description An extension user can talk with a busy extension through the built in speaker and microphone of the called party s PT If the existing call is using a handset a second conversation is made using the speakerphone and microphone so that the called extension can talk to both parties Conditions COS programming determines which extensions can use this feature This feature is available only when the called extension uses one of the following telephones KX T7620 KX T7630 KX T7633 KX T7636 KX T7536 KX T7436 KX
284. med DISA security mode as follows 8 TIE Line Call ecurit ntercom Mode Cal Without PBX With PBX Trunk Call Code Code All Security x x x x Feature Guide 137 1 14 Optional Device Features 138 TIE Line Call Security Intercom Mode Cal Without PBX With PBX Trunk Call Code Code Trunk Security O O x x No Security O O O O If trunk call is available Account Code Entry is also available Security Mode Override If the caller operates with the following features while hearing a DISA message the security mode can be changed to the No Security mode temporarily Remote COS Access Remote COS Access feature number extension number personal password Verified Code Entry Verified Code Entry feature number verified code verified code password After changing mode the mode remains in force for the duration of the call Available PBX Features with Security Mode Override After Security Mode Override is done with the Remote COS Access feature the following features are available It regards a remote operation from the assigned extension FWD DND Log in Log out Absent Message Extension Lock Time Service Mode Switch DISA Intercept Routing Busy DND If the destination called by the outside party is busy or in DND mode and if 1 the busy destination does not set Call Waiting FWD or Idle Extension Hunting or 2 the des
285. ms Feature Guide 309 3 2 PC Programming 310 Parameter Description Value Range Flash Flash Detection Assigns the detection of a flash signal Enable Disable Minimum Break Width Specifies the minimum Break Width 24 8x n n20 60 ms Flash Width Specifies the duration time that the system 24 8 x n n 0 188 requires to recognise a switchhook flash ms after the minimum BREAK width Caller ID Caller ID Start Code Selects the start code of Caller ID None X A B C D Caller ID Information Selects the Caller ID information code None X t A B C D End Code Caller ID End Code Selects the end code of Caller ID None X At A B C D Common E1 Line Signal Setting Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no PBX No Slot No Card type is only E1 DR2 Signalling Type Selects the control type of the DR2 Digital System R2 signals Normal Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Inter digit Time Specifies the pseudo answer time Note This parameter is available only when Option 1 or Option 3 is selected 3 15s Bit Position for Pulse Dialling Selects the position of the pulse dialling control bit in the DR2 Signals A bit B bit Bit Position for Clear Back Selects the position of the Clear Back Signal Control bit in the DR2 Signals A bit B bit A amp B bit Forced Release Assigns whether to se
286. n Parameter Description Value Range Paging Group 1 32 Extension Group 1 128 Paging Group Specifies whether the extension group Double click to enable belongs to the paging group Group Paging Group Assign External Pager Parameter Description Value Range Paging Group 1 32 External Pager 1 8 Paging Group Specifies whether the external pager Double click to enable belongs to the paging group Feature Guide 351 3 2 PC Programming Group Paging Group Assign Output Parameter Description Value Range Paging Group 1 32 Output 1 8 Paging Group Specifies whether output port belongs to Double click to enable the paging group Group Paging Group Assign Outgoing Message OGM Parameter Description Value Range Paging Group 1 32 Outgoing Message Specifies the outgoing message number for None 1 64 OGM emergency paging Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Parameter Description Value Range Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 64 Floating Extension Specifies the floating extension number Extension Number Number Group Name Specifies the incoming call distribution Max 20 characters group name Type Selects the group type for each incoming Ring UCD Hunt call distribu
287. n INS OUS Display only Command Specifies the operating card command INS OUS Main LLC Information Assigns whether the LLC Low Level Enable Disable Compatibility Information will be sentto the network when the ISDN Bearer Mode of an outgoing call is Speech mode Sending Status Message Selects whether to send Status Message to the ISDN No Transmission When error detection sent to the ISDN Mandatory When error detection Option Mandatory Receiving Status Selects the treatment of the call when the Message Status Message provided by ISDN does not Forced Disconnect match the actual status of the call Disconnect DTMF Duration Selects the duration of the signals 80 160 ms DTMF Inter digit Pause Specifies the DTMF Inter digit Pause Time 64 16 x n 0 11 ms Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range ISDN Trunk Trunk Number B1 Trunk Number B2 Refers to the trunk number Display only 1 512 Auto setting Subscriber Number Specifies the trunk access number Max 16 digits Ringback Tone Assigns the ringback tone service Enable Disable Service Note It is not available when Channel Type is L CO or G CO ISDN Outgoing Dial Selects ISDN outgoing dial type Overlap En bloc Type PBX Ringback Assigns whether the system sends ringback Enable Disable Tone tone
288. n Restriction feature COLR Assigns COLR Connected Line Identification Restriction CNIP Assigns Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIP CNOP Assigns Connected Name Identification Presentation CNOP CNIR Assigns Calling Name Identification Restriction CNIR CNOR Assigns Connected Name Identification Restriction CNOR CFB Assigns CFB Call Forwarding Busy CFNR Assigns CFNR Call Forwarding No Reply CFU Assigns CFU Call Forwarding Unconditional CD Assigns CD Call Deflection CT Assigns CT Call Transfer CCBS Assigns Completion of Call to Busy Subscriber CCBS AOC S Assigns AOC S Advice of Charge At Call Setup Time AOC D Assigns AOC D Advice of Charge During Call AOC E Assigns AOC E Advice of Charge At End of Call MWI Assigns Message Waiting Indication TC Assigns Transit Counter 296 Feature Guide Configuration Slot PRI 3 2 PC Programming Common Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no PBX No Slot No Card type is only PRI Protocol Timer Parameter Description Value Range ISDN line QSIG Master QSIG Slave T200 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the L2 command to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T202 Specifies the maximum waiting time after resending the TEI demanding to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T203
289. n but routed to the CLI destination 20 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Programming Example of DID DDI Table DID and DDI use the same table DID DDI Locat DID DDI o Destination DID DDI ion No No 2 Day Lune Brea Nigh pay Lun Bre Nig Y h k t Y ch ak ht 0001 123 4567 1 ENab Disa Enab Disa 499 105 100 John White le ble le ble 0002 123 2468 1 Enab Disa Disa Disa 165 499 102 100 Tom Smith le ble ble ble Enab Disa Disa Disa 0003 123 456 1 le ble ble ble 101 101 101 100 A company 7 DID Number The time mode day lunch break night of the programmed tenant is applied to the DID DDI number gt DID Destination 4 DID Name Explanation If the DID DDI number is 123 4567 1 Checks the number in the table gt the number in location 0001 2 Checks the time mode In Day mode CLI is enabled Route to CLI destination In Lunch mode CLI is disabled Route to DID DDI destination extension 100 The Inter digit Time When the Inter digit time expires the PBX stops receiving DID DDI number and starts to check the DID DDI table Even if the Inter digit time does not expire the PBX stops receiving the DID DDI number when the received number is found in the DID DDI table The PBX then routes the call to the corresponding
290. n be also assigned to a flexible button on an APT but the button does not work It is possible to switch the headset mode to the hands free mode or vice versa during a conversation by pressing the Headset button 1 9 Conversation Features 1 9 5 Data Line Security Description Once Data Line Security is set on an extension communication between the extension and the other party is protected from signals such as Call Waiting Hold Recall and Executive Busy Override Extension which have data devices connected e g facsimile may set this feature to maintain secure data transmission against tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication Conditions e f one extension in a conversation has set Data Line Security it applies to both extensions Feature Guide 111 1 9 Conversation Features 1 9 6 Flash Recall Terminate 112 Description The FLASH RECALL button Disconnect mode or Terminate mode or Terminate button Terminate mode is used when a PT user disconnects the current call and originates another call without hanging up first It performs the same function as going on hook and then going off hook Function of Each Mode Disconnect Mode Disconnects the line and the extension user hears the dial tone from the line used last For example if a trunk call is disconnected the extension user will hear a new dial tone from the telephone company Terminate Mode Disconnects the line and the extension
291. n on display PTs during intercom calls Call Directory Extension Dialling Display PT users can make a call by selecting stored numbers and or names on the display Alternate Receiving Ring Voice A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice through personal programming Alternate Receiving Ring Voice If a user selects voice calling the calling party talks to the user immediately after a confirmation tone Denying voice calling can also be selected Alternate Calling Ring Voice A caller can change the called party s preset call receiving method ring tone or voice By doing so ring calling is switched to voice calling or vice versa at the called party The called party may deny voice calling Tone after Dialling After dialling an extension number a user will hear one of the following Type Description Ringback Tone Indicates the called party is being called Confirmation Tone Indicates the called party has set voice calling Busy Tone Indicates the called party is busy DND Tone Indicates the called party has set DND 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 7 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension SUMMARY Description When attempting to call a busy extension ringing or having a conversation an extension user can send call waiting indication to the busy extension Call Waiting The notification receiving method depends on the called extension s personal sett
292. n the case of multiple connection an incoming call distribution group must be composed of the extensions in one system Assignable Extensions PT SLT DWX ISDN Extension T1 OPX DWX Ring Group gt 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY Example Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 Floating extn no 280 Name Sales 1 EE Extn 100 Extn 101 Extn Incoming Call Distribution Group 2 Floating extn no 290 Name Sales 2 105 106 107 103 104 102 4 VM Group There are two types of VM groups as follows Type Description VM DTMF Group A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF Integration features One SLT port can belong to only one group VM DPT Group A group of DPT ports VM Group Floating Extension Number which use the Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration features One DPT port can belong to only one group 1 21 1 Voice Mail VM Group Feature Guide 245 2 2 System Configuration Software Example PBX DPT SLT DPT DPT DPT DPT SLT SLT SLT SLT Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port VM DPT Group VM DTMF Group pe VPS VPS E DPT Digital Integration DTMF Integration 246 Feature Guide 2 2 System C
293. n the same ISDN port receive the call simultaneously if the specification of each terminal device is available To use the MSN whose last digit is 0 as an individual MSN system programming is required for each ISDN port Feature Guide 177 1 19 E1 Line Service Features 1 19 E1 Line Service Features 1 19 1 E1 Line Service Description The E1 line is at the bottom of the digital transmission hierarchy The E1 line carries thirty 64 kbs voice channels at 2 048 Mbps transmission speed as a trunk or private line Voice is digitised by Pulse Code Modulation PCM 1 Channel Type DR2 Digital System R2 E amp M C Continuous E amp M E amp M P Pulsed E amp M The E1 Card supports three different channel types to provide connection at minimum expense One of the three channel types can be assigned to one of the 30 channels of the E1 Card individually according to tariffs and customer needs 2 Features The following table shows the features available for each channel type Feature Table Channel Type 1 TIE 2 DID 3 DIL 4 ANI 5 Call Charge Information DR2 v v v v E amp M C v v v v E amp M P v v v wie The feature is available 7 Receiving Dial Mode should be MFC R2 Available only when this PBX is connected to the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or KX TD500 178 Feature Guide Conditions Explanation 1 19 E1 Line Serv
294. n to listen to the voice message AA Service Specifies the AA Automated Attendant Service command This command is sent to a VM port when an incoming trunk call is answered by the VM port VM Service Specifies the VM Service command Max 16 digits including 0 9 Xand Duration Time DTMF Duration for VM Selects the duration of the DTMF signals sent to the VM 80 160 ms DTMF Inter digit Pause Time Selects the DTMF Inter digit Pause Time 80 160 ms Pause Time Follow on ID Selects the length of waiting time after VM port answers a call before sending DTMF signals such as Follow on ID to VM port 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 s Pause Time VM DTMF Status Selects the length of waiting time before sending DTMF integration signals Extension System status 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 s Others VM DTMF Queuing Assigns the queuing mode when VPS ports Enable Disable Mode are busy Call Forwarding FWD Selects call handling when calls are None to VM DTMF Sequence forwarded to VPS Answer by Mailbox AA Intercept to VM DTMF Sequence Selects how calls are handled when intercepted to VPS None Answer by Mailbox AA Mailbox Number for Extension Specifies whether an extension s mailbox number is substituted by the extension number or Mailbox Access ID Extension Number Mailbox Access ID Message Waiting Lamp Control Selects wheth
295. nd Forced Release Enable Disable Forced Release Selects the force release bit pattern A 0 B 0 Pattern A 0 B 1 A 1 B 0 A 1 B 1 4 Signalling Type Selects the control bit of the E amp M signals control bit in the idle condition Type 1 A bit 0 Type 2 A bit 1 Type 3 B bit 0 Type 4 B bit 1 Type 5 A and B bit 1 Wink Signal Width Specifies the duration time of the Wink signal 128 160 192 224 256 288 ms Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range E amp M P Pulse Length Seizure Selects the length of the Seizure signal 150 600 ms Answer Selects the length of the Answer signal 150 600 ms Clear Selects the length of the Clear signal 150 600 ms E amp Seizure ACK Assigns whether the system waits for the E Yes No amp M P Seizure ACK signal Metre Pulse Detection for DR2 Mode Selects whether to detect the Metre Pulse signal transmitted from the telephone company No Detection Outgoing call only Both Incoming and Outgoing calls Bit Position Selects the bit position of the Metre Pulse A bit B bit C bit D bit Length Specifies the duration time the system will recognise as a Metre Pulse signal 8 640 ms 1 80 N x 8 ms DSP Digital Signal Processor Gain Adjustment DTMF Transmitting Specifies the output power of the DTMF signals 3 2 1 0 1 12 dB 3
296. ne Intercom call Call Waiting tone OHCA Call Waiting tone Off Whisper OHCA Off Trunk call Call Waiting tone Off Including a doorphone call call from an incoming call distribution group and a call from an extension that placed a trunk call on a consultation hold This feature is also known as Busy Station Signalling BSS Conditions Call Waiting call for a VM group DPT DTMF member is not available Data Line Security Setting Data Line Security cancels the Call Waiting setting Call Waiting Tone A PT user can set different Call Waiting tones for each trunk call and intercom call through personal programming Call Waiting Tone Type Selection Caller Information With the Call Waiting tone the caller s information flashes on the display for five seconds at 15 second intervals Call Waiting from the Telephone Company Besides the Call Waiting service within the PBX the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from your telephone company informs the extension user of another incoming trunk call that is waiting He can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold For details consult your telephone company Visual Caller ID With the Call Waiting tone from the telephone company the Caller ID number can be received and flash on the display twice for five seconds at 15 second intervals Feature Guide 37 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 Receiving Group Features
297. nformation Output Features 1 23 1 SMDR Description Automatically records detailed information for each extension 1 SMDR Output Port The Serial Interface RS 232C port can be used to output the SMDR data The following devices can be connected e Serial Interface RS 232C port Personal computer printer etc SMDR Output Data The following data will be recorded and sent to the SMDR output port Trunk call information incoming outgoing b Intercom call information outgoing C Log in Log out information d System error log 2 4 3 Local Alarm Information Memory for SMDR A specified number of call information can be memorised for each PBX If more calls are originated or received the oldest data is overwritten by the newest one Feature Guide 201 1 23 Administrative Information Output Features 202 3 SMDR Format Type and Contents There are the following three types of output format which can be selected through system programming Pattern A 80 digits without call charge information Date Time Ext 8 digits 7 5 lt gt 12345678901234567890 01 02 02 10 03AM 12005 01 02 02 10 07AM 12005 01 lt gt 005 00 01 05 9876543210 01 02 02 10 15AM 12005 01 1234567890123456 123 00 01 05 9876543210 TR 01 02 02 10 30AM 123 01 1234567890123456 00 01 05 9876543210 01 02 02 01 07PM 12345 CO Dial Number 2 01 25 I ABC COMPANY12345678 005 00 01 05 9876543210 Ring Durat
298. ng 3 digits programming numbers from the PT Password Security A password is required to perform programming for security purposes Do not disclose the password This will avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent use of the PBX Warning to the Dealer regarding the system password 1 Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers 2 Please maintain the secrecy of the password This will avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent use of the PBX 3 Please change the password periodically 4 We strongly recommend that a password of 10 digits is used for maximum protection against hackers 5 Ifthe system password is forgotten you can examine the backup of the system programming e f you have a backup system data you can find the password by loading the backup system data onto the PC and check the password using the programming tool e do not have a backup system data you have to set the PBX to the factory default and reprogramme it Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming 3 2 PC Programming PC Programming Software Installation To programme and administer the KX TDA100 200 by PC Personal Computer you need to install the PC programming software onto the computer from KX TDA100 200 CD ROM The PC programming software starts the programme using the drive where you installed the software automatically System Requirements Microsoft Windows 98 Windows NT 4 0 98SE ME
299. ng Call Features 1 5 10 Account Code Entry 78 Description An account code is used to identify outgoing trunk calls for accounting and billing purposes The account code is appended to the SMDR call record Therefore for example the firm uses an account code for each client so that the firm can determine what calls were made for the client and can submit a bill to the client according to the client s account code on the SMDR call record There are two methods of entering account codes as follows One of the methods is selected for each extension on a COS basis Account Code Mode Mode Description Option A user can enter an account code if needed at any time desired Forced A user must always enter an account code before seizing a trunk so as not to forget entering the code Conditions Feature Guide An account code can be stored into Memory Dialling e g One touch Dialling Account Button A flexible button can be customised as the Account button The Account button is used in place of the feature number for entering an account code This button is useful because it can be used at any time while the feature number entry is allowed only when hearing a dial tone before seizing a trunk Account code entry after receiving a disconnection signal from a trunk must be done while hearing reorder tone Otherwise the SMDR call record is output and entry becomes impossible afterwards If the
300. ng set 4 Call Monitor 5 Automatic Callback Busy CCBS 6 Alternate Calling Ring Voice x To use Call Waiting DND Override both 1 and 2 are available by default 3 Fixed Numbering available while dialling or talking The features which are available while dialling or talking have fixed numbers as shown in 264 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control the following table Fixed Numbering Table available while dialling or talking Feature Fixed Numbering Pulse to Tone Conversion x Conference 3 Door Open 5 Conditions e PBX has default for numbers e Thefollowing are examples of feature number conflicts 1 and 11 0 and 00 2 and 21 10 and 101 32 and 321 etc e Feature number Additional number Parameter Some flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active For example to set Call Waiting the feature number for Call Waiting must be followed by 1 and to cancel it the same feature number should be followed by O e Ifa feature number includes X or rotary SLT users cannot use it Feature Guide 265 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 6 Floating Extension Description Virtual extension numbers can be assigned to resources to make them appear as extensions These numbers are defined as floating extension numbers and can be assigned as a destination of incoming calls etc This feature is also known as Floating Station
301. ning LCS 11 PT users can monitor his own mailbox while a caller is leaving a message and if desired answer the call by pressing the LCS button When the caller is leaving a message in the mailbox monitoring can be carried out in two ways Each extension user may choose which through personal programming Live Call Screening Mode Set Hands free mode The user can monitor the call automatically through the built in speaker Private mode The user will hear an alarm tone To monitor the call the user goes off hook with the handset or speakerphone Two way Recording into the VPS A PT user can record a conversation into his own mailbox or another mailbox while talking on the phone Use the Two way Record button to record into his own mailbox Use the Two way Transfer button to record into someone else s mailbox Feature Guide 193 1 21 Voice Mail Features Note When you record Two way telephone conversations you should inform the other party that the conversation is being recorded 12 VPS Data Control by the PBX The data of date and time is controlled by the PBX 13 Remote PBX Data Control by the VPS The FWD of an extension can be controlled by the VPS Conditions General e Voice Mail VM Transfer Button A flexible button can be customised as the Voice Mail VM Transfer button with the floating extension number of the VM group as the parameter e fthere are extensions with five digit extension numbers
302. nk Calls 504 gt 5 gt em gt a i END ENTER aid a ENTER Feature Guide 411 3 3 PT Programming Executive Busy Override 505 gt gt 051 gt gt m 01 64 Disable END ENTER Enable ENTER Executive Busy Override Deny 506 gt gt COSNo Q gt 01 64 Disable ENTER Enable ENTER DND Override 507 gt lt gt cosNo gt gt m 01 64 Disable END ENTER Enable ENTER Account Code Mode 508 gt gt COSNo gt SP gt gt m 01 64 Option END ENTER Forced ENTER Speed Dialling TRS Barring Level 509 gt lt gt COSNo TRS Barring Level gt gt ID 1 7 01 64 END ENTER 1 ENTER Extension Lock TRS Barring Level 510 gt COSNo TRS Barring Level gt lt gt gt D END ENTER ENTER Manager Assignment 511 gt gt 05 gt gt gt a 01 64 Disable Enable END ENTER Only COS no 64 ENTER is set to Enable 412 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Door Open Assignment 512 gt gt cosN SP o gt m END 1 64 Disable ENTER diis Enable ENTER Time Service Switching Mode 514 Q cosN gt SB gt Q gt 1 64 Disable END ENTER dig Enable ENTER Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone 515 gt gt cost gt amp 2 gt C3 1 64 Di END
303. nsion Number 620 gt gt Incoming Call gt gt Extn No gt gt 01 32 1 5 digits Distribution ENTER Group No 01 64 Delayed Ringing 621 gt Location No gt GP gt Distribution TEN mmediate ENTER Group No 1 6 rings 01 64 No ring gt QJ END ENTER Incoming Call 622 gt Distribution gt Extn Mo gt 4 um ENTER Group No d 01 64 Incoming Call Distribution Group Name 623 Incoming Call Distribution ENTER Group No 01 64 Feature Guide 415 3 3 PT Programming Incoming Call Distribution Group Type Incoming Call 624 gt gt pictur gt Ring END ENTER Group No UCD Hunt ENTER 01 64 Overflow Destination on Time Out 625 gt Incoming Call FimeNo estination No gt gt 1 Day 2 Lunch Max 32 digits 3 Break 4 Night Distribution ENTER 01 64 Overflow Time Assignment 626 Incoming Call Overflow Time gt Gy END Distribution TEET x S ENTER Group No 60s 01 64 Overflow Destination by Busy 627 gt AQ gt 1101119 Call Time No gt Destination No gt gt 1 Day 2 Lunch 1 5 digits Distribution ENTER Group No 3 Break 4 Night 01 64 mE END ENTER Queuing Call Limit Incoming Call 628 gt 5909 22 gt Numberin Queuing gt
304. nsions e g modem for remote system administration an external pager for TAFAS e Calling an outside party via the PBX e Operating some PBX remote features e g FWD Outgoing Message OGM When a call arrives on a DISA line a prerecorded DISA message will greet and guide the caller Any extension assigned as the manager can record outgoing messages OGMs 1 14 5 Outgoing Message OGM DISA Intercept No Dial If the caller fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period DISA 1st Dial Time for Intercept gt DISA Intercept Time following the outgoing message OGM the call is redirected to the operator extension DISA Built in Automated Attendant Number DISA AA Service After listening to the outgoing message OGM the caller may dial a single digit DISA AA number The destination for each DISA AA number can be assigned for each message It is also possible to assign other DISA floating extension number as the destination Multistep DISA AA Service If the caller dials a second digit within a preprogrammed time period DISA 2nd Dial Time for AA the DISA AA service is not employed DISA Security Mode and Available Features If the DISA AA service is not employed the caller may access the PBX features by entering the feature numbers To prevent others from accessing the PBX features it is possible to assign DISA security gt DISA Security Mode The features available depend on the preprogram
305. nts of the personal computer or printer e Stop Bit Length A stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the personal computer or printer Feature Guide 205 1 23 Administrative Information Output Features 1 23 2 Charge Metre Description The PBX receives a call charge signal during or after a conversation with an outside party The call charge information is shown on the telephone display and the SMDR 1 Call Charge Signal Service Call charge signal service from the telephone company depends on the trunk being used Trunk Service Analogue trunk Pay Tone CID Pay Card is required ISDN line Advice of Charge AOC E1 line Metre Pulse When the pay tone service is used pay tone type 12 kHz 16 kHz should be selected Pay Tone Signal Type 2 Call Charge Display Up to 7 digits e g 88888 75 The decimal point position the number of significant decimal digits for currency is programmable Decimal Point for Currency Up to 3 currency characters are programmable e g EUR or for Euro Currency The currency position either front or back of the call charge is programmable e g 45 12 or 45 12 3 Margin Tax Rate Assignment It is possible to add a margin Charge Margin and the tax Charge Tax to the call charges The call charge rate per meter ind
306. nuous signal during a trunk to trunk line call by DISA or AGC Cyclic Assigns whether to disconnect the trunk Enable Disable line when the system detects a cyclic signal during a trunk to trunk line all by DISA or AGC IRNA IRNA Destination Day In Day mode Max 32 digits including Lunch In Lunch mode and PF Break In Break mode Night In Night mode Host PBX Access Code Code 1 10 Specifies the access code Max 10 digits including and Feature Guide 349 3 2 PC Programming 350 Parameter Description Value Range Timer Trunk to Trunk Call Duration Time Specifies the maximum time allowed for a trunk to trunk call None 1 60 min Extn to Trunk Call Duration Time Specifies the maximum time allowed for a extension to trunk call None 1 60 min Forced Disconnection Time No Response Specifies the maximum time allowed for making a call with no response None 1 4 min Collect Call only for Brazil Collect Call Block Assigns whether to reject the collect call Enable Disable Collect Call Block Specifies the maximum waiting time to 512 x n nz0 4 ms Waiting Time reject the collect call Collect Call Block Specifies the length of Flash Time to reject 512 x n 0 4 ms Flash Time the collect call Caller ID Caller ID Modification Specifies Caller ID modificati
307. ode Specifies the Call Forwarding FWD mode on intercom calls Blank All Busy No Answer Busy amp No Answer WR Double Ring Intercom Call Specifies the destination number of Call Max 32 digits including Forwarding FWD Forwarding FWD on intercom calls X and PF Number Call Forwarding No Specifies the length of time before the Call 0 1205 Answer Time Forwarding No Answer feature is activated Message Extension LCD Message Specifies the extension LCD message Max 16 characters ARS Itemised Code Itemised Billing Code Specifies the Itemised Billing code Max 10 digits Feature Guide 363 3 2 PC Programming Line Extension Digital Wireless Extension Personal Speed Dialling Parameter Description Value Range Extension This program is not intended for DWX Extension Number Specifies the extension number Extension Number Extension Name Specifies the extension name Max 20 characters Personal Speed Dialling 0 9 Name Specifies Personal Speed Dialling name Max 20 characters Number Specifies Personal Speed Dialling number Max 32 digits Line Extension Digital Wireless Extension CO Button Parameter Description Value Range Extension Refers to the extension number Number Display only Name Refers to the extension name Display only Telephone type Refers to the t
308. og Memory Specifies the maximum number of the calls 0 100 to the incoming call distribution group to record in memory ISDN Bearer Specifies the ISDN bearer mode on an Automatic Speech extension basis 3 1 K Audio Personal Password Specifies the personal password Max 10 digits Budget Management Specifies the total telephone charge allowed to extension users on an extension basis If the telephone charge on the extension exceeds the limit further call cannot be made anymore from that extension 0 0000001 9999999 Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Setting Trunk Call Forwarding Assigns the Call Forwarding FWD set on On Off FWD Set trunk calls Trunk Do Not Disturb Assigns the Do Not Disturb DND set on On Off DND Set trunk calls Trunk Call Forwarding FWD Mode Selects the Call Forwarding FWD mode on trunk calls Blank All Busy No Answer Busy amp No Answer WR Double Ring Trunk Call Forwarding Specifies the destination number of Call Max 32 digits including FWD Number Forwarding FWD on trunk calls X and PF Intercom Call Assigns the Call Forwarding FWD set on On Off Forwarding FWD Set intercom calls Intercom Do Not Assigns the Do Not Disturb DND set On Off Disturb DND Set intercom calls Intercom Call Forwarding FWD M
309. olling Features 209 Extension Group 351 Extension Group Assignment 414 Extension Intercept Destination 414 Extension Lock 97 Extension Lock TRS Barring Level 412 Extension Name 394 Extension Number 394 Extension Port Configuration 242 Extension Programming 414 Extension Setting 293 302 359 Extension Timer 327 Extension to Trunk Call Duration 114 Extension to Trunk Call Duration Time 409 External Feature Access EFA 113 External Pager 351 369 External Pager Floating Extension Number 421 EXtra Device Port XDP 242 F Fault Recovery Diagnostics 268 Feature 371 Feature Guide References 2 Feature Charge 373 Feature Emergency Dialling 371 Feature Hotel 374 Feature ISDN En bloc Dialling Leading Digit 376 Feature LCD Message 372 Feature Printed Message 372 Feature Second Dial Tone 372 Feature Speed Dialling amp Caller ID 371 Feature Tenant 376 Feature Verified Code 372 Fixed Buttons 152 Flash 306 310 318 Flash Recall Terminate 112 Flexible Buttons 156 Flexible Numbering 397 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering 261 Floating Extension 266 Frame Error Detection 311 Full One touch Dialling 87 FWD AIl Calls 57 FWD Busy 57 FWD Busy No Answer 57 FWD Follow Me 57 FWD No Answer 57 G Group 244 349 Group Call Distribution 43 Group Call Pickup 63 Group I Code Assignment 312 Group Ill Code Assignment 312 Group DWX Ring Group 358 Group Extension Group 351 Group Idle Extension Hunting 355
310. omatic Switching mode Up to 24 holidays start and end dates can be stored and one time mode can be selected for all holidays 5 Time Service Button A flexible button can be customised as the following buttons a Day Night button b Day Night Lunch button Day Night Break button d Day Night Lunch Break button Each of these buttons is used for switching between modes For example pressing the Day Night button switches between day and night modes All of these buttons show the current status as follows Light Pattern Status Off Day mode Red on Night mode Green on Lunch mode Slow green flashing Break mode Slow red flashing Holiday mode 252 Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software Note Any extension user except extension users allowed to change the mode can only check the current status on the display by pressing the Time Service button Conditions System programming gt Time Service Start Time can set the Start and or End time of the following a Day 1 Day Start time b Lunch Lunch Start time C Day 2 Lunch End time d Night Night Start time PC programming can also set the following three time periods for break mode per day e Break 1 Start f Break 1 End Day restart g Break 2 Start h Break 2 End Day restart i Break 3 Start j Break 3 End Day restart Feature Guide 253 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 5 Opera
311. on 185 Voice Mail Features 182 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network 239 VPS Data Control by the PBX 194 VPS Trunk Group 356 VPS DSS Console PC Console Assignment 414 Walking Extension 211 Whisper OHCA 74 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 200 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Tele phone 413 Wrap up 51 X XDP Assignment 414 434 Index 435 Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd 1 62 4 chome Minoshima Hakata ku Fukuoka 812 8531 Japan Copyright This manual is copyrighted by Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd KME Under the applicable copyright laws this manual may not be reproduced in any form in whole or part without the prior written consent of KME Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd 2000 Printed in Japan PSQX2230ZA KS0302NS0 Version 0 120
312. on Value Range Verified Code 1 1000 Verified User Code Specifies the user code that must be used Max 4 digits Verified User Name Specifies the user name of the verified code Max 20 characters Verified Password Specifies the acceptable password Max 10 digits COS for Verified Code Specifies the COS for verified codes 1 64 Itemised Billing code Specifies the Itemised Billing code for ARS Max 10 digits for ARS Budget Management Used to determine the total telephone 0 99999999 charges allowed to extension users on an extension basis If the telephone charge on the extension exceeds the limit trunk calls cannot be made anymore from that extension Feature Second Dial Tone Parameter Description Value Range Second Dial Tone Waiting Code 1 100 Dial Specifies the carrier code Max 4 digits Pause Count Specifies the number of pause required to 0 4 ensure that the dial tone is received Feature LCD Message Parameter Description Value Range LCD Message 1 9 Specifies the LCD message There can be a maximum of seven characters in an LCD message Max 16 characters Feature Printed Message Parameter Description Value Range Printing Message 1 9 Specifies the printing message There can be a maximum of seven characters in an LCD message Max 24 characters Feature Guide Feature Charg
313. on Value Range Year Enters the number of the year 2000 2099 Month Enters the number of the month 1 12 Date Enters the number of the day 1 31 Week Selects the day of the week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Hour Enters the number of the hour 0 23 Minute Enters the number of the minute 0 59 Second Enters the number of the second 0 59 Summer Time Daylight Saving Time Table 1 20 Summer Time Assigns whether to use Summer Time Enable Disable Table Daylight Saving Time table Summer Time Start Specifies Summer Time Daylight Saving Year Month Day date Time start date Summer Time End Specifies Summer Time Daylight Saving Year Month Day date Time end date tis not saved as part of a backup It is not available in batch mode System Basic Operator Parameter Description Value Range Day Assigns the Day mode operator Extension Number Lunch Assigns the Lunch mode operator Extension Number Break Assigns the Break mode operator Extension Number Night Assigns the Night mode operator Extension Number 326 Feature Guide System Basic Music 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Music Source Selection for Port 2 Selects the source of Music Source 2 Background Music 2 External Internal 1 Internal 2 Music Source Selection for Hold Selects the source of music on hold Beep Background 8 Music Source Selection for Transfer S
314. on a behind PBX can be addressed with Multiple Subscriber Number MSN The MSN consists of the ISDN extension number and an additional digit O through 9 or 00 through 99 Example ISDN Port for Extn No 1234 EXTN P MP 1234 Up to eight terminals ok io MEM DUE a can be connected to Ee Ee Re the port and receive PBX 1234 1234 1234 a call simultaneously ISDN Port for Extn No 13X MSN 131 139 EXTN P MP Up to eight terminals P can be connected to the port Bi ji 130 131 132 139 i3 All terminals receive a Call simultaneously ISDN Port for Extn No 14XX MSN EXTN P P P MP ISDN Port for P P P MP Behind PBX 1400 1499 Extn No 15XX E Each terminal MSN E J z J E receives a call Use the DDI MSN 1400 1401 1499 feature of the behind PBX Idle Extension Hunting is available Conditions e Subaddressing Subaddressing is possible between ISDN terminal devices The subaddress goes through the PBX to the ISDN terminal devices directly e ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group In this case an MSN can be assigned 176 Feature Guide 1 18 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features If the last digit of the MSN is 0 all terminal devices o
315. on of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS 175 Conference 126 Conference Features 125 Conference Features SUMMARY 125 Configuration 281 Configuration Digital Wireless Extension DWX 324 Configuration External Clock Priority 325 Configuration Option 325 Configuration Slot 281 Configuration Slot BRI 288 Configuration Slot CSINF 323 Configuration Slot CTI LINK 323 Configuration Slot E amp M 317 Configuration Slot E1 309 Configuration Slot Extension 320 Configuration Slot IP Gateway 324 Configuration Slot LCOT 284 Configuration Slot OPB3 283 Configuration Slot PRI 297 Configuration Slot T1 305 Confirmation Tone 215 Console and Paired Telephone Assignment 395 Consultation Hold 113 115 123 Conversation Features 107 COS Programming 411 Currency 399 D Data Bits 423 Data Line Security 111 Date amp Time 394 Decimal Point for Currency 398 Delayed Ringing 43 415 Denied Code Tables 92 Detail 365 Dial Tone 214 286 Dial Tone Detection 80 Dial Tone Transfer 98 Dial Type Selection 79 Dialling Digit Restriction during Conversation 114 DID Destination 409 DID Name 409 DID Number 409 DID DDI Table 383 Digital Wireless Extension DWX 324 Digital Wireless Extension DWX Connection 195 Digital Wireless Extension DWX Features 195 DIL 1 1 Destination 408 Direct In Line DIL 17 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In ward DDI 19 Direct Inward System Access DISA 13
316. on table 1 4 Table Number number Group Local Access Priority Parameter Description Value Range Local Access Priority 1 64 Group No Specifies the trunk group number 1 64 Trunk Group Number Group Name Refers to the trunk group name Display only Group Trunk Group Charge Rate Parameter Description Value Range Trunk Group 1 64 Group Name Refers to the trunk group name Display only Rate Specifies the charge rate per metre pulse 0 0000001 9999999 Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Group Extension Group Parameter Description Value Range Extension Group 1 128 Extn Group Name Specifies the extension group name Max 20 characters Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number 1 8 Group Pickup Group Parameter Description Value Range Pickup Group 1 64 Extension Group 1 128 Pickup Group Member Selects whether the extension group Y N belongs to the pickup group Group Paging Group Group Paging Group Common Parameter Description Value Range Paging for Do Not Selects if the Do Not Disturb DND Do Not Disturb DND Disturb DND extension receives paging announcement Paging Extension Extension Paging Specifies the paging volume level 15 12 9 6 3 0 3 6 Volume dB Group Paging Group Assign Extensio
317. onfiguration Software 2 2 3 Tenant Service Description This PBX can be shared with certain number of tenants When tenant service is used each tenant can use the resources differently and independently from other tenants This enables the PBX to be configured like multiple PBXs which in each case are suited to different tenants Some resources can be common and some can be divided among tenants 1 Tenant Configuration 1 1 Tenant Member The tenant members consist of extension groups One extension group can belong to only one tenant Therefore one extension can belong to only one tenant 1 2 Time Service Each tenant has a Time Table The Start and or End time of each time mode day lunch break night can be set for each day of the week The Time Table numbers correspond to the tenant numbers respectively Example Tenant 1 Tenant 2 Extn Group 1 Extn Group 5 Extn Group 2 Extn Group 6 Extn Group 3 Extn Group 4 Use Time Table 1 Use Time Table 2 2 System Management Each of the following system management items can be assigned to each tenant 8 Tenant Operator extension number incoming call distribution group number none due to the system assignment Operator Assignment b ARS Mode Off Local Access All Access System due to the system assignment gt ARS Mode C Music Source for Music on Hold System due to the system assignment Music Source Selection for Call Hol
318. or disable this feature for each COS of the called party Programming Example Called Party Caller COS 1 52 COS3 COS 1 52 x x x COS 3 x x x Explanation a COS 1 can make calls to all extensions b COS 2 can make calls to COS 1 only COS 2 cannot make calls to COS 2 c COS 3 can make calls to COS 3 only COS 2 COS 3 1 Ed TA 1 Extn 102 Extn 103 1 Extn 104 Extn 105 Extn 106 dM o xm Conditions e Restricted extension numbers cannot be the parameter of the feature settings e g Walking Extension e All extensions can make an Operator Call regardless of the Internal Call Block Feature Guide 33 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 3 34 Description Incoming Call Indication Features SUMMARY Incoming calls are indicated by various methods as follows Type Feature Description Details in Ring Tone Ring Tone A telephone rings when receiving a call The Ring Tone Pattern ring tone patterns can be changed for each Pattern Selection incoming call type Selection Voice Calling Alternate A PT user can select to receive intercom 1 5 6 Receiving calls by ring tone or by voice through Intercom Ring Voice personal programming Call LED LED Indication The light shows line conditions with a variety 1 17 3 LED Light of light patterns LED Emitting Indicat
319. or each idle extension hunting group Available Destination Destination Availability Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX O Digital Wireless Extension DWX Incoming Call Distribution Group DWX Ring Group VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Trunk Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code Of 516358 FWD DND Mode While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group any extension which has set FWD AII Calls or DND feature will be skipped and the call will go to the next extension in the group Feature Guide 39 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 40 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY Description An incoming call distribution group is a group of extensions programmed through system programming gt Incoming Call Distribution Group Extension Number An incoming call distribution group receives calls directed to the group Each incoming call distribution group has a floating extension number Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions in the group using a distribution method When a preprogrammed number of extensions in the group are busy the incoming calls
320. ore expecting the reply to it T316 Specifies the maximum waiting time after 0 3000 s sending the Restart message before expecting the reply to it T320 Specifies the time for packet protocol 0 3000 s T322 Specifies the maximum waiting time after 0 600 s sending the Status enquiry message before expecting the reply to it T3D3 Specifies the time that the system tries to 0 3000 s establish L2 in Permanent mode T3D9 Specifies the time that the system tries to 0 30005 disconnect L2 in Call by Call mode 0s setting means that the system timer suspended Port Parameter Description Value Range Slot Refers to the slot no Display only PBX No Slot No BRI designates the number Port Refers to the port no Display only 1 Port Type Selects the port type Trunk line Extn QSIG Master QSIG Slave Connection Refers to the status of the port connection INS OUS Display only Command Specifies the operating card command INS OUS 300 Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Main LLC Information Assigns whether the LLC Low Level Compatibility Information will be sent to the network when the ISDN Bearer Mode of an outgoing call is Speech mode Enable Disable Sending Status Message Selects whether to send the Status Message to the ISDN No Transmission When error detection Mandatory When error detection Option Mandato
321. ored number is dialled automatically with a simple operation 1 Features Feature Storing Method Storing Place Details in One touch Dialling Personal Programming PBX Extension One touch e System Programming Data Dialling PC Programming only Last Number Redial The last dialled telephone PBX Extension Last Outgoing Call Log number s is automatically stored Data Number Redial Speed Personal Personal Programming PBX Extension Speed Dialling e Personal Operation with the Data Dialling Feature Number Personal System System System Programming PBX System Data Quick Dialling System Programming PBX System Quick Data Dialling Hot Line e Personal Programming PBX Extension Hot Line e Personal Operation with the Data Feature Number Incoming Call Log Incoming call information is PBX Extension 1 15 2 automatically stored Data Incoming Call Log 2 Valid Input Display while m Input Entering Description 0 9 x 1t 0 9 Stores the digits and PAUSE Pause P Stores a pause by pressing the PAUSE button FLASH RECALL F Stores a flash recall signal EFA mode by Hooking pressing the FLASH RECALL button at the beginning of the number Feature Guide 85 1 6 Memory Dialling Features Input Description INTERCOM Conceals all or part of the number by pressing the Secret INTERCOM button at the beginning
322. orti Tank Assess No gt E 101 110 01 64 Reference only END ENTER LCOT Dialling Mode 410 gt gt SlotNo gt gt e gt L3 END ENTER 101 110 01 16 DTMF Pulse ENTER Feature Guide 405 3 3 PT Programming LCOT Pulse Speed 411 gt Slot No gt PortNo gt gt gt m 101 110 01 16 Low High END ENTER ENTER LCOT DTMF Duration 412 gt 9 5 i 10 10 01 16 80 160 CPC Signal Detection Time Outgoing 413 gt Sirio Formo gt iode No gt 101 110 01 16 0 None 1 6 5 END ENTER 2 113 N 1 x8 ms ENTER 400 ms CPC Signal Detection Time Incoming 414 gt Sitio gt odeto gt gt E 101 110 01 16 0 None 1 6 5 ENTER 2 113 1 8 ms ENTER 4400 ms LCOT Reverse Circuit 415 gt gt SiotNo gt Porno gt 101 110 01 16 Disable END ENTER Outgoing Both Call ENTER LCOT Pause Time 416 59 Porto gt gt gt m 101 110 01 16 152 5 ENTER 35 45 s ENTER 406 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming LCOT Flash Time 417 gt Boto Porno gt gt gt 101 110 01 16 None 80 96 112 ENTER 300 600 900 ENTER 1200 ms option LCOT Disconnect Time 418 gt gt Port gt D gt
323. osition Programming Example carier Tae 1 2 Atsecom Btelecom Delete Digis e o 5 Carrier Access Code 0077 0088 Trunk Groups 2Modify Command CH 12 Example Dialled number 0123456789 Trunk Access no is ignored 2 042345 6789 gp 0077 6789 12 Modification Add the number Add the Carrier Access code 40 9 Delete 6 digits ARS Carrier Name 2 ARS Removed Digits for Carrier Access code Feature Guide 105 1 8 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 106 ARS Added Number for Carrier Access code gt ARS Outgoing Trunk Group for Carrier Access 6 Optional Assignment Authorisation Code for a Tenant An Authorisation code can be assigned for each carrier and each tenant Authorisation Code for a Trunk 2 An Authorisation code can be assigned for each trunk group and each carrier Itemised Billing Code An Itemised Billing code can be assigned for each extension If a call is not made from an extension e g DISA or TIE and no verified code is used the Itemised Billing code assigned in the location 1 of the verified code will be used Conditions WARNING The software contained in the ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service Failure to upgrade the
324. oup for External Pager ssssesssssseseeeeee eene nennen nnne nnns 418 Pickup Group for Extension 418 VM Group Floating Extension Number sesssessseseseeeeeeneenennnn enne nnne 418 Idle Extension Hunting Type 418 Hunting Floating Extension 418 DWX Digital Wireless Extension 419 DWX Termination 4444444 ninanasa AAEN nnns tenen nennen 420 DWX PIN Cri 420 External Pager Floating Extension 421 Music Source Selection for Port 2 sessssssssssssseeeeeeeee nennen 421 Music Source Selection for Call Hold ssssssseeeeeeneeeneen nee 421 Music Source Selection for Transfer 2 2 10 421 Doorphone Call Destination 4 0 0 10000 enne nnne nnne 421 Door Number Reference 44 4 005 nnne nnne nnne nnn nnn 421 Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension 422 Outgoing Message OGM 22 22224 0 0 000 0000 422 DISA Security 2 22 4 nnne nennen nnne trennen nnns 422 New LI
325. outside party The following features are available Feature Transferring method With Transfer is completed after announcing the destination Announcement party Transfer is completed without an announcement without After dialling the destination while hearing a ringback Announcement ip tone the originator can replace the handset Call Transfer with Announcement is also known as Call Transfer Screened Call Transfer without Announcement is also known as Call Transfer Unscreened Conditions Feature Guide If Music on Hold is enabled music can be sent to the held party while the call is transferred It is programmable whether a ringback tone or music is sent Music Source Selection for Transfer If the transferred destination extension has set FWD to an outside party the call will be transferred to the outside party COS programming determines the extensions that are able to transfer a call to an outside party except a TIE line call Call Transfer on Trunk Calls Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement If the transferred destination party does not answer within the preprogrammed Transfer Recall time Transfer Recall Time the call will be redirected to the destination assigned on each extension If the destination is not assigned it will return to the extension who transferred the call If the destination is engaged in a call the hold alarm will be heard Availabl
326. p display will appear automatically The following items can be programmed as desired Item Parameter Description Date Set Year Month Date The date set on the PC will be used Time Set Hour Minute The time set on the PC will be used Dealer 4 10 digits Enter the dealer password All system programming Password items are accessible by entering this password Extension 1 Automatic Extension numbers can be assigned automatically or Numbering 2 Manual manually If Automatic is selected extension numbers are automatically assigned Operator amp Extension Only when in Automatic Extension Numbering Manager number mode e Assign the PBX operator to all time modes day lunch break night e The PBX operator s COS level will be set to COS 64 e Manager operation will be allowed on COS 64 Flexible 1 Pattern 1 If Pattern 1 with X is selected X will prefix all Numbering with X feature numbers Type 2 Pattern 2 Example Call Pickup feature number without Pattern 1 with X x47 Pattern 2 without X 47 For default of the flexible numbers refer to the Flexible Numbering Table available while a dial tone is heard 2 3 5 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering Operator 1 0 9 The feature numbers for Operator Call and Idle Trunk Local 2 9 0 Access ARS be selected They will be 0 or 9 Access Language Select and upload multiple languages into five language Data Upload areas LCD
327. p for outgoing calls Double click to enable System Class of Service Internal Call Block Parameter Description Value Range Class of Service Outgoing 1 64 Class of Service Incoming 1 64 Internal Call Block Selects whether the internal calls are Non Block Block blocked System SLT Parameter Description Value Range SLT Call Hold Mode Selects the SLT call hold mode Mode1 Mode2 Mode3 Mode4 Message Waiting Specifies the message waiting lamp 1 12 Lamp Pattern pattern Feature Guide 341 3 2 PC Programming 342 System PT System PT Common Parameter Description Value Range Time Display 12H 24H Assigns the time mode on the display 12H 24H Personal Password amp Display Mode Selects the display mode of personal password Secret Indicate Date Display Selects the date format Day Month Month Day LED Indication Call Forwarding FWD Selects the LED indication pattern of Call Forwarding FWD On Flash LED Indication Do Selects the LED indication pattern of Do On Flash Not Disturb DND Not Disturb DND OHCA KX T7235 Assigns to operate OHCA on KX T7235 Enable Disable Whisper OHCA Assigns to operate Whisper OHCA to Enable Disable Models before KX T72 used by the models before KX T72 series series and SLTs Off hook Monitor for Assigns to operate Off
328. pattern ple 1 40 g ple ringing p Salon Feature Guide System Tone System Tone Common 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Confirmation Tone 1 Assigns the confirmation tone 1 Voice Call Enable Disable Voice Call Doorphone Doorphone Confirmation Tone 2 Assigns the confirmation tone 2 Paging Enable Disable Paging Auto Answer Auto Answer Confirmation Tone 3 1 Assigns the confirmation tone 3 1 when Enable Disable sending a call Confirmation Tone 3 2 Assigns the confirmation tone 3 2 when Enable Disable receiving a call Confirmation Tone 4 1 Assigns the confirmation tone 4 1 When Enable Disable starting the conference call Confirmation Tone 4 2 Assigns the confirmation tone 4 2 When Enable Disable ending a conference call Confirmation Tone 5 Assigns the confirmation tone 5 While Enable Disable holding Distinctive Dial tone Assigns the distinctive dial tone Enable Disable Dial Tone Type Selects the dial tone type for extensions Type A Type B Extension Dial Tone for ARS Selects the dial tone for ARS Type A Type B Feature Guide 345 3 2 PC Programming 346 System Tone Tone Pattern Assignment Parameter Description Value Range Tone Pattern Assignment 0 6 Confirmation Tone 1 2 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 and 5 7 Warning Tone 8 15 Dial Tone 1 1
329. perator Intercept Routing No Destination TRS Barring applies 6 Sends the call to N V the trunk E Feature Guide 233 1 26 Networking Features Conditions e When a TIE line call arrives at a busy extension which has disabled Call Waiting the caller will hear busy tone If required Intercept Routing Busy DND can be activated e Inter digit time can be assigned for TIE line calls 234 Feature Guide 1 26 Networking Features 1 26 2 Virtual Private Network VPN Description Virtual Private Network VPN is a service provided by the telephone company It uses an existing line as if it were a private line There is no need to set up a private line or to lease a line from the telephone company Making and receiving both public and private calls is possible using the same line Public Private Discrimination a When making a call The public private discrimination number is required before sending the dialled number to the telephone company The public private discrimination number can be dialled manually or automatically by ARS programming gt 1 8 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS and or TIE line service programming gt 1 26 1 TIE Line Service b When receiving a call The telephone company distinguishes the call type If it is a private call the call is received by the TIE line service method If it is a public call the call is received by the Incoming T
330. phone Extension 391 Resource Interface Programming 421 Ring 43 Ring Detection 284 Ring Pattern Option 344 Ring Pattern Table Doorphone 343 Ring Pattern Table Others 344 Ring Pattern Table Trunk 343 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 35 Ringing Line Preference 62 Routing Plan Time Table 378 RS 232C Port Parameter 387 S Second Call Notification to Busy Extension SUMMARY 71 Second Dial Tone Waiting Code 372 Slot Card Deletion 425 Slot Card Programming 425 Slot Card Type Reference 425 SMDR 139 201 SMDR amp Maintenance Programming 423 SMDR Incoming Call Printing 424 SMDR Outgoing Call Printing 424 SMDR Page Length 424 SMDR Port 423 SMDR Skip Perforation 424 Software Upgrading 267 Software Version 389 Special Carrier Access Code 84 402 Speed Dialling TRS Barring Level 412 Speed Dialling Personal System 89 Stop Bits 423 Subaddressing 176 Subaddressing SUB 162 Supervisory Feature 53 System 326 System Configuration and Administration Fea tures 241 System Configuration Hardware 242 System Configuration Software 243 System Data Control 256 System Password for Dealer 397 System Password for User 398 System Programming 397 System Speed Dialling amp Caller ID 371 System Speed Dialling Name 394 System Speed Dialling Number 394 System Background Music BGM 348 System Basic 326 System Basic Date amp Time 326 System Basic Music 327 System Basic Operator 326 System Class of Servic
331. port INS OUS Display only Command Specifies the operating card command INS OUS Subscriber Number Specifies the trunk access number Max 16 digits telephone number Trunk Dialling Mode Selects the trunk dialling mode DTMF Pulse Channel Type Selects the channel type Undefined GCOT LCOT DID TIE OPX Extension Number Set Specifies the extension number Extension Number Trunk Attribute Selects the trunk attribute Note It is available only when Channel Type is TIE E amp M Public Private CPC Detection DID Outgoing Specifies the CPC signal detection time None 6 5 113 80 x n Outgoing 1 112 ms Incoming Specifies the CPC signal detection time 6 5 113 80 x n Incoming 1 112 ms CPC Detection L CO G CO Outgoing Specifies the CPC signal detection time 8 x n 2 112 Outgoing 6 5 n 113 ms Incoming Specifies the CPC signal detection time None 8 x n 2 112 Incoming 6 5 nz113 ms Feature Guide 307 3 2 PC Programming 308 Parameter Description Value Range DTMF Duration Selects the duration of the DTMF time 80 160 ms Trunk Pulse Speed Selects the pulse speed 10 20 pps Wink Signal Time out Specifies the length of time that the system is to wait for the Wink Signal after seizing the trunk Note It is available only when Start Signal Type is set to Wink 64
332. possible to eliminate each tone Feature Guide 215 1 26 Networking Features 1 26 Networking Features 1 26 1 TIE Line Service Description ATIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations The TIE lines can be used to call through the PBX to reach another switching system PBX or telephone company By using TIE lines the PBX can support not only communications with the public network but with other company members in the private network where the PBX is included Interface The following interfaces can be used to establish a private network Interface Network Type E amp M Analogue T1 E amp M Digital 64 kbps x 24 channels E1 E amp M Digital 64 kbps x 30 channels BRI PRI QSIG Digital ISDN 2B D 30B D 23B D VoIP Internet Protocol IP A trunk which is used for a private network should be assigned Private as the networking type 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY Explanation 1 Making a TIE Line Call One of the following two methods can be used to make a TIE line call a Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code Dial the Extension Number only 216 Feature Guide 1 26 Networking Features b Example 1011 1012 2011 Extn 3011 Dials 301
333. ppended to the call Account Code Feature Guide 203 1 23 Administrative Information Output Features 204 Feature Guide Number in the Item Description Pattern 9 CD Shows other call information with the following codes Condition CL Collect call Code TR Transfer FW FWD to trunk DO Call using DISA or TIE line service RM Remote maintenance modem NA Not answered call 10 Cost Shows the call charge Programmable Items Item Description Outgoing trunk call Controls whether the outgoing trunk calls are shown This setting is common throughout the PBX SMDR Outgoing Call Printing COS programming is also required Incoming trunk call Controls whether the incoming trunk calls are shown gt SMDR Incoming Call Printing Outgoing intercom call Controls whether the outgoing intercom calls are recorded Log in Log out Controls whether the log in log out status is recorded identification status ARS code Controls whether the user dialled number or the modified number is shown Caller s Controls whether the caller s identification number name number and name or none is shown If none is selected only lt l gt will be shown DID DDI MSN number Controls whether the DID DDI MSN number name number and name or none is shown If none is selected lt D gt will not be shown Secret dialling Controls secret dia
334. ption When waiting calls exceed the waiting queue capacity Queuing Call Limit they may be redirected to a preprogrammed destination or busy tone may be sent to the callers by the following features 1 Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group 2 Busy on Busy 1 Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group The Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group works in one of following conditions a There is no space in the waiting queue b The Queuing Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged in C Intercept command is assigned to the Queuing Time Table d The Overflow time Overflow Time Assignment expires e Manual Queue Redirection is performed Available Destination The overflow destinations can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group and each time mode day lunch break night The two different destinations can be assigned one for the a and b Overflow Destination by Busy and one for c d and e gt gt Overflow Destination on Time Out Destination Availability Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Digital Wireless Extension DWX Incoming Call Distribution Group DWX Ring Group VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Trunk Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Phone no Ot
335. r If the Hot Line feature is set and the user goes off hook a dial tone is generated for a specified Waiting time assigned through system programming Hot Line Waiting Time and then dialling starts During the Waiting time the user can dial another party overriding the Hot Line feature This feature is also known as Pickup Dialling Conditions e Capable Telephone PT SLT and T1 OPX Feature Guide 91 1 7 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 7 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 7 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Description TRS Barring can prohibit an extension user from making certain trunk calls by COS programming It is applied when the user goes off hook a trunk is seized and then a dialled number is sent to the trunk Each COS is programmed to have a TRS Barring level for each time mode day lunch break night There are seven levels available Level 1 is the highest level and the level 7 is the lowest That is level 1 allows all trunk calls and level 7 prohibits all trunk calls Levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining preprogrammed Denied and Exception Code Tables Denied Code Tables An outgoing trunk call made by an extension with a level between 2 and 6 is first checked against the applicable Denied Code Tables If the leading digits of the dialled number not including the Trunk Access number are not found in the table the call is
336. r the EFA button performs this feature It is also possible to perform this feature by entering the feature number when the current call is placed on a Consultation Hold Consultation Hold Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer Conference or Call Splitting Feature Guide 113 1 9 Conversation Features 1 9 8 Trunk Call Limitation Description Trunk calls are limited by the following features Feature Description Extension to Trunk Call Duration If a call between an extension user and an outside party is established the call duration can be restricted by a system timer selected for each trunk group Extension to Trunk Call Duration Time Both parties will hear an alarm tone 15 seconds before the time limit at five second intervals If the timer expires the line will be disconnected COS programming determines to enable or disable this feature Trunk Call Duration Limitation Whether this feature is applied to outgoing calls only or all calls is also programmable Trunk to Trunk Call except Unattended Conference Call Duration If a call between two outside parties is established the call duration can be restricted by a system timer selected for each trunk group Trunk to Trunk Call Duration Time Both parties will hear an alarm tone 15 seconds before the time limit at five second intervals If the timer expires the line will be disconnect
337. r the system sends dial Enable Disable tone to extension users who seize a T1 digital trunk line Pause Time Selects the length of Pause Time 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 s Flash Time Specifies the length of Flash Time None 16 x n 1 80 ms Disconnect Time Selects the maximum waiting time after releasing the trunk line before getting it again 0 5 1 5 2 0 4 0 12 0 s Feature Guide 319 3 2 PC Programming 320 Configuration Slot Extension Common Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no PBX No Slot No Card type is only extension KX T7250 Transfer Selects T7250 Transfer Hold Key Mode Mode1 Mode2 Hold Key Mode NE SL FR Reverse SLT Pulse Dialling Mode Selects the digit translation appropriate to your area Normal Sweden New Zealand SLT Off hook Time Specifies the minimum time that the system will recognise as an off hook signal sent from the SLT 8 x n n 3 255 ms SLT Off hook Guard Time Specifies the length of guard time preventing the system from mistaking an off hook signal as a dial 8x n nz12 63 ms SLT Pulse Maximum Break Width Specifies the maximum Pulse Break Width 8x n nz9 120 ms SLT Pulse Minimum Make Width Specifies the minimum Pulse Make Width 8 x n nz1 5 ms SLT Flash Detection Assigns the detection of a flash signal Enable Disable Hooking Flash Time Min Specifies t
338. rb DND Setting 363 Call Forwarding on Trunk Calls 411 Call Forwarding No Answer Time 415 Call Handling Features 13 Call Hold 120 Call Hold HOLD by ISDN 170 Call Hold Retrieve Deny 120 Call Park 122 Call Park Recall 122 Call Park Retrieve Deny 122 Call Pickup 63 Call Splitting 123 Call Transfer 118 Call Transfer CT by ISDN 171 Call Transfer on Trunk Calls 411 Call Transfer with Announcement 118 Call Transfer without Announcement 118 Call Waiting 37 Call Waiting Tone 72 Caller ID 4 144 285 306 310 318 350 Caller ID Features 144 Caller ID Modification Table 371 Caller ID Signal Type 410 428 Index Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution 25 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP 144 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection 117 Calling Connected Line Identification Presen tation CLIP COLP 172 Calling Connected Line Identification Restric tion CLIR COLR 173 Carrier 379 Channel 307 315 Charge Margin 395 Charge Metre 206 Charge Rate per Unit 396 Charge Tax 395 Circular Hunting 38 Class of Service 414 Class of Service COS 243 339 341 CLIP COLP Number Assignment 415 Clock Configuration Priority 325 Collect Call Block only for Brazil 30 350 Common 284 288 297 305 309 317 320 323 Common Basic 309 Common E1 Line Signal Setting 310 Common E1 MFC R2 Setting 1 312 Common E1 MFC R2 Setting 2 313 Completi
339. reak log out They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks to prevent calls being sent to their extensions Supervisory Incoming The supervisor extension can monitor Supervisory Feature Call Queue various information about the incoming Feature Monitor calls for each incoming call distribution group on his display Log in Log Monitor The supervisor extension can out Monitor monitor the log in log out status of the and Remote group members Control Remote Control The supervisor extension can change the status of the members Conditions Feature Guide One extension can belong to multiple incoming call distribution groups G DN button A Group Directory Number G DN button can be assigned on a flexible button for each incoming call distribution group It receives the incoming calls to the group One extension can have more than one G DN button of the same or different incoming call distribution groups Multiple G DN If all G DN buttons in the same incoming call distribution group are occupied the next incoming call will be held in a queue or will overflow If the G DN is not assigned incoming calls will arrive at the INTERCOM or CO button Even though an extension can have a G DN button for an incoming call distribution group thatthe extension has not been programmed to be included through system programming Incoming Call Distribution Group Extension Number the G DN button will not receive
340. red within a preprogrammed time period ringing stops and the call is cancelled Call Duration The call duration can be restricted by a system timer If the timer expires the call will be disconnected Door Open While engaged on a doorphone call the extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in 1 14 2 Door Open A doorphone door opener number can be assigned for each doorphone port Door Number Reference Feature Guide 131 1 14 Optional Device Features 1 14 2 Door Open Description An extension user can unlock the door for a visitor using his telephone The door can be unlocked by extension users who are allowed to unlock the door in the COS programming gt Door Open Assignment and tenant service However while engaged on a doorphone call any extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in Conditions e Hardware Requirement A user supplied door opener on each door e door opener will unlock the door even if a doorphone is not installed e Door Open Duration The door can remain unlocked for a preprogrammed time period Door Open Duration Time 132 Feature Guide 1 14 Optional Device Features 1 14 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Description A ring tone is sent through the external pager when an incoming call is received Any extension user can answer the call Conditions Hardware Requirement A user supplied external pager e Floating Ex
341. riority 379 ARS Routing Plan Time Table 378 ARS System 378 Audible Tone Features 214 Authorisation Code 106 Automatic Call Hold 120 Automatic Call Park 122 Automatic Callback Busy Camp On 68 Automatic Extension Release 66 Automatic Log out 52 Automatic Number Identification ANI 144 Automatic Privacy 127 Automatic Redial 88 Automatic Redial Interval 400 Automatic Redial Repeat Times 400 Automatic Route Selection ARS 4 101 378 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 101 Automatic Setup 259 Automatic Trunk Group Access Assignment 397 Auxiliary Connections 268 Background Music BGM 134 Basic Programming 394 Baud Rate 423 BGM External 134 Boss amp Secretary feature 59 BRI Automatic Configuration 407 BRI Configuration 408 BRI DIL DID MSN Selection 407 BRI Extension Tone 408 BRI Layer 1 Active Mode 407 BRI Layer 2 Active Mode 408 BRI Network Type 408 BRI Port Type 407 BRI Subscriber Number 407 BRI TEI Mode 408 Budget Management 4 96 Busy on Busy 50 Buttons and Functions 391 Call Directory Extension Dialling 70 Call Directory Speed Dialling 89 Call Duration Count Start Time 401 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP 167 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P 169 Call Forwarding FWD 57 Call Forwarding FWD Setting 354 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 55 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features SUMMARY 55 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Distu
342. ription Tone 1A 1B A normal dial tone is heard when a No features listed for dial tones 2 through 4 has been set or b ARS is used Tone 2A 2B Any one of the features below is set e Absent Message e BGM e FWD e Pickup Deny e Waiting DND e Extension Lock e Executive Busy Override Deny e Hot Line e Timed Reminder Tone 3A 3B Any one of the features below is performed e Account Code Entry e Consultation Hold e Answering a Timed Reminder call with no message e Answering a DISA call with no message Tone 4A 4B Messages are waiting for the extension Conditions Feature Guide Dial Tone Type A B It is possible to select dial tone type A or B for dial tones 1 through 4 If Type A is selected all dial tones 1 through 4 will become dial tone type A The dial tone type for the ARS feature can be selected separately If Type A is selected for the ARS dial tone 1A will be heard If Type B is selected dial tone 1B will be heard Distinctive Dial tone Distinctive dial tone mode can be disabled In this case dial tone 1 will be sent Tone Patterns and Frequencies All tone patterns and frequencies can be arranged as desired For default patterns refer to the Appendix in Section 3 1 Only dial tone 1 is sent to the extensions in the VM DPT DTMF group 1 25 Audible Tone Features 1 25 2 Confirmation Tone Description At the end of feature operations the PBX conf
343. rogramming Feature Guide 115 1 9 Conversation Features APT DPT SLT DWX e This connection is called the Wireless Parallel Mode 1 22 5 Wireless Parallel Mode 116 Feature Guide 1 9 Conversation Features 1 9 10 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection Description The Calling Party Control CPC signal is an on hook indication disconnect signal sent from the analogue trunk when the other party is hung up To maintain efficient utilisation of trunks the PBX monitors their state and when CPC signal is detected from a line the PBX disconnects the line and alerts the extension with reorder tone Conditions e CPC signal detection is programmable for incoming trunk calls gt LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time Incoming and for outgoing trunk calls gt CPC Signal Detection Time Outgoing e If your telephone company sends signals similar to CPC it is recommended not to enable CPC signal detection on outgoing trunk calls e f CPC signal is detected during a Conference call the line is disconnected The remaining parties stay connected e f CPC signal is detected during a call between a caller using the DISA feature and an extension or an outside party the line is disconnected Feature Guide 117 1 10 Transferring Features 1 10 Transferring Features 1 10 1 Call Transfer 118 Description An extension user can transfer a call to another extension or an
344. rrent connections to Auxiliary Connections automatically when the power supply fails All other conversations except for the Auxiliary Connections are disconnected during a power failure e DC Power Source If the DC power is available from the backup batteries even if the AC power fails the PBX will keep the current connections not the Auxiliary Connections e Only the trunk conversations can operate during a power failure All other features do not work 268 Feature Guide 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 2 4 2 Power Failure Restart Description When turning the electricity back on the PBX restarts the stored data automatically Before restarting the PBX can record the event in the error log Conditions e Inthe event of a power failure PBX memory is protected by a factory provided lithium battery There is no memory loss except the memories of Automatic Callback Busy Camp On and Call Park Feature Guide 269 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 2 4 3 Local Alarm Information 270 Description When a PBX error occurs and the PBX detects it the System Alarm button light on the PT of an extension assigned as the manager turns on red Pressing the button will show the error number on the display If multiple errors occur the error number will be displayed in order of highest priority to lowest and then the date Error List Priority Order
345. runk Call Distribution method DIL DDI MSN which is assigned on the trunk Example Public ISDN lt Public Discrimination gt 0 01 23 4567 01 23 4567 Public No b 27 T Dials 24 lt 01 45 6789 1 Discrimination gt 2 ps 111 113 401 ja Code 18 Code 2 t 54 Office Private No Office Office 4 201 Extn 202 Extn 301 302 Extn 401 Extn 402 DDI No 01 45 6789 Dials 9 01 23 4567 Dials 401 AR TIE e SE Note Public Call Private Call Feature Guide 235 1 26 Networking Features 236 Conditions Feature Guide Each trunk has its service type public private or VPN Select VPN to use this service through system programming Even if the telephone company does not support the VPN service it is possible to use the same kind of service when making a call by TIE line service programming and or Quick Dialling programming gt Quick Dialling in Section 1 6 1 Memory Dialling Features SUMMARY Quick Dialling Programming Example Location No Quick Dialling No Desired No Quick Dialling 01 2345 extension no of 9 123 4321 Public no of other PBX extension 2345 Explanation When an extension user dials 2345 he is connec
346. ry Receiving Status Selects the treatment of the call when the Ignore Disconnect Message Status Message provided by ISDN does Forced Disconnect match the actual status of the call CRC4 Mode Assigns whether to use CRCA for error Enable Disable checking CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check is an error checking control technique using a specified binary prime divisor that results in a unique reminder It usually is a 16 to 32 bit character PRI30 only Line Coding Selects the PRI line coding type B8ZS AMI PRI23 only Frame Sequence Selects the frame sequence type PRI23 only 4 Frame Multiframe F4 12 Frame Multiframe F12 Extend Multiframe ESF DTMF Duration Selects the duration of the DTMF signals sent to the ISDN 80 160 ms Inter digit Specifies the DTMF Inter digit Pause Time 64 16 x n n 0 11 Pause Time ms ISDN Trunk Subscriber Number Specifies the trunk access number Max 16 digits telephone number Ringback Tone Selects the ringback tone service Enable Disable Service ISDN Outgoing Call Selects the ISDN outgoing call type Overlap En bloc Type ISDN Centrex Assigns whether the system sends an ISDN Enable Disable Flash signal to the ISDN during conversation when pressing the FLASH or EFA button CCBS Completion Assigns whether the system accepts an ISDN Enable Disable of Calls to Busy Subscriber Flash signal
347. ry area data area on the MPR Card programming for each country area Language data for PT display Each language data area on the MPR Card SMDR There are two types Type 1 PT display and SMDR data except for PT system programming five languages max Type 2 PT system programming data one language max LPR software on slot card Flash ROM on the slot card e g BRI8 software data Cell Station CS software data Flash ROM on the CS Conditions The software version of the MPR Card can be confirmed through system programming gt Main Processor Software Reference Feature Guide 267 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 2 4 1 Power Failure Transfer Description If a power failure should happen or the PBX is in an off line condition specific SLTs are automatically connected to specific trunks Auxiliary Connections Conditions e Auxiliary Connections between Trunk Cards and Extension Cards should be done as per System programming so that conversation is maintained when the power is restored or the MPR is recovering e Trunk Cards and Extension Cards and the number of ports which can be used for Auxiliary Connections are as follows Trunk Cards LCOT16 two ports LCOT8 one port BRI8 one port and BRI4 one port Extension Cards MSLC16 two ports SLC16 two ports DHLC8 one port and SLC8 one port PBX changes the cu
348. s M RE EE NE MAR E sx Gn URN FERE 255 2 3 System Data Control M 256 291 PC Programirig seo b ox Obesidad cp RI Ea 256 239 2 ORAM NMG E 258 2 3 3 Automatic Setup aaa ech 259 4 0c 260 2 3 5 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering 2 000 0 261 2 360 Floating t 266 2 3 7 Software ANIA T 267 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics enne enne nnne nnne 268 2 4 4 Power Failure 268 2 4 2 Power Failure Hestart recte tee a ce Eee Edge x RE eR AE RE dS 269 2 4 3 Local Alarm Information ccccccccccsccssssssececeeeecescueaeaeeseeeeeeeeesaesessaseuseseeeesseaaas 270 3 Programming Instructions 273 3 1 amp 274 3 2 275 321 9 mr 281 c oc ane 326 Dod GOUD ELI E
349. s Summer Time Daylight Saving Time Setting The start and end dates of the summer time can be programmed The PBX clock will be adjusted one hour forward or backward at 3 05AM of the programmed date if enabled through system programming It means 3 05 AM will become 4 05 AM on the start date of the summer time and 3 05 AM will become 2 05 AM on the end date Note If the Timed Reminder Wake up call is set On the summer time start date the setting between 3 05 AM and 4 05 AM will not happen On the summer time end date the setting between 2 05 AM and 3 05 AM will ring twice Time Information from Telephone Company Time information can be received on the following calls e Anincoming call through an ISDN line e Anincoming call through an analogue line with Caller ID which includes the time information The PBX clock will be adjusted everyday when the first call after 3 05AM is received if enabled through system programming Note If the Timed Reminder Wake up call is set the setting will not happen or will ring twice depending on the adjustment e SMDR will record the call information using the PBX clock so that the recording time will be overlapped at the end of summer time Feature Guide 259 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 4 Quick Setup 260 Description It is possible to set up the basic PBX parameters using a personal computer PC When a PC accesses the PBX for the first time Quick Setu
350. s in location 0001 were dialled The Routing Plan Table 1 is selected just after the seventh digit 039 654 321 1 039 is found in location 0001 and the Inter digit time expired before the seventh digit is received The Routing Plan Table 1 is selected after the Inter digit time expired 038 4 03 is found in two locations locations 0001 and 0002 so the PBX waits for the next digit 8 038 is not found in any location then 03 location 0002 is selected The Routing Plan Table 4 is selected 03 4 The Inter digit time expired after receiving 3 03 is found in location 0002 The Routing Plan Table 4 is selected after the Inter digit time expired 4 Routing Plan Table 2 Assignment Arrange the time schedule as desired and store the carrier priority Time Table As the best carrier may vary with the day of the week and the time of day four time zones Time A through D can be programmed for each day of the week Carrier Priority Assign the appropriate carrier refer to 5 Carrier Table Assignment and their priority in each time zone The carrier is selected in the entry order the order in which entries are listed S ARS Leading Digit Table Location Leading Additional Routing Plan No Digits No ofDigits Table No 4 ARS Routing Plan Table 0001 03 8 Routing Plan Table 1 ier 2 8 Time Table o O
351. s accessible System Password for User Each system programming can be determined whether to be accessed by the end users e Remote Programming Limitation It is possible to disable remote access through system programming Remote Programming Assignment e Anamecan be assigned to the floating extension numbers of the analogue ISDN remote maintenance respectively Feature Guide 257 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 2 PT Programming Description A PT user can perform the following programming a Personal Programming Customising the extension according to his needs b System Programming Customising the PBX according to organisational needs c Manager Programming Customising specified frequently changing items e g Charge Management and Remote Extension Lock Conditions 258 Feature Guide COS programming determines what programming can be performed Programming Mode Level a System programming and personal programming b Personal programming only C No programming The extension which is connected to the lowest numbered extension port can perform both personal programming and system programming regardless of the COS The extension s assigned as the manager COS can perform manager programming During programming the PT is considered to be busy Access to system programming and manager programming is allowed only one at a time However one PBX supports up to 16 simultaneous programm
352. s of the same paging group only If any extension group is not assigned in a paging group any extension can page external pager s in the group Example Group 03 Paging Group 04 Paging 2 ay Extension Group 1 Extension Group 3 Extn 104 Extn 105 jit E Extn 100 Extn 101 T Example E Extn 104 can page the extensions in the extension groups 2 and 3 pagers 1 and 2 Any extension in paging group 2 or 3 can page the pager 3 128 Feature Guide 1 13 Paging Features Programming Example Paging Extension Group No External Pager No 2 Group No 001 002 003 1 2 3 01 02 a 03 04 O 05 Bp OOV asse u O Paging Group for Extension Group 2 gt Paging Group for External Pager Explanation Paging Group No Explanation 01 Extensions in extension group 001 can page or be paged 02 Extensions in extension groups 002 and 003 can page or be paged They can also page through an external pager 1 03 Extensions in extension group 003 can page or be paged They can also page through the external pagers 1 and 2 04 All extensions all extension groups can page through the external pager 3 05 All extensions all extension groups can page or be paged All external pagers can also be paged Conditions e
353. s out of service UNACC Fault Card was pulled out from the slot or the Preinstall Idle card is not communicating with the system Fault The number of trunk and or extension OVER ports exceeds the system capacity Fault DIF The card is different from the card specified in programming Fault The card inserted in a slot where the UNACC resources are already in use Preinstall There is no card fitted but the slot has been preprogrammed to accept a specific card Idle There is no card fitted and the slot has not been preprogrammed with a card type Command Specifies the Delete INS Delete Card has been removed from the operating card OUS Preinstall system commane INS It performs Automatic Configuration of the card if the slot is in the OUS condition OUS Operation is suspended If the port is on hook the port is disabled Otherwise the system will wait until the port becomes idle Preinstall There is no card fitted but the slot has been preprogrammed to accept a specific card 282 Feature Guide Configuration SIot OPB3 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Note Slot Refers to the slot no PBX No Slot Display only No OPB3 designates the number Location Refers to the optional 1 3 port position Display only Feature Specifies the option None MSG4 None No cards Card Type card type DPH4 DPH2 EIO4 ECHO16 MSG4 4 Channel Message Card DP
354. s voice channels at 1 5 Mbps transmission speed as a trunk or private line Voice is digitised by Pulse Code Modulation PCM 1 Channel Type LCO GCO DID TIE OPX The T1 Card supports five different channel types to provide connection at minimum expense One of the five channel types can be assigned to one of the 24 channels of the T1 Card individually according to tariffs and customer needs 2 Features The following table shows the features available for each channel type Feature Table Channel Type 1 TIE 2 DID 3 DIL 4 OPX 5 ANI LCO v GCO v DID v amp v v v v OPX v The feature is available Explanation Number in the Table Feature Description 1 TIE Line Refer to the TIE Line Service feature 1 26 1 TIE Line Service Service 2 Direct Inward Refer to the DID feature Direct Inward Dialling DID Dialling DID Direct Dialling Inward DDI in Section 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY 3 Direct In Line Refer to the DIL feature Direct In Line DIL in DIL Section 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY 180 Feature Guide 1 20 1 Line Service Features Number in the Table Feature Description 4 Off Premise An SLT which is installed off site can perform as if it were Extension installed locally The SLT makes
355. scription Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no PBX No Slot No Card type is only E amp M Interface Selects E amp M signal type Continuous Note If you select Pulsed with Answer or Pulsed without Answer you must select Wink in Start Signal Type on Page 319 Pulsed with Answer Pulsed without Answer Continuous No Answer First Dial Time DID TIE Specifies the waiting time after seizing the DID TIE channel before sending the dialled digits Note It is available only when Start Signal Type is set to Immediate on Page 319 32 x n n21 255 ms Answer Detection Time Specifies the duration time that the system requires to recognise the answer signal 32 x n n21 255 ms Inter digit Time Specifies the pseudo answer time 3 15 DTMF Tone DTMF Inter digit Pause Specifies the DTMF Inter digit Pause Time 64 16 x n 0 11 ms Pulse Dialling Pulse 96 Break Selects the break for pulse digits 60 67 Pulse Type Selects the pulse dialling signal type Normal Sweden New Zealand Pulse Inter digit Pause Selects the Pulse Inter digit Pause Time 630 830 1030 ms Pulse Feed Back Tone Selects whether to turn on or off the pulse feedback tone Yes No Pulse Maximum Break Width Specifies the maximum Break Width 72 8x n nz0 11 ms Pulse Minimum Make Width Specifies the minimum Make
356. service ISDN Service Access Conditions e ISDN Service Button A flexible button can be customised as an ISDN Service button A service access code can also be assigned on this button for a quick operation e This feature is not available to an SLT Feature Guide 165 1 18 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features Advice of Charge AOC Description The PBX can receive the call charge information on ISDN lines from the telephone company There are the following types Type Description Advice of Charge During Call AOC is received during the call and when the call is AOC D completed Advice of Charge ACC is received when the call is completed At End of Call AOC E This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 182 Advice of Charge AOC supplementary service Digital Subscriber Signalling System No One DSS1 protocol Conditions e ADPT user can see the call charge information on the display during the call e Budget Management If the amount of call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit an extension user cannot make further calls gt 1 7 2 Budget Management e AOC for ISDN extension An ISDN extension also receives AOC 166 Feature Guide 1 18 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP Description An extension user can forward the incoming
357. set in each time mode day lunch break night a Destination of incoming trunk calls DIL DID DDI MSN b Destination of the Intercept Routing C Overflow destination for incoming call distribution groups d Destination of incoming doorphone calls e PBX operator f COS for TRS Barring and for Trunk Access g Outgoing Message OGM for Timed Reminder Programming Examples of DID DDI Table and DIL Table DID DDI table can be programmed for each DID DDI number and a tenant Time Table number is assigned to each DID DDI number DIL table can be programmed for each trunk and a tenant Time Table number is assigned to each trunk Feature Guide 251 2 2 System Configuration Software lt DID DDI Table gt Location DID DDI Tenant DID DDI Destination No Time 3 Table Day Lunch Break Night 001 123 4567 1 105 100 VPS 105 100 VPS 002 123 2468 1 102 100 VPS 102 100 VPS lt DIL Table gt Trunk No Tenant Time DIL Destination Tabie Ne Day Lunch Break Night 01 1 101 100 VPS 101 100 VPS 02 2 102 100 VPS 102 100 VPS Explanation If a trunk call with a DID number 123 4567 is received at 20 00 1 Tenant Time Table number 1 will be used 2 The call is received during night mode in Time Table 1 3 The call will be routed to the extension 100 VPS 4 Holiday Mode The holiday mode activates automatically using the Aut
358. signed for each time mode day lunch break night 212 Feature Guide 1 24 Extension Controlling Features 1 24 5 Remote Extension Control by User Description A user can remotely change the feature settings e g FWD and time service mode for his own extension from inside or outside the PBX using DISA This feature can be used only on the extensions which are allowed to be controlled remotely on a COS basis The following features are available a FWD DND b Log in Log out C Absent Message d Extension Lock e Time Service Mode Switch This feature is also known as Remote Station Control by User Conditions e Personal Password A personal password Personal Password is required to use this feature If the wrong password is entered three times the line will be disconnected e feature number for changing the personal password is entered after entering the verified code verified code the password for the verified code will be changed e Remote operation is not available for the extensions in the Internal Call Block mode gt Internal Call Block in Section 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY Feature Guide 213 1 25 Audible Tone Features 1 25 Audible Tone Features 1 25 1 Dial Tone 214 Description The following dial tones inform extensions about features activated on the extensions Each dial tone type has two frequencies e g dial tone 1A and dial tone 1B Type Desc
359. sion DWX Features 1 22 1 Digital Wireless Extension DWX Connection Description This PBX supports the connection of a DWX e g KX TD7590 KX TD7690 It is possible to use the PBX features using the DWX like a PT DWX is also known as the Digital Portable Station PS Conditions e Hardware Requirement CSIF Card and a Cell Station CS e DWX registration is required through the system programming DWX Digital Wireless Extension Registration The registration can be cancelled gt DWX Termination e Handover Even if a DWX user moves during a conversation the portable will automatically switch between cells without disconnecting the call Handover Handover is not available when a cell is busy or there is no CS within range PBX 4 CS CS Interface Handover lt Calls will not be disconnected cS lt Feature Guide 195 1 22 Digital Wireless Extension DWX Features 1 22 2 DWX Ring Group Description DWX ring group is a group of DWX extensions which receives incoming calls Each group has a floating extension number and name If all DWXs are called using the extension number assigned for each DWX DWX Digital Wireless Extension Registration all channels for the DWX ring group may be used and a DWX user in the group may not be able to make another call If the multiple DWXs in a DWX ring group will be called using a floating extension number assigned to t
360. sion directly without operator assistance VM AA Service AA VM Service It is possible to switch the service mode assigned on the VPS port from the VM service to AA service or vice versa Feature Guide 185 1 21 Voice Mail Features 186 System Explanation 1 Service Mode Assignment Assign the service mode VM service or AA service to the VM DTMF group to correspond with the assignment of the VPS 2 DTMF Command Assignment Assign the DTMF command to suit the VPS settings Command Default Switching to VM 6 Switching to AA 8 Recording message H Listening message x H Note H Mailbox Number 3 VM Service a FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS Feature Guide b The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a call is forwarded from an extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called extension without knowing the mailbox number FWD to the VPS Sequence Selection If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS any incoming call will be forwarded to the VPS Itis also possible to send the AA command even in the VM service mode when calls are forwarded so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox This can be performed by selecting AA through system programming Transmitted Command Parameter In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode Answer by Switching to VM command Recording
361. ssigned The intercept destination is an operator tenant PBX Operator Assignment For PBX operator only Conditions e intercept Routing No Destination on off The Intercept Routing No Destination feature can be enabled or disabled through system programming If disabled reorder tone will be sent to the caller However the Intercept Routing No Destination feature always works for calls through the LCOT or T1 L CO G CO Card even when disabled e If an operator tenant system is not assigned The lowest jack numbered extension will be the intercept destination intercept Routing No Destination also applies to Calls from doorphones Feature Guide 29 1 1 Incoming Call Features Collect Call Block only for Brazil Description A collect call is rejected if the destination is assigned to reject the collect call on a COS basis This service is only provided with the following trunk cards Type 1 The service works when a collect call is received Type 2 The service works when a collect call is answered Type Trunk Card Type Description Type 1 Type 2 E1 LCOT E1 A collect call is rejected before it arrives at the destination Only assignment on a COS basis for the destination is required A collect call is rejected by sending the Collect Call Blocking flash signal after going off hook It is required to enable the Collect Call Block mode to each trunk group first
362. start time for Break 1 00 00 23 59 Break 2 Start Setting Assigns if Break 2 is used Enable Disable Break 2 Start Specifies the start time for Break 2 00 00 23 59 Setting Assigns if Break 2 ends Enable Disable Break 2 End Specifies the end time for Break 2 00 00 23 59 Break 3 Start Setting Assigns if Break 3 is used Enable Disable Break 3 Start Specifies the start time for Break 00 00 23 59 Setting Assigns if Break 3 ends Enable Disable Break 3 End Specifies the end time for Break 3 00 00 23 59 Feature Guide System Time Service Holiday 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Holiday Mode Specifies the holiday mode Day Lunch Break Night Holiday Schedule 1 24 Holiday Setting Assigns whether the Holiday schedule is Enable Disable used Start Date Specifies the start date Month Day End Date Specifies the end date Month Day System Numbering Plan System Numbering Plan Extension Parameter Description Value Range Block Extension N21 32 Dial Specifies the leading 1 or 3 digits of the extension number Any number 0 9 can be set 1 3 digits consisting of 0 9 Additional Digits Selects the additional digits None X XX Feature Guide 333 3 2 PC Programming System Numbering Plan Feature Parameter Description Value Range Operator Call Specifies the feature number for calling the 1
363. stination One ISDN BRI port can support a maximum of 10 MSNs Each MSN has a destination for each time mode day lunch break night Point to multipoint must be selected for the ISDN configuration gt BRI Configuration Method Flowchart A trunk call is received Are any MSNs assigned in the MSN table The call is routed to the Yes operator Intercept Routing No Destination Is the MSN found in the No MSN table Yes The call is ignored Does the call have its CLI information and is CLI mode enabled for the time mode No Yes CLI works Is the CLI destination assigned Is the MSN destination for the time mode assigned Vv The call is routed to the The call is routed to the The call is routed to the CLI destination MSN destination operator Intercept Routing No Destination Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller s identification number is assigned in the Caller ID Table the call will not be routed to the MSN destination but routed to the CLI destination Feature Guide 23 1 1 Incoming Call Features Programming Example of MSN Table for ISDN BRI Port 1 A table can be programmed for each ISDN BRI port Each BRI port has 10 MSN locations Tena CLI MSN Destination MSN nt Lunc Brea Nigh
364. storing programme AUTO OK gt SELECT Used to select the displayed function or to call the displayed telephone number F Used to adjust the volume and the display contrast or select Navigator Key D desired items for each function Used to make or receive a trunk call F1 button is already assigned as a L CO button Default L CO Pressing this button seizes an idle line automatically Flexible CO Trunk F1 to F3 buttons can be used as the desired feature buttons Button assignment is required If the term is in parentheses like DSS it means this button has been made into the DSS button Used to enter into the Function mode or access features by 2 pressing additional keys And used to set KEYPAD LOCK UNLOCK by pressing for about 2 seconds A Used to select the ringer volume seven levels while on UP DOWN U hook or ringing or receiver volume four levels during a conversation And used to shift the display Soft Used to perform the function or operation appearing above the button at the bottom of the display A DWX user can use some special features by a combination of buttons button a specified number X or f Feature Usage Used to change the dialling mode temporarily to tone Pulse to TONE Tone Conversion WAVESEARCH 2 search the best Cell Station on idle status Wave Feature Guide 1 17 Proprietary Telephone PT Features
365. sy on Busy or O Queuing Feature Le 6 b Redirects to the overflow destination Three calls are 5 waiting Ine queue 2 6 Manual Queue Redirection 19 The longest waiting call in queue B Group Call Distribution gt can be redirected to the overflow Calls are distributed by the 2 destination by pressing the Hurry up assigned method button The button shows the Hurry Only three extensions 1 up status agents can answer the call for Busy on Busy Supervisor Extension Extn Extn Extn Extn Extn Extn Extn 100 101 102 103 104 105 105 Monitors or controls the amp Incoming Call Log in Log out Distribution Group 1 Floating extension no 290 Name Sales incoming call distribution group status gt Queuing Feature in Section 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY Supervisory Feature in Section 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY 2 gt Log in Log out in Section 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY 1 Group Call Distribution Group Call Distribution in Section 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY Incoming calls are distributed using one of the following methods Distribution Method Description Uniform Call Calls go to a different extension uniformly each time a call Distribution
366. t gt E 1 5 digits END ENTER 01 100 02 200 ENTER Idle Extension Hunting Type 680 gt gt HuntingGroupNo gt Q gt 01 64 Circular END ENTER Terminate ENTER Hunting Floating Extension Number 681 gt lt gt Hunting Group No gt pr 01 32 eee gt fim gt gt a 1 5 digits ENTER END 418 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming DWX Digital Wireless Extension Registration 690 gt gt Exn No gt gt 5 digi END ENTER 001 128 1 5 digits ENTER Using the KX TD7690 When the DWX has not been registered yet gt gt ro 7 Push power PushF3 C Tone button for 2 key for 2 seconds Seconds When the DWX has been already registered 9 9 UC ROS Push power button Select DWX for 2 seconds F1 key PROGRAM Pilkey Select Select system KY REGISTRATION SETTING SEL SEL gt es Cheese F1 key SYSTEM No 1 4 Ft Assigns to set the System Lock by using KX TD7690 49 2 69 69 2 6 Select Select DWX Select Choose 1 BRocram F K9Y SETTING F1 key moe 1 1 Enable Disable ENTR gt gt Gu System Lock Password gt P System Lock Password gt gt C ENABLE gS F1 key 4 digits F1 key 4 digits DISABLE y Em C Tone F1 key Using the KX
367. t MOSS daai 151 Proprietary Telephone PT 2 2 2 1 1 0100 152 Fixed Buttons 152 FIEXIDIS BUttOnS 156 158 Display Informator m 160 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 161 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY 161 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol 165 166 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP ssssessseseeeeeeneenneeennenn 167 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P sssssssssseseeeeneneeeneeennnenenn nennen nennen nnne 169 Call Hold HOLD by ISDN ener tette 170 Call Transter CT by ISDN 171 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation 172 Malicious Call Identification 0 04 2 00 00000 174 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber 175 ISDN Extension s ior tree terere eque 176 E1 Line Service 2
368. ta link before saving the call 0 3000 s Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range ISDN T310 Specifies the maximum waiting time after 0 3000 s Extension receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message before expecting the continuance message T312 Specifies the maximum waiting time after 0 600 s sending the Setup message to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it T316 Specifies the maximum waiting time after 0 3000 s sending the Restart message before expecting the reply to it T320 Specifies the maximum time that the 0 3000 s system waits for packet protocol T322 Specifies the maximum waiting time after 0 600 s sending the Status enquiry message before expecting the reply to it T3D3 Specifies the maximum time that the 0 3000 s system tries to establish L2 in Permanent mode T3D9 Specifies the maximum time that the 0 3000 s system tries to disconnect L2 in Call by Call mode 0s setting means that the system timer suspended Feature Guide 291 3 2 PC Programming 292 Port Parameter Description Value Range Slot Refers to the slot no Display only PBX No Slot No BRI designates the number Port Refers to the port no Display only Port Type Selects the port type Trunk line Extn QSIG Master QSIG Slave Connection Refers to the status of the port connectio
369. tal message recording time Total message recording time 16 minutes fixed 16 minutes fixed Feature Guide 135 1 14 Optional Device Features 136 Feature Guide Note When the MSG Card expansion has been done all necessary messages must be recorded again The same message can also be played simultaneously to multiple callers Recording Methods a Record voice messages through the extension telephone b Record a back ground music through an external music source After recording messages a manager extension can also play them back for confirmation Progress tone is sent to a manager extension before recording messages during a preprogrammed time period or during clearing the prerecorded message stored at the floating extension number of desired message The longer one is applied If someone hears a message when a manager extension is trying to record messages a ringback tone will be sent to the manager extension before progress tone until all ports on the MSG Card s become idle 1 14 Optional Device Features 1 14 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Description An outside caller can access specific PBX features as if the caller is an SLT extension user on the PBX when the incoming call destination is a DISA floating extension number assigned to each DISA message The caller can have direct access to features such as e Placing an intercom call to an extension operator or any floating exte
370. tch the assigned time modes day lunch break or night Also used to check the current time mode status System Alarm Used to confirm a PBX error Answer Used to answer an incoming call Release Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation or to complete a Call Transfer Toll Restriction Call Barring Used to change the TRS Barring level of other extension users temporarily ISDN Service Used to access an ISDN service Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Used to switch between the CLIP and CLIR service Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR Used to switch between the COLP and COLR service ISDN Hold Used to transfer a call using the telephone company Headset Used to turn on off the headset mode while idle Used to switch between hands free mode and headset modes during a conversation Two way Record Used to record a conversation into your own mailbox Two way Transfer Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension One touch Two way Transfer Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension with one touch Live Call Screening LCS Used to monitor your own voice mailbox while an incoming caller is leaving a message and if desired intercept the call Voice Mail Transfer Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension One
371. ted to extension 2345 of other PBX whose public number is 123 4321 1 26 Networking Features 1 26 3 QSIG Network Description QSIG is a protocol which is based on ISDN Q 931 and it offers enhanced PBX features in the private network QSIG service can be used as a standard for ISDN TIE line network To establish a QSIG network a master and slave PBX must be determined for each ISDN port between PBXs The QSIG network supports private communications by the TIE line service method 1 26 1 TIE Line Service Connection Example Extn 1000 5 2000 1999 15 2999 3000 3999 System programming controls the following services individually for each ISDN port Service Table Service Description Details in Calling Line Sends the caller s number to the QSIG network when Calling Identification making a call Connected Presentation CLIP Line Connected Line Sends the number of the answered party to the QSIG 2 Identification network when answering a call CLIP COLP Presentation COLP Calling Line Stops the caller s CLI being presented to the called Identification party by the caller Restriction CLIR Connected Line Stops COLP being sent by the answered party Identification Restriction COLR Feature Guide 237 1 26 Networking Features 238 Service Description Detai
372. tension Number FWD DND button Target Specifies the target extension type Extension Group Call Type Specifies the target call type Both External Internal Account Code Entry Specifies the Account Code Entry button Conference Specifies the Conference button Terminate Specifies the Terminate button External Feature Access Specifies the EFA button Feature Guide 365 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Call Park button Park Type Specifies the park type None Automatic Specify Park Number Specifies the park number None 0 99 Call Log button Extension Number Specifies the extension number None Extension Number Log in button Log in Type Specifies the log in type None AIl Incoming call distribution group Extension Number Specifies the incoming call distribution group extension number None x Incoming call distribution group extension number Hurry up button Extension Number Specifies the incoming call distribution group extension number Incoming call distribution group extension number Wrap up Specifies the Wrap up button System Alarm Specifies the System Alarm button Time Service button Selection Specifies the switching time mode All Day Night Break Day
373. tension Number A floating extension number can be assigned for an external pager gt External Pager Floating Extension Number It is possible to access an external pager by dialling their floating extension numbers e Pager Volume It is possible to change the volume of an external pager Feature Guide 133 1 14 Optional Device Features 1 14 4 Background Music BGM Description A PT user can listen to BGM through the built in speaker while on hook and idle BGM External BGM can also be broadcast in the office through the external pagers this can be turned on and off by an extension assigned as the manager Conditions BGM Hardware requirement A user supplied external music source such as a radio e music through the PT is interrupted when going off hook e Each extension user can select the music source BGM External e Hardware requirement A user supplied external pager e Only the pagers which are assigned to be used by the tenant can be selected e External pagers can be used with the following priorities 5 Paging BGM 134 Feature Guide 1 14 Optional Device Features 1 14 5 Outgoing Message OGM Description An extension assigned as the manager manager extension can record outgoing messages OGMs for the following features Feature Usage Details in Access DISA Direct Inward System When a call arrives on a DISA line the caller will hear a
374. the caller Hands free Answerback with Headset The Hands free Answerback feature can also be used with a headset Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 1 Predialling Description A display PT user can check and correct the number to be dialled on hook The call will be initiated after going off hook Feature Guide 65 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 2 Automatic Extension Release Description After going off hook if an extension user fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period the call will be terminated by the PBX and the user will hear reorder tone To make a call the user must go back on hook and then off hook This operation applies to intercom calls only This feature is also known as Automatic Station Release Conditions e This feature works in the following cases When making an intercom call a first digit has not been dialled within a preprogrammed time period b After a digit is dialled if subsequent digits are not dialled within a preprogrammed time period 66 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 3 Line Preference Outgoing Description A PT user can select the outgoing line he prefers to originate calls on from the following line preferences through personal programming Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing Feature Description Intercom When an extension user goes off hook an intercom line is select
375. the extension even when the extension is in DND mode Description An extension user can answer incoming calls by the following methods 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 4 Answering Features SUMMARY Destination Feature Description Details in At the own Line A user can select the line seized when going Line extension Preference off hook Preference PT only Incoming Incoming Direct One A user can answer an incoming call simply touch by pressing the flashing button Answering Hands free A user can receive a call automatically and Hands free Answerback establish a hands free conversation Answerback At another Call Pickup A user can pick up a specified extension s Call Pickup extension Directed Group call ora call in a specified call pickup group Feature Guide 61 1 4 Answering Features Line Preference Incoming Description A PT user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences Each of these line preferences can be assigned on each extension through personal programming Preferred Line Assignment Incoming Type Description No Line Selects a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer an incoming call after you go off hook Prime Line Answers a call arriving at a Flexible CO G DN on which the prime line is assigned or the INTERCOM button simply by go
376. the group are busy through system programming If Disable is selected the call will be redirected to the preprogrammed destination by the Intercept Routing feature If Disable is selected and Intercept Routing feature is not set busy tone will be sent Conditions It is possible to call an extension extension port VM group directly If the calls are routed directly to the extension in the group it is possible to enable some features e g FWD Idle Extension Hunting on the extension in the group The Voice Mail DTMF DPT Digital Integration e g command transmit is also available on the extension Feature Guide 183 1 21 Voice Mail Features 184 Feature Guide One touch Voice Mail Feature Access It is possible to assign a One touch Dialling button for direct access to a Voice Mail feature For example to access a mailbox mailbox number 123 of the VPS extension number 165 directly assign 165 6123 to a One touch Dialling button When pressing this button the outgoing message OGM of the mailbox will be heard 1 21 Voice Mail Features 1 21 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Description The PBX and the VPS connected to the PBX can transmit commands using DTMF signals to each other The PBX sends preprogrammed commands using DTMF to the VPS automatically to change the answering service between Voice Mail VM service mode and Automated Attendant AA service mode or to inform the extension status e g
377. ther SMDR will print out the information about outgoing calls Printing Not Printing Incoming Call Printing Assigns whether SMDR will print out the information about incoming calls Printing Not Printing Intercom Call Printing Assigns whether SMDR will print out the information about intercom calls Printing Not Printing Log in out Printing Assigns whether the Log in Log out of Extension Groups Incoming Call Distribution Groups members and Phantom extensions will be printed out on the SMDR Printing Not Printing Room Status Printing Assigns whether room status will be printed out on the SMDR For the hotel Printing Not Printing Timed Reminder Assigns whether SMDR will print out the Printing Not Printing Printing information about Timed Reminder feature For the hotel ARS Dial Selects printing of the user dialled number User Dial ARS Dial or the modified number as dialled by ARS on the SMDR CLIP Caller ID Printing format Selects the printed format of CLIP Caller ID None Number Name Name Number DDI DID Printing format Selects the printed format of the DDI DID subscriber number None Number Name Name Number Speed Dialling Name Assigns whether the Speed Dialling Name will be printed on the SMDR Printing Not Printing Secret Dial Selects printing of secret numbers Secret Print Feature Guide 385 3 2 PC Progr
378. thod Example Tr PBX 2 Extn 1000 Jil 2 Extn 2000 iP aW Router Router Extn 1999 Jed Extn 2999 Dials 2999 PBX 3 Extn 3000 lt gt IP GW Extn 3999 Router J Required Programming Device Programming PBX For making a call e ARS programming Section 1 8 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS or TIE line service programming 1 26 1 TIE Line Service For receiving a call e TIE line service programming IP GW e address assignment for the own PBX and IP Gateway Circuit other PBXs Conditions e Hardware requirement the IP GW IP Gateway Circuit Card e QSIG service is available Feature Guide 239 1 26 Networking Features 240 Feature Guide Section 2 System Configuration and Administration Features Feature Guide 241 2 1 System Configuration Hardware 2 1 System Configuration Hardware 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration Description There are three types of extension ports as follows a DPT Port DPT DSS Console or Panasonic VPS KX TVS TVP series DPT Digital Integration can be connected b SLT Port SLT or KX TVS TVP series DTMF Integration can be connected Super Hybrid Port DPT APT DSS Console KX TVS TVP series or SLT can be connected EXtra Device Port XDP of Super Hybrid Ports A DPT and SLT can be connected to one super hybrid port TR SLT HL DPT
379. tination is in DND mode and Idle Extension Hunting is not available one of the following can be selected through system programming a b c Feature Guide Busy Tone Busy tone is sent to the caller Intercept Routing Intercept Routing Busy DND Intercept Routing in Section 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY will work and the call will be redirected to the preprogrammed destination Outgoing Message OGM An outgoing message OGM will be sent to the caller The message for busy DND mode can be assigned for each outgoing message OGM which has a DISA floating extension number 1 14 Optional Device Features DISA Intercept Routing No Answer If a destination is not available to answer a DISA call within a preprogrammed time period DISA Intercept time DISA Intercept Time after the call is reached the call will be redirected to the programmed destination by the Intercept feature gt Trunk Group Intercept Destination or Extension Intercept Destination If the intercept destination is not available to answer the call within a preprogrammed time period DISA Disconnect Time after Intercept after the DISA Intercept time expires the call will be disconnected SMDR The call information for DISA is recorded as the one of the DISA floating extension numbers Programming Example The following items can be assigned to each outgoing message OGM e Floating Automated Attendant No
380. tion 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the Idle Trunk Access ARS number of PBX 1 9 and telephone number 01 23 4567 PBX 1 modifies the call adds 952 and the Idle Trunk Access ARS number of PBX 2 9 and sends the call to PBX 2 which has PBX code 952 through the TIE line trunk group TRG 2 according to the ARS programming of PBX 1 PBX 2 sends the call to the outside party 01 23 4567 Feature Guide 227 1 26 Networking Features 228 Feature Guide c Blocking of Trunk Call through Other PBXs and How to Override It To prohibit a TIE line call to go through PBX 2 for making a trunk call if PBX 2 is Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX e g KX TDA100 or KX TDA200 PBX 2 should disable the trunk group of the outgoing call from PBX 2 against the COS of the trunk group of the incoming call to PBX 2 Outgoing Trunk Group Number like the programming example shown below TRS Barring applies to a TIE line call on a COS of the trunk group of the incoming call basis To override this prohibition access the DISA floating extension number of PBX 2 and enter a verified code to change to the COS temporarily Programming Example of PBX 2 Trunk Group No COS No 1 3 2 2 3 2 TRG of Incoming Outgoing Call Call TRG 1 TRG2 TRG3 COS 1 x x COS 2 x x x COS 3 x x x Extn 1011 Extn 1012 1 26 Networking Features Example Telephone
381. tion CLI Distribution Description 1 1 Incoming Call Features Directs an incoming trunk call to a destination when the caller s identification number e g Caller ID matches the number in the System Speed Dialling Table which is used as the Caller ID Table Each Caller ID System Speed Dialling number can have its own destination CLI Feature Description Details in Caller ID Caller s number is sent from an analogue 1 15 1 Caller trunk ID Calling Line Identification Caller s number is sent from an ISDN line Calling Presentation CLIP Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Automatic Number Identification ANI line Caller s number is sent from an E1 or T1 1 19 1 E1 Line Service 1 20 1 T1 Line Service CLI always works in conjunction with the following call distribution methods a DIL b DID c DDI d MSN Ringing Service Each trunk for DIL and the DID DDI MSN number can enable or disable the CLI feature for each time mode day lunch break night When the call has its Caller ID and the CLI is enabled for the time mode the call will be handled by the CLI method Programming Example of System Speed Dialling Table for CLI Location System Speed System Speed Speed Dialling No Dialling No Dialling CL Destination 000 901234567890 ABC Company 001 System Speed Dialling Number System
382. tion CLIR Stops the caller s CLI being presented to the called party by the caller Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR Stops COLP being sent by the answered party Service Description Details in Direct Dialling Directs a call with a DDI number to a Direct Inward Inward DDI preprogrammed destination P P only Dialling DID Direct Dialling Inward DDI Multiple One ISDN port can support a maximum of 10 Multiple Subscriber MSNS for routing incoming calls P MP only Subscriber Number MSN Number MSN Ringing Service Calling Line Sends the caller s telephone number to the Calling Identification network when making a call The called party Connected Presentation can see the number on his telephone display Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Subaddressing SUB You may add digits after the telephone number These digits will be passed to ISDN terminal device User to user Signalling Type 1 through 3 UUS 1 through UUS 3 Transmits a specified volume of the data through the D channel between the ISDN terminal devices of different PBXs using UUS types 1 through 3 Advice of Charge The PBX can receive the call charge information Advice of AOC on ISDN lines from the telephone company Charge AOC Call Forwarding Forwards an incoming call to another outside Call CF by ISDN party using the ISDN service of telephone Forwarding company C
383. tion group Basic Call Waiting Selects the way to distribute Call Waiting All Destination Distribution Call Forwarding FWD Selects if the extension rings when a call Skip Ring Mode reaches the group if FWD is set Do Not Disturb DND Selects if the extension rings when a Skip Ring Mode reaches the group if DND is set Tenant Number Specifies the tenant which you are going to 1 8 programme COS Level Specifies the COS level 1 64 CLIP COLP Specifies the CLIP COLP number used for Max 16 digits the incoming call 352 Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Queuing Overflow Intercept Routing Destination Day In Day mode Max 32 digits including Lunch In Lunch mode rend PF Break In Break mode Night In Night mode Queuing Call Limit Specifies the number of calls that may 1 30 queue Time out amp Hurry up Intercept Routing Destination Day In Day mode Lunch In Lunch mode Break In Break mode Night In Night mode Max 32 digits including and PF Overflow Time Assignment Specifies the maximum time to wait in a queue No 10 x n n21 125 s Hurry up Level Specifies the hurry up level None 1 30 Queuing Time Table Day In Day mode Lunch In Lunch mode Break In Break mode Night In Night mode None Table 1 64
384. to it 0 600 s T201 Specifies the maximum waiting time after resending the TEI check request to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T203 Specifies the maximum time to detect no communication status of L2 0 600 s T301 Specifies the maximum waiting time after making a call to the ISDN before receiving the reply to it 0 18000 s T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call Applies to the overlap sending 0 600 s T303 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Setup message to the ISDN before receiving the reply to it 0 600 s T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call Applies to the overlap dialling 0 3000 s T305 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the DISC message to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it 0 3000 s T306 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the DISC message to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it This setting is used when inband tone is supplied 0 3000 s T307 Specifies the maximum waiting time after Suspending before restarting 0 6000 s T308 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Release message to the ISDN before expecting the reply to it 0 600 s T309 Specifies the maximum time that the System tries to disconnect the da
385. tor Features Description This PBX supports a PBX operator and a tenant operator Any extension and incoming call distribution group can be designated as a PBX and or a tenant operator Type Description PBX operator An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as a PBX operator for each time mode day lunch break night gt Operator Assignment Tenant operator An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as a tenant operator The tenant operator may be the extension or incoming call distribution group of another tenant Example Extension 110 in tenant 1 is the tenant operator of tenant 3 Operator Call An extension user can call an operator with a simple operation When an operator call is made the call is routed to the tenant operator If no tenant operator exists the call will be routed to the PBX operator The time mode depends on the tenant of the calling extension If neither the tenant operator nor the PBX operator exists the caller will hear reorder tone Conditions e extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as both the tenant and PBX operator e A tenant operator can be assigned for multiple tenants 254 Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 6 Manager Features Description An extension assigned as the manager manager extension is allowed to use the specified features COS programming determines t
386. ture is applied when making a call after activating this feature e cannot be applied to the call dialled after activating this feature e tis impossible to seize any other trunk during this feature number dialled after activating this feature will not be recorded by SMDR The call charge fee will be treated as part of the original call you made or received 170 Feature Guide 1 18 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features Call Transfer CT by ISDN Description An ISDN call can be transferred to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature without occupying a second ISDN line This feature can be used only when the network supports the explicit linkage option This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 369 Explicit Call Transfer ECT supplementary service Conditions e availability of this feature is dependent the contract with the telephone company e This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN port basis e Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement is possible e call charges after completing this feature will not be recorded by the PBX Feature Guide 171 1 18 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Description Calling Line
387. ugh DWX programming The button assignment is the same for PT 1 17 2 Flexible Buttons Some special feature buttons e g WAVESEARCH button may be customised depending on the DWX type Feature Guide 199 1 22 Digital Wireless Extension DWX Features 1 22 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Description A DWX can be used in parallel with a wired telephone PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX In this case the wired telephone is the main telephone and the DWX is the sub telephone When Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is enabled the two telephones share one extension number main telephone s extension number like XDP Parallel mode for a DPT and an SLT Conditions e f one of the telephones goes off hook while the other telephone is on a call the call is switched to the telephone going off hook e Wireless Parallel Mode can only be set from a DWX The wired telephone can accept or deny this feature through COS programming Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone Once this feature is set the setting at the wired telephone cannot be changed unless a DWX changes the setting e extensions with Parallel mode DPT SLT cannot be paired with a DWX PBX DHLC Cell Station XDP Parallel mode Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Proprietary Cordless Phone Proprietary DWX Telephone PT Telephone PT Extn 102 Extn 103 200 Feature Guide 1 23 Administrative Information Output Features 1 23 Administrative I
388. unk Access An idle trunk is selected from the trunk groups assigned for Idle Trunk Access If multiple trunk groups are available the trunk group hunting sequence can be determined through system programming Trunk Hunting Order for Idle Trunk Access and Trunk Group Access The trunk hunting sequence in a trunk group from lowest numbered trunk from highest numbered trunk or rotation can be determined through system programming Feature Guide 75 1 5 Making Call Features 76 Feature Guide A company name or customer name can be assigned on a trunk port basis Trunk Name so that the operator or extension user can view the destination which the caller is trying to reach before answering It is possible to identify the trunk port that has a trunk connected to it gt Trunk Connection This prevents extension users from originating a call to a trunk which is not connected 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 9 Emergency Call Description An extension user can dial the preprogrammed emergency numbers Emergency Dialling Number after seizing a trunk regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension Conditions e specified number of emergency numbers can be stored some may have default values Emergency numbers be called even when in Account Code Forced mode in any TRS Barring levels after the preprogrammed call charge limit is reached in Extension Lock Feature Guide 77 1 5 Maki
389. ure Guide 81 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 14 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX Description This PBX can be installed behind an existing host PBX This is performed by connecting extension ports of the host PBX to trunk ports of this PBX A Host PBX Access code assigned through system programming Host PBX Access Code is required to access the telephone company from the host PBX The Trunk Access number of the host PBX should be stored as a Host PBX Access code on a trunk group of this PBX basis A preprogrammed Pause time gt LCOT Pause Time will be automatically inserted between the user dialled Host PBX Access code and the following digits 1 5 13 Pause Insertion Example Telephone Company Host PBX Access Code 0 Host PBX Outside Party 01 23 4567 Idle Trunk Access Code 9 TRG1 Extn 101 Extn 102 Dials 901 23 4567 Host PBX Access Code Telephone No mu e L Dials 9 0 01 23 4567 Dials 9 101 Idle Trunk Idle Trunk Access No Telephone No Access No Host PBX Extn No Access Code of the Host PBX Note 0 should be assigned as a Host PBX Access code for trunk group TRG 1 of this PBX 82 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features Conditions e 5 TRS Barring checks only the dialled telephone number excluding the Host PBX Access code when accessing the
390. user originates the conference Unattended Conference APT user can leave a conference to allow other parties to continue the conversation The user may return to the conference if he desires Conditions e CONF Conference Button For a PT which does not have the CONF button a flexible button can be customised as the Conference button Unattended Conference Call Duration The call duration can be restricted by the Unattended Conference Recall time The Unattended Conference Recall time consists of the following programmable timers a Unattended Conference Recall Start Time When the timer expires Unattended Conference Recall starts to be heard at the conference originator If the originator does not return to the conference 1st Unattended Conference Recall Continuation time will start b 1st Unattended Conference Recall Continuation Time When the timer expires an alarm tone starts to be heard at parties in the Unattended Conference If the originator does not return to the conference 2nd Unattended Conference Recall Continuation time will start C 2nd Unattended Conference Recall Continuation Time When the timer expires the Unattended Conference call is disconnected If the originator returns to the conference before the Unattended Conference call is disconnected the timer will be cancelled If not Unattended Conference Recall and an alarm tone will continue to be emitted until the Unattended Conference call is disconnected
391. usy No tone Call Retry Busy Tone DISA Intercept Time Time Time out Time out The message for The call is routed to the me call is disconnected the busy DND mode intercept destination Goes to is sent to the caller DISA Intercept Routing The call is routed to Te call is established No Answer the intercept destination Intercept Routing Busy DND G oes to Does the destination answer the call DISA Disconnect Time after Intercept Time out the call is established The call is disconnected Goes to Feature numbers are available only when the Remote COS Access feature is used for Security Mode Override Feature Guide 141 1 14 Optional Device Features 142 Conditions WARNING When you enable the Trunk to Trunk Call feature of DISA and a third party discovers the password verified code personal password of the PBX there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls using the telephone line and the cost will be charged to your own account In order to avoid this problem we strongly recommend the following points Feature Guide a Carefully maintain the secrecy of the password b Specify a complicated password as long and random as you can make it c Change the password frequently Hardware Requirement The OPB Card and MSG Card DISA Delayed Answer Time It is possi
392. waiting time after 0 0 12 0s Message OGM Start playing the DISA message Time DISA First digit time Specifies the maximum time allowed 0 120 s between the start of DISA dial tone and the first digit DISA Automated Specifies the length of waiting time before 0 5 s Attendant Time recognising the first digit as a DISA AA number If this timer expires before the second digit is dialled the system assumes that the first digit is a DISA built in AA number DISA Intercept time Specifies the length of waiting time before 0 60 s activating DISA If an incoming trunk call directed to a single extension is not answered within this time DISA redirects the call to another preprogrammed destination DISA Disconnect time Specifies the disconnect time after 0 60 s after Intercept Intercept Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range DISA Trunk to Trunk Specifies number of time to prolong the No Limit 1 15 Call Times DISA trunk to trunk call DISA Extend Time Specifies the length of time to prolong the 0 7 min DISA trunk to trunk call DISA Progress tone Specifies the length of continuing time to 0 7 s Continuation Time send the progress tone before starting DISA recording DISA Reorder Tone Continuation Time Specifies the length of continuing time that DISA Reorder Tone is heard Continue 0 15 s Doorphone Timer Doorphone Call Ring Duration Time Specifies
393. we Priority 1 SUN Time A 9 00 1 A telecom 4 D telecom Time B 12 00 1 A telecom 2 B telecom Time C 15 00 1 A telecom 2 B telecom Time D 21 00 3 C telecom 1 A telecom SAT Time A 9 00 3 C telecom 2 B telecom Time B 12 00 3 C telecom 1 A telecom Time C 15 00 3 C telecom 1 A telecom Time D 21 00 3 C telecom 2 B telecom ARS Routing Plan Time Table 104 Feature Guide 1 8 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 2 gt ARS Routing Plan Table 1 16 Assignment 5 Carrier Table Assignment A specified number of carriers can be programmed Assign the following items for each Carrier Table Carrier Name 9 Assign the carrier name Delete Digit 9 Assign the number of digits to delete from the beginning of the user dialled number Carrier Access Code Assign the code to access the carrier Trunk Group Assign the trunk groups which connect to each carrier Modify Commands 2 Assign the commands to modify the dialled number to access the carrier Command Explanation Command Description Number Add the number C Add the Carrier Access code Insert a pause and change to tone DTMF signal P A Add the Authorisation code for a tenant 3 G Add the Authorisation code for a trunk group Add the Itemised Billing code H Add the dialled number after the digits are deleted Home p
394. xtension Group each of which consists of extension groups One extension group can belong to several call pickup groups Feature Guide 63 1 4 Answering Features 64 Hands free Answerback Description A PT user with a speakerphone can talk to a caller without lifting the handset If the user receives a call in Hands free Answerback mode a hands free conversation is established in the following method Type Answering Method Intercom Call Established immediately after a beep tone at the called extension and the caller hears a confirmation tone Trunk Call Established after a specified number of rings a called extension hears a beep tone and the caller hears a confirmation tone Including a call from an extension that placed a trunk call on a consultation hold Conditions Hands free Answerback applies to Intercom calls and trunk calls to a single destination and incoming call distribution group calls in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution method Hands free Answerback for Trunk Calls Personal programming is required to use this feature Hands free Answerback Selection for Outside Calls Secret Monitor The beep tone which the called party hears before answering can be eliminated through System programming Alternate Receiving Calling Mode Ring Voice Override Hands free Answerback overrides the Alternate Receiving mode preset on the telephone and the Alternate Calling mode from
395. xtension Number PC programming using a telephone connected in parallel with the modem can be done in the following ways e Direct Access Dial the DIL DID DDI number whose destination is the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance e Through DISA Dial the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance using the DISA feature Call Transfer Call an extension probably the operator and request a transfer to the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance Using an ISDN A BRI or PRI Card must be installed The floating extension number TA interface 64 of the ISDN remote maintenance must be assigned ISDN kbps through Remote Floating Extension Number and dial the DIL DID DDI an ISDN Trunk MSN number whose destination is the floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance The RMT Card is not required for this method Conditions e Access to system programming is allowed only one at a time e System Programming Password Level To access system programming a valid password must be entered There are two types of passwords each of which is factory preprogrammed default and can be changed If the wrong password is entered over a preprogrammed number of times remotely access will be locked Type Description Dealer Password All system programming is accessible System Password for Dealer User Password Permitted system programming i
396. y the called extension Confirm The PBX receives confirmation that the 9 confirmation tone feature has been successfully set or cancelled e g Message Waiting on the extension Disconnect The caller has hung up 9 Example Anincoming call reaches the VPS The VPS greets the caller Thank you for calling Panasonic If you know the extension Transfer number of the person you wish PBX The caller dials the extension number extn 102 The VPS will transfer the call to the extension via the PBX 9 If the extension is not available the PBX sends DTMF status signal of the extension busy status to the VPS The VPS receives the DTMF status signal and send the appropriate message to the caller Sorry The extension is busy Would you like to leave a message Conditions Feature Guide Voice Mail VM Transfer Button A flexible button can be customised as the Voice Mail VM Transfer button with the floating extension number of the VM group as the parameter It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS answers the call and the PBX sends the Follow on ID to the VPS Itis possible to assign the time period between when the VPS transfers the call using the AA service to the PBX and the PBX sends the DTMF status signal to the VPS Itis possible to select whether the mailbox number is the same as the extension number or the mail

- Syd-Com

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents